Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
E. Welding certificates.
F. Material certificates.
Parcel 35 1 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.4 ADMIXTURES
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content
of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on
the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI
301.
B. Cementitious Materials: With written permission of the Engineer, use fly ash,
pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to
reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by
not less than 40 percent.
Parcel 35 3 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
Parcel 35 4 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints
into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
Parcel 35 5 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and
ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven
days.
Parcel 35 6 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Testing and Inspecting: SRP will self-perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
1 Part 1: General
1.01 Description
A. Related Sections:
1. General Requirements: Division 1
Parcel 35 7 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Definitions:
1. Concrete work: Cast-in-place structural concrete for use in buildings, paving, and
appurtenances. Specific aspects of concrete work are specified in other sections:
a. Testing: Section 03 00 01.
b. Formwork: Section 03 10 00.
c. Reinforcement: Section 03 20 00.
d. Cast in-place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
e. Precast Structural Concrete: Section 03 40 00.
g. Architectural Precast Concrete: Section 03 41 00
2. Approved or permitted: Approved or permitted by Engineer.
3. Exposed construction: Exposed to view.
4. Exposed to public view: Situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a
public location after completion of building. A public location is accessible to persons not
responsible for operation or maintenance.
5. Normal weight concrete: Concrete for which density is not a controlling attribute,
made with aggregates of types covered by ASTM C33, usually having unit weights in
range of 2160 to 2560 kg/cu m.
6. Required: Required by Contract Documents.
7. Submitted: Submitted to the Engineer for review.
A. Do not allow construction loads to exceed superimposed load which member, with
necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying safely and without damage.
Amount, method of distributing and proposed supplemental support of loads during
construction is responsibility of Contractor.
Parcel 35 Specifications
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 9 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related sections:
2. Routine testing of concrete furnished to job site for compliance with Contract
Documents will be performed entirely by Contractor at his expense. Routine testing
consists of tests for compressive strength, slump, air, temperature and unit weight. Three
sets of three cylinders each shall be cast for every 75 m3 concrete or fraction thereof for
each mixture design placed in one day; one near the start of the pour, the second around
middle of the pour and the third near end of the pour. Three cylinders (one from each
set) shall be tested at 7 days; three cylinders (one from each set) at 28 days, and
remaining three kept reserved for 90 days strength or as required for future use.
Parcel 35 10 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Standards:
3. ASTM-C42: Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
2. Authority: Agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax,
enlarge or release any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept
portion of Work.
A. Project information:
2. Production sample test reports (when required): Include same data as for mix
designs.
Parcel 35 11 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Submit concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include
results of testing performed to qualify materials and to establish mix designs. Place no
concrete until Contractor has received approval in writing. See submittals paragraph.
A. Evaluate test results for standard molded and cured test cubbes separately for
each concrete mix design. For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix
design shall be represented by at least five tests.
Parcel 35 12 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Core tests: Obtain and test largest practical diameter cores (50 mm minimum), in
accord with ASTM-C42. If concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air
dry cores at temperature 16 to 26 deg C, and relative humidity less than 60 percent for 7
days before test. Test dry. If concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet
under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning.
1. Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in
place that is considered potentially deficient in strength. Location will be determined by
the Engineer. If, before testing, one or more of cores shows evidence of having been
damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure, replace it.
3. Fill core holes with low slump patching compound per Section 03 31 01.
A. General:
B. Dimensional tolerances:
Parcel 35 13 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Finish:
1. Slabs:
b. Repair may involve removing high spots with a terrazzo grinder, filling low spots
with a patching compound, or other remedial measures as permitted.
2. Formed surfaces:
Parcel 35 14 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective finish.
D. Strength of structure:
d. Curing less than that specified, likely to result in deficient concrete strength.
b. Core tests per 3.03 C. Performed only when concrete strength is potentially
deficient, and when safety of structure is not confirmed by structural analysis. Do not use
if impractical to obtain or not feasible, or will damage structure.
Parcel 35 Specifications
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 16 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Definition(s):
1. Formwork: Total system of support for freshly placed concrete including mold or
sheathing which contacts concrete as well as supporting members, hardware, and
necessary bracing.
B. Related sections:
1. Design, engineer, and construct formwork for applicable gravity and lateral loads
and pressures as well as other design considerations or applicable requirements of legal
local building code.
2. Develop shoring and reshoring pattern and sequence so as not to exceed safe
structural capacity of supporting structural systems.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
C. Steel form deck shall be fabricated from steel sheet conforming to ASTM A446,
Grade E, with galvanized coating class G60. Provide deck with minimum structural
properties as indicated. Where not indicated, design in conformance with Steel Deck
Institute Specifications and Commentaries for Non-Composite Steel Form Deck, except
as otherwise specified or indicated. Deflection of deck units under the load of wet
concrete shall not exceed 1/240 of the clear span. Fabricate deck to provide minimum of
3 spans continuous wherever practical. Provide minimum 50 mm end laps centered over
supports, and side laps of one-half corrugation. Provide minimum 38 mm bearing of deck
on supports.
A. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of cement fines. Place chamfer strips
in outside corners of forms to produce 45 degree beveled corners on permanently
exposed surfaces. Interior corners on such surfaces and edges of formed joints will not
require beveling.
Parcel 35 18 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and
take up settlement during concrete placing operation. Securely brace forms against
lateral deflection.
D. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and at other points
where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is
placed. Locate temporary openings at inconspicuous locations in surfaces exposed to
view.
G. Fasten wedges (used for final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement) in
position after final check.
I. Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs, supported directly on
formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel.
J. Provide chamfer at corners of all beams, walls, and columns unless otherwise
indicated.
2.03 TOLERANCES
Parcel 35 19 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous vertical
lines:
a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arrises, measured before removal of
supporting shores:
3. Deviations from true plane of concrete surface exposed to view caused by bulging
of form facing material between supports:
Parcel 35 20 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Deviation from established position in plan of linear building lines, columns, walls:
5. Deviation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: 6
mm.
a. Minus: 6 mm.
b. Plus: 12 mm.
7. Footings:
b. Misplacement or eccentricity:
(1) 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.
c. Thickness:
(2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit (except that which may interfere with
other construction).
8. Deviation in steps:
Parcel 35 21 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
a. In flight of stairs:
b. In consecutive steps:
2. Deviation in plan and elevation from lines parallel to indicated linear building lines:
a. Adjacent members less than 6 m apart: 1 IN 500, but not less than 3 mm.
4. Maximum deviation for entire length from established position in plan of linear
building lines, columns, walls: 12 mm.
Parcel 35 22 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Establish and maintain in undisturbed condition and until final completion and
acceptance of project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference
purposes to check tolerances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Clean form surfaces and embedded materials of mortar, grout and foreign material
before concrete is placed.
2. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in puddles in forms nor in
contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
C. Contractor shall use 1-inch chamfers for all vertical and horizontal corners of all
types of forms unless a pre-approval is obtained from the Engineer in writing in advance.
A. Remove the forms accordingly: (in compliance with ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork
for Concrete)
Parcel 35 23 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Slabs:
When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at early age, remove forms as
soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.
C. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished
without damage to concrete.
D. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting
weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to
resist damage from removal.
E. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of
concrete in beams, slabs and other concrete members in place until concrete has
attained its specified strength. Where reshoring is planned, supporting formwork may be
removed when concrete has reached 80 percent of specified strength, provided
reshoring is installed immediately.
Parcel 35 24 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. When shores and other vertical supports are arranged so non-load-carrying form-
facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports,
facing material may be removed at earlier age as permitted.
G. Except for steel form deck, remove all formwork unless specifically indicated to
remain in place.
3.03 RESHORING
B. During reshoring do not subject concrete in beam, slab, column or other structural
member to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted by
Engineer for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. Place reshores as soon
as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of
working day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without
overstressing construction. Leave reshores in place until:
C. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete leave original
supporting shores in place or reshore. Reshoring system shall have capacity sufficient to
resist anticipated loads and equal to at least one half of capacity of shoring system
above. Locate reshores directly under shore position above unless otherwise permitted.
Parcel 35 25 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. When test cylinders, field cured along with concrete they represent, have reached
specified strength.
2. When concrete has been cured as specified for same length of time as age at test
date of laboratory-cured cylinders which reached specified strength. Determine length of
time concrete has been cured in structure by cumulative number of days or fractions
thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of air in contact with
concrete is above 10 degC and concrete has been damp or sealed from evaporation and
loss of moisture.
1. Place deck with ribs perpendicular to supports and secure with plug welds to each
support using welding washers supplied by manufacturer. Place sheets with edges up,
and end lapped a minimum of 50 mm. Center the end laps over the supports and nest
the side lap one-half corrugation. Minimum bearing shall be 38 mm unless otherwise
shown. Weld to supporting steel immediately after alignment along end laps and over
each intermediate support, with welds located at each side lap plus one intermediate
weld near center of sheet (3 welds per sheet) for sheets of up to 770 mm wide coverage
measured center to center of side laps. Use 2 equally spaced intermediate welds (4
welds per sheet) for sheets of over 770 mm coverage. For deck spans over 1.5m, fasten
side laps at midspan or maximum 900 O.C.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 26 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related sections:
A. Standards:
8. ACI-301, Chapter 5.
Parcel 35 27 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
10. SSA 224: Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete. For welded wire fabric
(high tensile) FY = 420 MPa
12. ASTM A416, Grade 250 or 270 for tendon strands for pre-stressed concrete.
B. Initial test for reinforcing bar welding shall be paid by Owner. Retests due to failed
initial tests shall be paid by Contractor.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
B. Product data:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Welded wire fabric: Conform to ASTM-A185 or SSA 224 and to wire size and
spacing of smooth wire indicated on drawings.
E. Wire for column spiral and helix: Smooth wire conforming to ASTM-A82 and
fabricated in accordance with ACI 318 requirements for spirals, except that pitch of helix
shall be indicated.
F. Epoxy coating and material for field repair of damaged areas shall conform to
ASTM A775.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet following requirements for
fabricating tolerances:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WELDING
Parcel 35 29 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Each welder shall place an approved identifying mark near each completed weld.
D. Cut out welds determined to be defective and re-weld and retest at Contractor's
expense.
1. Any face of concrete against earth, including any face protected with waterproof
membranes, bitumastic coatings, working slabs, etc.: 65mm for column ties 75mm for all
other bars.
3. Interior surfaces: 40 mm for beams, girders, and columns; 20 mm for slabs, walls
and joists.
Parcel 35 30 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Assure that reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, is free of materials that may
adversely affect or reduce bond. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of
both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided
dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of a cleaned sample is not
less than required by applicable ASTM.
F. Overlap welded wire fabric, wherever successive mats or rolls are continuous, in
such a way that overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is
not less than 50 mm. Extend fabric across supporting beams and walls and to within 100
mm of concrete edges. Do not extend through contraction joints. Adequately support
during placing of concrete to ensure its proper position in slab by methods of paragraph
E above.
G. Where shown on drawings, offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar
diameter at lapped splices. To ensure proper placement, furnish templates for column
vertical bars and dowels.
Parcel 35 31 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
L. Repair all visible damage to epoxy coating on portion of bars extending out of first
concrete placement, and of first 75 mm of embedded portion. Apply repair material in
strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain coating throughout
construction.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 32 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1 Part 1: General
C. Expansion and contraction joints and water stops for cast-in-place concrete works.
1.2. REFERENCES
ACI 211 Recommended Practice for Selecting Normal and Heavyweight Concrete
Parcel 35 Specifications
ACI 302 Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete
ASTM C 31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
ASTM C 42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
ASTM C 138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of
Concrete
ASTM C 142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
Parcel 35 34 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
ASTM C 156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
ASTM C 173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method
ASTM C 231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
ASTM C 618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as
a Mineral Admixture in Portland cement Concrete
ASTM C 685 Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing
ASTM D 1190 Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type
ASTM D 1751Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
Parcel 35 35 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
ASTM D 1752Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM E 154 Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
1.3. SUBMITTALS
E. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for concrete
materials and mix design tests or other certificates for concrete.
Parcel 35 36 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Coal Tar Epoxy Paint: Packaging, labeling, delivering, and storing shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations.
F. Polyethylene Vapor Barrier: Protect vapor barrier from exposure to sunlight and
according to the manufacturer's published instructions.
Sampled cement shall be tested as required by the Engineer. No cement shall be used
until test results are satisfactory. Cement that has been stored for more than four months
after being tested shall be retested before use. Cement found unsatisfactory under test
shall be immediately removed from site.
Parcel 35 37 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. Slump: Conform to SASO 379 or ASTM C 143 and shall be performed in field
under the Engineer's supervision.
H. Workmanship:
When the results of strength tests of specimens shows failure to meet the specification
requirements or where there is other evidence that quality of concrete is below
requirements, core boring tests shall be made in conformance with ASTM C 42 and ACI
318.
If deficient, a structural analysis shall be made followed by a load test, where applicable
at no cost to Owner. Evaluation of results shall conform to ACI 318, Chapter 4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Portland cement: Types indicated herein shall comply with ASTM C 150 or SASO
143. Content of tricalcium aluminate (C3A) shall not exceed 12% in Type I cement.
1. Concrete Work below Ground Floor and up to Ground Floor Level: Provide
concrete using Type I cement
Parcel 35 38 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2. Concrete Work above Ground Floor Level: Provide concrete using ASTM C 150
Type I cement.
3. Use only one brand of cement for each required type throughout the project,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Water: Water for washing aggregate, mixing and curing concrete shall be potable
complying with SASO 701 or ASTM C 94 and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid,
salt, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
D. Fine Aggregates:
2. Limit the salt content of fine aggregate so as not to exceed limitations set out in
Table 1 - TOTAL ALLOWABLE SALTS CONTENT.
BY MASS
Parcel 35 39 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
IN FINE
AGGREGATE
BY WEIGHT
OF FINE
AGGREGATE IN COARSE
AGGREGATE
BY WEIGHT
OF COARSE
AGGREGATE
TOTAL BY
WEIGHT OF
CEMENT
Parcel 35 40 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
IN FINE AGGREGATE
PERCENTAGE BY MASS
0.50
Total of deleterious materials shall not exceed 3 percent of the weight of aggregate.
4. Grading of fine aggregate shall be within the limits shown in Table 4 - GRADING
LIMITS OF COMBINED FINE AGGREGATE MIX FOR CONCRETE.
E. Coarse Aggregates:
2. Salt content of coarse aggregate shall not exceed the limitations as set out above
in Table 1 - TOTAL ALLOWABLE SALTS CONTENT.
IN COARSE AGGREGATE
TYPE OR
Parcel 35 41 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
REVS. 100/500
REVS.
1.00
1.00
35
0.25
4. Coarse aggregate grading shall be set within the limits shown in Table 4 -
GRADING LIMITS OF COMBINED FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATE MIX FOR
CONCRETE.
Grading A Grading B
Parcel 35 42 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
50
38.1
19
9.5
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.16
0.30
0.15
75 micron 100
90 - 100
65 - 85
35 - 60
25 - 45
22 - 40
18 - 38
15 - 33
6 - 17
Parcel 35 43 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
0-6
0-2 -
100
90 - 100
55 - 70
35 - 55
30 - 45
25 - 42
22 - 38
10 - 20
0-8
0-2
A. Concrete Admixtures:
Parcel 35 44 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Preformed Joint Filler Strips: Provide bituminous fiber joint filler strips
manufactured from asphalt-saturated cellulosic fibers and compounded into
compressible non-extruding board conforming to ASTM D 1751, thickness and width as
shown on Drawings. Joint filler shall be preformed expansion joint filler board
recommended for joints in concrete, masonry and paving.
C. Water-stops:
1. Flat, dumbbell or center bulb type water-stops shall be of high quality poly-vinyl-
chloride granules. PVC water-stops size shall be as recommended by manufacturer for
the intended application, unless otherwise shown on Drawings, with minimum 10 mm
thickness and not less than 150 mm width. Only butt joints may be made on site using
manufacturer's equipment and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Junction pieces must be factory made by manufacturer. PVC water-stops shall have a
100 percent solids content, 13.7 MN/m tensile strength and 285 percent elongation at
break with a minimum tear resistance 75 kN/m. Waterstops shall have excellent
resistance to sewage, dilute acids and alkalis. Materials shall comply with the
requirements of CRD-C 572 or equivalent.
D. Vapor Barrier:
E. Bonding Agents:
Parcel 35 45 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Absorptive Cover: Conform to AASHTO M 182, Class 3; burlap cloth made from
jute or kenaf and with a minimum density of 290 gm/m².
a. Waterproof paper.
b. Polyethylene film.
3. Liquid Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1. Material for use on
slabs to which topping is to be bonded shall be a degrading type which shall not inhibit
the bond between topping and slab. When non-pigmented compound is used, it shall
contain a fugitive dye. Aqueous solution of sodium silicate with non-acid penetrating
agent, reacting chemically with free lime in concrete to form a hard, non-dusting surface.
A. Water-cement ratios listed in the following table are maximums; cement contents
and compressive strengths are minimums. There shall be no increase in water-cement
ratio or reduction in cement content based upon attainment of compressive strengths
higher than those specified.
CLASSES OF CONCRETE 20 30 35
Parcel 35 46 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
MAXIMUM FREE WATER CEMENT RATIO (BY WEIGHT) 0.55 0.43 0.43
A. If the fine aggregate conforms to SASO 378 or ASTM C 33, the mix design shall
be in accordance with ACI 301. If the fine aggregate does not conform to SASO 378 or
ASTM C 33, the mix design shall be based upon trial mixes. Trial mixes shall be
proportioned under the supervision of the Engineer. Mix design shall be initiated within
two months after award of Contract and shall include at least the following:
1. For each specified cement content and the maximum water-cement ratio, develop
curves comparing slump to percentage of fine aggregate ratios. Select fine to coarse
aggregate ratios to produce mixtures ranging from excess fine aggregate to excess
coarse aggregate with insufficient mortar to fill the voids. Optimum fine to coarse
aggregate ratio shall be the one at which the higher slumps are produced for the
specified water-cement ratio. Record and plot the combined aggregate gradations to
reflect limits of acceptable and unacceptable combinations of ingredients. Further testing
shall be done at fine to coarse aggregate ratios that will produce adequate workability for
the construction for which the mixture is being used while maintaining the lowest possible
water-cement ratio.
2. Develop curves of water-cement ratio versus compressive strength for at least five
water-cement ratios.
3. Develop curves comparing compressive strength data from at least five different
cement contents ranging from 20 MPa to 30 MPa 28-days cylinder strength for each
optimum aggregate ratio and the aggregate ratio judged most workable for general
casting.
4. For the mixes judged appropriate for construction, prepare strength gain curves
for 3, 5, 7, 14, 28, and 56-day strengths.
5. Provide cement chemical and physical test results for different types of cement
used.
b. Slump.
Parcel 35 47 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
d. Temperatures.
7. Slump Limits:
a. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement
as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 35 48 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Truck Mixers: When a truck mixer is used to complete mixing of central plant
batched materials, water shall be added at mixing speed before completion of mixing.
Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. Each truck shall carry a ticket stamped by
time clock to show date and time the loading of each truck was completed. Trucks shall
meet the requirements specified in ACI 304.
D. Ready-Mix Concrete:
1. Comply with the requirements of SASO 1068 or ASTM C 94, as specified herein,
provided the quantity, rate of delivery and unrestricted progress of work permitted, in
accordance with placement schedule. During hot weather, and/or under conditions
contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C
94 may be required, as specified below. Proposed changes in mixing procedures other
than herein specified, must be accepted by the Engineer before implementation.
C. Soil at bottom of foundation systems are subject to testing for soil bearing value by
the testing laboratory, as directed by the Engineer. Place concrete immediately after
approval of foundation excavations.
D. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement
of forms and reinforcing steel.
Parcel 35 49 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Deliver concrete from central plant to the place of final deposit in a continuous
manner and without segregation or loss of ingredients. Suspend placing when the sun,
heat, wind, or lack of facilities prevent proper finishing and curing of the concrete. Place
concrete in the forms or excavation as close as possible in final position, in uniform,
approximately horizontal layers, not over 600 mm deep unless otherwise directed.
Do not drop concrete freely for more than 1.5 m, nor allow it to drop freely through
congested re-baring areas which could cause segregation.
This drop distance may be increased by the Engineer at his discretion where it can be
shown by Contractor that a greater drop will not result in segregation. Tremies or other
approved means shall be employed to eliminate segregation. Conduits and pipes shall
not be embedded in concrete unless specifically indicated or specified. Do not place
concrete in any form until forms have been inspected by the Engineer and permission
has been given to proceed.
2. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not
meet the required quality control limits or which has been contaminated by foreign
materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the project
site and dispose of it off site at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Conveying Concrete:
Parcel 35 50 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Pumps: Placing concrete by pumping methods shall conform with ACI 301
Chapter 8. Operate and maintain pumps so that a continuous stream of concrete is
delivered into the forms without air pockets, segregation, or change in slump exceeding 5
cm. Use pumps which can pump mixes as designed. Mixes shall not be adjusted to
accommodate smaller pumps.
1. Deposit concrete in the forms for horizontal slabs in horizontal layers not deeper
than 60 mm unless additional thickness is permitted by the Engineer, and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place
each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness
of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least
150 mm into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary
to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.
4. In order to allow for shrinkage or settlement, at least 2 hours shall elapse after
placing concrete in walls, columns or stems of deep T-beams before depositing concrete
in girders, beams and slabs supported thereof, unless otherwise specified or shown on
the plans.
Parcel 35 51 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
7. No concrete shall be placed in the super-structure until the column forms have
been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in the columns.
Loads of superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon abutments, piers brackets
and column bents until they have been in place at least 7 days, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits
of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
4. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and against
bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified for formed concrete structures. Consolidate
concrete in the remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screed, roller pipe screed, or other
acceptable methods. Limit the time of vibrating consolidation to prevent bringing an
excess of fine aggregate to the surface.
5. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on
plastic surfaces. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to finishing operations.
F. Bonding:
1. Roughen surfaces of set concrete at all joints, except where bonding is obtained
by use of a concrete bonding agent, and clean surfaces of laitance, coatings, loose
particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner to expose bonded
aggregate uniformly and do not leave laitance, loose particles of aggregate, or damaged
concrete at the surface.
2. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has set but is not fully
cured, as follows:
Parcel 35 52 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
a. At joints between footings and walls or columns, and between walls or columns
and beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise specified herein,
dampen, but do not saturate, roughen and clean surface of set concrete immediately
before placing fresh concrete.
c. Use cement grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and fine aggregate by
weight and not more than 24 liters of water per sack of cement. Apply with a stiff broom
or brush to a minimum thickness of 2 mm. Deposit fresh concrete before cement grout
has attained its initial set.
d. In lieu of neat cement grout, bonding may be a commercial bonding agent. Apply
to cleaned concrete surfaces in accordance with the printed instruction of the bonding
material manufacturer.
2. At the time of placement, the temperature of the concrete shall not exceed 32C.
Concrete exceeding the specified temperature shall be rejected and dumped at a
designated disposal area.
Parcel 35 53 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Reinforcing steel and forms shall be protected from direct sunrays and shall be
cooled with water immediately before concrete placing so that the concrete temperature
specified can be maintained.
3.4. JOINTS
A. Construction Joints:
2. Immediately before new concrete is placed, wet construction joints and remove
standing water.
3. Locate construction joints in floors within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams
and girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of
intersecting beams.
6. Locate and install construction joints so as not to impair strength and appearance
of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. Locate construction joints, if required, as
follows:
Parcel 35 54 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
a. In walls, at top of footings; at top of slabs on ground, at top and bottom of door
and window openings or as required to conform to the architectural details and as
directed by the Engineer; and at the underside of the deepest beam or girder framing into
wall.
b. In columns, at the top of footing and at the underside of the deepest beam or
girder framing into the column.
B. Expansion Joints:
C. Waterstops:
Parcel 35 55 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2. Form control joints by inserting a premolded hardboard or fiberboard strip into the
fresh concrete until the top surface of the strip is flush with slab surface. After concrete
curing for at least 7 days, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. Apply joint
sealant material in the manner recommended by the manufacturer.
1. As-cast rough form finish is permitted for formed concrete surfaces that are to be
concealed in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide as-cast smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces that are to be
exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the
concrete, or a covering material bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, painting, or other similar system.
2. Produce smooth form finish by selecting form material to impart a smooth, hard,
uniform texture and arranging them orderly and symmetrical with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch defective areas with all fins or other projections completely removed
and smoothed.
A. Finished floor and roof slab surfaces shall be true plane surfaces with no deviation
in excess of 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to
drain.
1. Steel Trowelled (Hand) Finish: Slabs shall be screeded and floated with
straightedges to bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate
visible. Concrete while still green but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without
deep imprint, shall be wood floated to a true, even plane. Floor surfaces, after the
surface moisture has disappeared, shall be steel trawled to a smooth, even, dense finish
Parcel 35 56 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
free from blemishes including trowel marks. Steel trowelled finish shall be provided for
resilient flooring, thin-set ceramic tile, carpeting, where liquid waterproofing is to be
applied, and where no other finish is specified.
3. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp concrete to force aggregates away from surface, then
screed with a straightedge to produce a uniform surface. Rough slab finish surfaces shall
be provided for ceramic tile except thin-set installation, quarry tile, floor toppings,
insulation, built-up roofing, travertine, precast pavers with waterproof membrane, or
terrazzo.
4. Broom Finish: Concrete shall be screeded and floated to the required finish level
with no coarse aggregate visible. While concrete is still green, steel or wood trowel to an
even, smooth finish and then broom with a fiber bristle brush in a direction transverse to
that of the main traffic. Broom finish surfaces shall be provided for driveways and ramps
and all exterior slabs, and walks not otherwise shown or specified. Finishing shall
comply with the requirements of ACI 345, Chapter 10.
A. General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the
period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the
concrete.
2. Start curing procedures as soon as free moisture has disappeared from concrete
surface. Continue curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures.
Avoid rapid drying at the end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods:
a. For curing, use only water that is free of impurities which could etch or discolor
exposed, natural concrete surfaces.
Parcel 35 57 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1) Keeping the surface of the concrete continuously wet by covering it with water.
3) Covering the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover, thoroughly
saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover continuously wet.
Place absorptive cover so as to provide coverage of the concrete surfaces and edges,
with a 100 mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
a. Cover the concrete surfaces with the specified moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in the widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 76
mm and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during the curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
b. Apply to vertical surfaces immediately after forms are stripped and where form
coating other than oils have been used, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
1. Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces by moist curing, whenever possible.
2. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified by any of the methods
specified above, as applicable.
Parcel 35 58 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2. Frames or edging.
4. Door bucks.
Parcel 35 59 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
7. Flashing reglets.
A. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and
bond beams. Maintain the accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete
placement.
B. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of
work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other trades
is in place. Mix place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place
construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to
complete the work.
C. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and steel-trowelling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
D. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct
elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing
the machines and equipment.
Parcel 35 60 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of
forms, but only when directed by the Engineer.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 12 mm diameter, and holes left by
tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case, to a depth of less than 25 mm.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing the cement
mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat area to be patched with
neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to
the Engineer.
3. For exposed to public view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that when dry, the patching mortar will match the color of the
surrounding concrete. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and
color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off
slightly higher than the surrounding surface.
2. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, and holes left by the rods and bolts; fins and other
projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed
by cleaning.
3. Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces, when possible, that contain defects
that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove
and replace the concrete having defective surfaces.
Parcel 35 61 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify
surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and
high areas as herein specified.
3. Repair finish unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the
durability of the concrete. Surface defects, as such, including crazing, cracks which
penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable
conditions.
4. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after the concrete has cured
sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 25
mm diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least 19
mm clearance all around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching
concrete and brush with a neat cement grout coating, or use concrete bonding agent.
7. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of
the same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent
concrete. Place, compact and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
8. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 25 mm in diameter by the
dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush
with a neat grout coating. Place dry pack before the cement grout takes its initial set. Mix
Parcel 35 62 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
dry pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a
No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
areas continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
9. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to the acceptance of
the Engineer.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Conform to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: Conform to SASO 379 or ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at
point of placement and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
5oC.and below and when 30oC and above, and one test for each set of compressive
strength test specimen.
4. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/ASTM C 31; cast and cure one set of 6
standard cylinders for each 20 m3 or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any
one day or for each 100 m2 of surface area placed; 2 specimens tested after 7 days, 3
specimens tested after 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required. Additional test specimens may be cast for construction progress control and
form stripping.
5. Testing laboratory shall report test results in writing to the Engineer, and Ready-
Mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests
shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name
of Contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design
Parcel 35 63 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Additional Tests:
1. The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been
attained in the structure, as directed by the Engineer. The testing service shall conduct
tests to determine the strength and characteristics of the in-place concrete by
compression tests on cured cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by load testing
specified in ACI 318, or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed.
1. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump
outside the specified values.
2. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 3.4 MPa.
a. Strength tests of specimen cured under field conditions may be required by the
Engineer to check the adequacy of curing and protecting of the concrete placed.
Specimens shall be molded by field quality control laboratory at the same time and from
the same samples as the laboratory-cured specimens.
b. Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete when the 28-day
compressive strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders.
c. When laboratory-cured cylinder strengths are higher than the minimum required
compressive strength, field-cured cylinder strengths need not exceed the minimum
required compressive strength by more than 3.4 MPa even though criterion is not met.
Parcel 35 64 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
e. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified,
the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and
subject to correction at no extra cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 65 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1 Part 1: General
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements for each damp-proofing material specified.
Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage
or thickness, and protection course.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit asphalt damp-proofing to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses other than exterior face
of inner wythe of cavity walls, provide damp-proofing material warranted by manufacturer
to be substantially odor-free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Trowel Coats: Mineral colloid asphalt emulation fibrated with selected fibers and
produced in a light trowel consistency, conforming to ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
2. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: This is an asphalt base, clay emulsion with fibers
specifically formulated to offer a tight film that combines both excellent strength and
resistance to water. It conforms to ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
3. Brush and Spray Coats: This is an asphalt base, clay non-fibered, clay emulsion
under normal use it resists flow and sag. It conforms to ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with
water as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 35 68 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Examine substrates, with the Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal
joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer.
D. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime
materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints.
Parcel 35 69 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Apply damp-proofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall
faces building interior or occupied space whether indicated or not.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and
down a minimum of 150 mm over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 300 mm onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto
surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by
embedding a 200 mm wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of damp-
proofing. Damp-proofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats
required.
2. Extend damp-proofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs
that interrupt inner wythe, and lap damp-proofing at least 6 mm onto shelf angles
supporting veneer.
Parcel 35 70 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Apply a uniform coat of hot asphalt by mopping or spraying at not less than 98 kg
or 1 L/sq. m, thickness of not less than 0.8 mm.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray
coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or
primer and one trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not
less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less
than 0.5 L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
Parcel 35 71 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or
spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray
coats at not less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, primer
and one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or primer and one
trowel coat at not less than 2 L/sq. m.
C. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less
than 0.5 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
G. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or
spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
H. On Interior Face of Exterior Concrete Walls: Where above grade and indicated to
be furred and finished, apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
Parcel 35 72 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior, below grade damp-proofing membrane from damage until backfill
is completed. Remove overspray and spilt materials from surfaces not intended to
receive damp-proofing.
3.9 CLEANING
Parcel 35 73 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
31 00 00– Earthwork
1 Part 1: General
1.2. REFERENCES
ASTM D 698 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-
Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305-mm) Drop
Parcel 35 74 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
AASHTO M 147 Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate Sub-base, Base and
Surface Courses
AASHTO T 180 Moisture Density Relations of soils using a 10 lb (4.54 kg) Rammer
and an 18 inch (457 mm) Drop
AASHTO T 191 Test Method for In-Place Density of Compacted Base Courses
Containing Large Sizes of Coarse Aggregate
1.3. SUBMITTALS
c. One optimum moisture density relationship curve for each type of soil to be used
for fill or backfill.
B. Excavations over 1.5 m in depth will be sheeted and shored. Submit drawings and
calculations for the design of the sheeting and shoring.
Parcel 35 75 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Quality Testing Compliances: Based on reports of the testing and inspection, if the
subgrade, fill, or backfill does not meet the specified requirements these materials shall
be considered defective and shall be rejected. Excavate rejected materials and provide
new acceptable materials replacing the rejected materials and re-compact the new
materials as specified. Retest the re-compacted materials and repeat the procedure as
necessary until the specified compaction is obtained.
Parcel 35 76 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Noise and Dust Control: Utilize reasonable and necessary means to abate dust,
dirt rising, and undue noise. Perform necessary sprinkling and wetting of construction
site to prevent dust from spreading.
C. Existing Utilities:
D. Use of Explosives:
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning
lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by the authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Suitable Materials:
Parcel 35 77 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
a. Materials classified according to ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, SM, SW and SP,
or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
2. Unsuitable Materials:
a. Materials conforming to ASTM D 2487 class CH, CL, MH, PT, OH and OL, or a
combination of these group symbols.
b. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent
of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
3. Fill materials shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm in any dimension,
debris, waste, organic material and other deleterious matter. The fine content (silt and
clay size particles passing US # 200 sieve which is equivalent to a particle diameter of 75
micron) should be less than 15 % by weight. Fill materials shall have a grading with
100% passing the 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve. Follow the recommendations of Report for
Geo-Technical Studies.
C. Borrow Material: Where suitable materials are not available in sufficient quantities
from required excavations, approved materials shall be obtained from approved sources
outside the limits of project at the Contractor's expense. Borrow material shall comply
with the requirements specified for Backfill and Fill Materials. Borrow material shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval based on the test reports performed as described
herein.
Parcel 35 78 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Excavated materials shall not be used for fill under structures and pavements,
unless indicated otherwise in Geotechnical Report. Follow the recommendations of
Report for Geo-Technical Studies. Excavated materials may be used for general fill after
removing oversize stones, unless indicated otherwise in Geotechnical Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXCAVATION
2. In areas of unsuitable material where over excavating to 300 mm does not remove
the unsuitable bearing material, excavate down as required and construct a working
platform using specified sub base materials for 300 mm in depth then use rock-fill
material. Bring backfill to 300 mm below the finished subgrade shown on Drawings in
Parcel 35 79 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability
of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
E. Shoring and Bracing: Designing, providing and maintaining the suitable shoring
and bracing system that will support the loads imposed shall be the Contractor's
responsibility. Proposed shoring and bracing system shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer. Provide materials for shoring and bracing in good serviceable condition.
1. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and
hydroscopic pressures.
2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with safe
operating procedures.
3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations. Carry down shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
Parcel 35 80 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run off
areas, and eventually transport the water off site. Comply with the requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction regarding the safe disposal of water removed from
excavations and rain water. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other
diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches.
G. Material Storage: Stockpile suitable excavated material until required for backfill or
fill. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Dispose off excess
soil material and waste materials.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of
excavation. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
concrete.
A. General: Place soil material in layers to the required subgrade elevations, for each
area classification listed below, using materials as specified above.
Parcel 35 81 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
7. Under Equipment: Use subbase materials where required over rock bearing
surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit
bottom 90 degrees of cylinder.
H. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until the completion of
the following:
B. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 100 mm in loose
depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers.
Parcel 35 82 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to
required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement
of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to
approximately same elevation in each lift.
F. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact top 300 mm
of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density.
2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density.
3. Under walkways, compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer of backfill/fill
material at 95 percent maximum density.
4. General Fill: Compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum
density.
H. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, heavy equipment for spreading and
compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to a wall less than a distance equal to
the height of the backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted
in layers not more than 150 mm in compacted thickness with power driven hand tamper
suitable for material being compacted.
Parcel 35 83 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. Testing of Fill and Backfill: Frequency of field density tests in accordance with
ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) shall be as follows:
4. The laboratory tests ASTM D 698 shall be carried out once for every 5 field
density tests.
J. Tolerance:
1. Pavements and Walks: Shape surfaces of areas under pavement and walks to
line, grade cross section with finish surface not more than 20 mm above or below the
required subgrade elevation.
4. Landscaped Areas and Rough Grading: Finish all areas to within 50 mm above or
below the elevations, grades and cross sections shown.
Parcel 35 84 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Granular Sub-Base:
1. General: For granular sub-base; before placing and spreading operations are
started, verify that the sub grade has been approved and satisfactorily maintained and
that it is to levels and of the material specified. Ruts or soft yielding areas shall be filled
and compacted to the required density.
2. Placing and Compaction: Sub base material shall be spread on the finished sub
grade in uniform layer without segregation, to such loose depth that when compacted,
the layer will have a thickness of maximum 200 mm. Material shall be mixed with blade
graders or other equipment until a uniform mixture is obtained. Aggregate shall be within
the specified moisture content limits when compacting is started. Variations shall be
corrected prior to or during compacting by sprinkling or by aeration. The layer shall be
compacted by rolling with a 3 wheel power roller weighing 8 to 10 tons or an approved
pneumatic roller. Alternate blading and rolling shall be performed until obtaining smooth,
even and uniformly compacted finished top course.
C. Compacting shall not be less than 100 percent of maximum dry density in place
for access roads and 95 percent minimum for parking areas. Density shall be measured
in field according to AASHTO T 191 and in laboratory shall be determined in accordance
with AASHTO T 180. The C.B.R. value of the granular sub base course after compacting
shall be more than 50 percent.
D. Testing Surface: Sub base shall be true to established grade. Thickness shall not
be more or less than 10 mm from that required for the layer being constructed. Surface
shall not vary more than 10 mm in 3 m from true profile and cross section. Thickness of
the granular sub base shall be measured at intervals as directed by the Engineer.
Measurements shall be taken at various points through holes not less than 75 mm in
diameter.
3.6. MAINTENANCE
Parcel 35 85 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris
and provide temporary drainage as required.
2. Repair and re establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 86 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDS
A. This section covers the work of G.R.C. architectural glass fiber
reinforced concrete for the facades and interior decorative cornices and
units as indicated on Drawings and required by the Contract.
Extent of G.R.C. molded architecture ornamentation is shown on Drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and
sealant backings.
Division 09 Section: Painting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s detailed technical data for
fabrication, installation, embedded hardware, fastenings, integrated
stainless steel support framing, accessories maintenance and test results
and certificate of compliances for materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location, fabrication,
installation and the formation steps, dimensions details, erection and
assemblies of each type of G.R.C precast unit not fully described by
product Drawings, templates and instruction for installation of
anchorage devices and attachment to other units of work.
1. Submit design calculation for typical panel and connections including
loads used in design and stresses from wind, thermal movement or
other influences.
C. Samples: Submit for each unit samples representatives of finished
exposed surfaces showing typical range of color texture and of
appropriate thickness.
1. Sample size: 600mm length and of actual thickness.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s and Erector’s Qualifications: firm with a demonstrated
capability to produce grc panels of quality and scope required for this
job and involved in grc product for at least five (5) years.
Erector must have at least three (3) years successfully experience in erection of
G.R.C. units or architectural concrete panels similar to units required for this
project.
PART 1 - The Contractor has to employ experienced workman having
profound experience with Architectural ornamentation and who
successfully accomplished ornamentation work identical to those required
by this Contract.
Parcel 35 87 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
The Engineer reserves the right to exclude any workman incorporated in the
Architectural ornamentation work who substantiates no fitness for such delicate
item.
PART 2 - Damaged units shall be rejected and shall be replaced at the
Contractor expense.
B. Mockup: After samples are accepted for color and texture, construct
mock-ups of a similar panel to those indicated on Drawings to
demonstrate aesthetic effects meeting design requirements showing
execution, installation, anchorage and finishes.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in
order to avoid excessive stress and damage.
Care shall be taken not to deface exposed surfaces or chip protruding, round or
inner edges.
Lift or support units only at points indicated on erection shop drawings.
Store units inside, under cover in shaded aerated area, keep them dry and
protected against direct sun light, damage from weather and contact with soil,
staining and physical damage.
Neatly stock units flat to prevent sagging.
Place non staining resilient spacer of even thickness between units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
Provide form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood or other acceptable
materials that are non reactive with concrete and shall produce required
surface finishes.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide G.R.C. consisting of the following materials:
A. Portland Cement: For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure,
use same brand, type and source of supply throughout G.R.C.
production, all cements shall comply to ASTM C 150.
B. Sand: Washed and dried silica or other acceptable materials with
successful use in G.R.C. production, comply with ASTM C 33 and all
passing through Sieve No. 16. Aggregates of maximum size 10 mm can
Parcel 35 88 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
be used.
C. Water: Must be clean potable water free from sediment, organic
impurities, contaminated oils, salts and any other substances that may
be harmful to cement or steel.
D. Admixture: Shall comply to ASTM C 494 and do not use admixture that
contains more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
E. Coloring Agent: Must be ultraviolet and alkali resistant, high temperature
stable, harmless to concrete set, or strength. Color shall be selected by
Engineer.
F. Glass Fiber: Known as CEM-FIL must be specially designed for
compatibility with aggressive alkaline environment of Portland cement
based composites, acid resistant and of diameter 0.5 mm to 2 mm.
G. Anchors: The Contractor shall provide sufficient anchorage devices,
fasteners, bolts, nuts, washers, steel plates or stainless steel framing
system necessary for installation of units. with capacity to sustain
without failure a load equal to five (5) times to that of GRC units.
H. Stainless Steel Framing: For large openings and where indicated
provide stainless steel framing in location to receive GRC units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting
performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 MIXING
I. The typical mix formulation shall be sand, cement rated to 0.5:1 and a
water cement ratio preferable less than 0.35. It is essential to keep the
water: Cement ratio as low as possible with maintaining workability of
the mix, hence admixtures are used. Chopper glass-fibers up to 5% by
weight of mix, can be incorporated into the mix, but typical fiber content
is around 4%. The fiber length is normally 12 mm to 25 mm long,
coloring agent must not exceed 10% of cement weight.
Parcel 35 89 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
J. Vibrate mix after pouring into form to enable the slurry to flow and
removes trapped air.
3.4 CURING
Great attention to curing conditions is to be ensured; units shall be kept moist
immediately after manufacture and during curing period either by storing units in a
humidity chamber or total immersion in water, for a minimum period of seven (7)
days.
3.5 INSPECTION
The Engineer shall inspect completed parts in the workshop for compliance with
Specification and Architectural requirements. No part shall be installed prior to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer.
Surfaces shall be free from honeycombing and any defects arising from faulty
form work or other causes.
3.7 INSTALLATION
Ornaments shall be installed sturdily to concrete masonry walls or concrete
elements or steel frames carrying or suspending them.
Sufficient fixing points shall be provided to fully and rigidly support the units and to
resist the wind loading.
Provide temporary supports and bracing to maintain in position, and alignments
the units until they shall be permanently connected.
The Contractor shall arrange and plan his work in such a way that minimizes
perforating concrete masonry walls. Perforation of ornaments carrying elements
shall not be permitted unless otherwise there is no other technique for robust
installation.
Ornaments shall be installed in direct contact with walls and slabs. Anchors,
stirrups and ties projecting off their sides shall be inserted through the elements of
the structure carrying or suspending them, and shall be cemented into them by
cement sand mortar of 350 kg ordinary Portland cement to 1 m 3 sand. Addition of
gypsum to the mix is entirely prohibited. Only accelerating admixtures can be
added to the mix after the prior written permission and approval of the Engineer.
Do not release fastening of the installed ornaments until cementing mortar has
set.
Parts composing one (1) ornament shall be installed leveled, matched and flushed
Parcel 35 90 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
to produce a neat pleasant sight. Joints shall be solidly filled to full thickness with
mortar of one (1) part white cement to two (2) parts of sand. Color of mortar shall
match color of ornaments and all matching that of the existing building.
Installation of the ornaments shall precede the finishing coat of areas in vicinity of
them.
3.8 JOINT TREATMENT
Provide joint treatment material complying with the recommendation of the
Manufacturer of units and joint treatment materials. Use factory-packaged, job
mixed, chemical hardening powder products.3.9 cleaning
Do all final cleaning which may be necessary, surfaces required to be cleaned
after installation shall be cleaned using fiber brushes, soap and clear water from a
hose. Do not use acid. Flush copiously and repeat washing until the surfaces are
clean.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that GRC units’
assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the same time of Substantial
Completion.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 92 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: All masonry units shall be identical to approved samples, hard, sound,
durable, and clean, of sharp edges, right angles, accurate and uniform dimensions
and homogenous, plane surfaces free from chipping, cracking, inflorescence and
foreign matters.
1. Hollow (non-load bearing) Concrete masonry units shall conform to the
requirements E.S 1292
a. Average compressive Strength : 5 N/ mm2
Parcel 35 93 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Average Absorption : 6 %
c. Density: shall not be less than 1150 kg/m3 and shall not exceed 1350 kg/m3.
2. Solid Concrete masonry units shall conform to the requirements E.S1392
a. Average compressive Strength: 7 N/ mm2
b. Average Absorption: 7 %
c. Density: shall not be less than 1850 kg/m3
B. Size and Shapes:
1. Size: Manufactured to the dimensions indicated on drawings
2. Tolerances: The permissible deviation in each dimension shall be within
1% but shall not exceed ± 3 mm.
3. Special Shapes: Provide where required for corners, jambs, sash, control
joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. Provide square-edged
units for outside corners.
2.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, as indicated on drawings and
complying with requirements below.
Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with
requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors as required and specified in subsequent
paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with the followings, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/
A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Anchors and Ties: To bond masonry walls to concrete structure, provide straps, and
bars fabricated from not less than galvanized sheet 1.5 mm thick after fabrication,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MORTAR
A. Mortar Materials: Ingredients for mortar shall be measured in proper clean gauge
boxes.
1. Cement: with requirements of Division 3 “Cast in place concrete “
2. Aggregate: with requirements of Division 3 “Cast in place concrete “
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
4. Water: Clean and potable.
Parcel 35 94 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine conditions, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit
masonry.
Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installation.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated
applicable to each type of installation included in Project.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Build all partitions and composite masonry construction to the respective
full thickness and height shown on Drawings, using units of nominal thickness
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades.
Provide not less than 200 mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings and between adjacent chases and recesses, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry.
D. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction
immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Cut concrete masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with
clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown
and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible.
F. Use solid concrete bricks or fill hollow cores of blocks with grout and vibrate with
proper sized vibrator the following:
1. Solid blocks for assemblies below grade, wet areas, first three courses of walls
and partitions, boundary of opening and steel columns and walls receive
mechanically fixed stone cladding.
2. Partitions or walls to heights indicated on Drawings where sanitary fixtures.
3. At opening jambs.
4. 3 courses of concrete units (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated.
G. All concrete blocks shall be well soaked with water before use, allow units to
absorb water so they are damp but not wet.
Parcel 35 95 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. All blocks shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid and all joints shall
be thoroughly flushed up as the work proceeds.
I. Blocks laid per day shall not exceed 1.2 m in height.
J. The top of walls left off shall be wetted before work is recommenced.
K. Exposed surface of concrete masonry work which shall be left without plastering
shall have a fair face smooth and clean, consisting of selected blocks jointed with
a neatly weathered or flush joint.
L. Walls to be plastered shall have the horizontal joints raked out to a depth of 12
mm to form a key.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with construction tolerances of ES -Code of Practice for Use of Masonry.
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,
reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 6 mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 6 mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
3. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 3 mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm. Do not vary from
bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint
thickness by more than 3 mm.
Parcel 35 Specifications
of walling higher than 600 mm, above any course which is not fully set. Angles
and reveals shall be kept true, square and plumb. Broken walls must be laid up
with a lead.
G. Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 3000 mm
straight edge placer anywhere on the wall in any direction shall be true to place
within 3 mm and plumb within 6 mm. Un-satisfactory work shall be removed and
replaced.
H. Intersecting concrete block walls shall be tied together in a masonry bond.
I. Provide special units at jambs, heads, sills, corners and bonding blocks as
required.
J. Units shall be accurately cut and fitted at heads of windows, window stools, heads
of doors and other openings as necessary to accommodate the hollow metal door
frames, window frames, window stools, etc.
K. Masonry units shall be laid free of smears, mortar slicks, stains, cracked, broken
edges and corners and other defects detrimental to the finished appearance. If
any chipped or broken units are discovered in the finished wall, Engineer will
require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional
cost to the Contract.
L. Extend masonry partitions, unless shown otherwise, to within 20 mm of underside
of structure. Fill the 20 mm gap with insulation under 25% compressions, so
placed that space is left each side of the finished wall to accept joint sealant.
M. Corners shall be bounded by overlapping units and shall be solid grouted.
N. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall be plumb and in line.
O. Partitions shall be bonded to main walls by toothing every third course to a depth
of not less than 100 mm.
P. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Q. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
R. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or
grout into core.
S. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout (600 mm) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
T. Bond Pattern: Lay masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, in
accordance with the best constructional practice lay in one-half unit running bond
with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
U. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back a distance of unit length or 200 mm in
each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units
lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior
to laying fresh masonry.
V. Curing: All walls and partitions shall be properly cured by sprinkling water twice a
day for a period of not less than five (5) days after completion of laying the course.
Parcel 35 97 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.7 LINTELS
A. Provide minimum bearing, at each jamb, of 100 mm for openings less than 1.5 m
wide and of 200 mm for wider openings.
B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry lintels where indicated and where openings of
not more than 300 mm for brick units and 600 mm for block units shown without
structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units for formed-in-place lintels with
reinforcing bars and stirrups placed as shown on approved shop drawings and
filled with grout of consistency required to completely fill space between
reinforcement and masonry unit.
D. Provide temporary support for formed in place masonry units lintels.
E. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels. Thoroughly cure
precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-
place lintels until cured.
A. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, reinforcement for concrete lintels shall
consist of four 16 mm diameter bars and 6 mm diameter stirrups at 200 mm
Parcel 35 98 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
intervals.
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.6 WARRANTY
A.Limited Warranty: Five years against defective material and workmanship,
covering parts only, no labor or freight. Defective parts, if deemed so by the
manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon inspection
at manufacturer's plant which warrants same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
B. Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of
any damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Handrails:
3. Infill of Guards:
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): (67 deg C), ambient; (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a
single approved manufacturer.
1.6 MOCKUPS
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Steel and Iron
1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
3. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
D. Stainless Steel: Use stainless steel type 304 for interior spaces and 316 for
external areas
1. Pipe and tubing: ASTM A 269 Type 304 or Type 316.
2. Bar: ASTM A 276 Type 304 or Type 316.
3. Fittings: ASTM A 276/ A 479 Type 304 or Type 316.
4. Cables: MIL‐W‐87161, Type II, Composition B 3/16” diameter or as required
(Type 316) 1 X 19 strand.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
H. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
1. As detailed.
2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of (1 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed
(5 mm in 3 m).
A. Form or core-drill holes not less than (125 mm) deep and (20 mm) larger
than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material,
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink,
nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post
after placing anchoring material.
C. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and
leave (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.
3.3 PROTECTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. Inserts, sleeves and anchors
B. Steel hatch doors
C. Wire mesh, opening sides and top covers
D. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on Drawings
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into
concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of
another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the
completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without
blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
1. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 2 mm.
2. Take in consideration that maximum deflection of any member shall
not exceed 1/360 of the span under specified live load.
3. All steel work for Ship stairs shall be constructed in mild steel or
high tensile steel (ST 52) where indicated and mild steel shall be
heavily galvanized after manufacture except where otherwise
specified
4. Steel Strips shall comply to ES No. 1111.
5. Steel Sections shall comply to ES No. 1810.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786 M rolled from plate
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another
weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Welded Type.
E. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010.
F. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200),
unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.
G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without
failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
H. Threaded or wedge type: galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers,
and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
I. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS
specifications for metal alloy welded.
J. Ferrous Metals
Parcel 35 110 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing
welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. 2Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-
Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt
emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Use fasteners made of same basic metal as fastened metal.
Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
1. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5, for interior use and where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22M.
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.2M.
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material
indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal
to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
J. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Internally threaded tubular expansion
anchors and machine bolts, carbon steel components zinc plated
K. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as
needed.
1. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not
more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum load conditions
are applied.
L. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed
stainless- steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers;
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 2 (A4).
M. Veneer Ties: Gasketed steel screw and wire tie system designed for
anchorage to steel stud framing; screw barrel sized for thickness of
sheathing and continuous insulation in air space[; ASTM (A82M); steel
wire ASTM A580; Type 304 stainless-steel wire diameter
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-
corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide
grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.
B Ordinary Grout: Ordinary Portland Cement according to ES 373and natural sand
to ES 1108 mixed at a ratio of 1 part cement to 2½ parts sand by volume, with
minimum water required for mixing, placement and hydration, shall be used for
interior and exterior applications.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints; flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or
bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
L. Comply with details indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings.
B. Provide wire mesh sides and top covers for duct opening, of dimensions and
locations as shown. Unless otherwise shown provide 25x75mm diamond mesh,
3x2.7 mm wire, and not less than 4.56kg/m, secured into standard channel frame
and intermediate crossbars. Provide doors of same construction as partition with
a lock panel, locking mechanism, lockset and other finish hardware as required.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,
where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking
field measurements before fabrication may delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of anchorages such as concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to the Site.
Parcel 35 116 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other
connectors.
B. Setting Bearing And Leveling Plates: Clean concrete and masonry
bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
C. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts.
After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten
anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off
flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
D. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations
where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, in
exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
F. Miscellaneous Framing And Supports: Install framing and supports to
comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop
Drawings.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building
structure.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns.
Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or
with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and
grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
Article. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are
installed and leveled.
3.3 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PLACEMENT
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines
and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. In the event of conflict between various codes and standards the most stringent
conditions shall apply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and
Division-1 Specification Sections:
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified with surface preparation and
application instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and details of waterproofing preparation and
application. Show expansion joint details and waterproofing application at
obstructions and penetrations.
Parcel 35 Specifications
completed. Proceed only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including
honeycombs, voids, and cracks have been repaired to provide a sound substrate
free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.
Concrete surfaces and mortar have to be cured for not less than 28 days.
Application to be carried out earlier than 12 hours after surface has been wet.
B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is
maintained at 4°C or above but less than 32°C during work and cure period and
space is well ventilated and kept free of water.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified herein shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or
replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to maintain
watertight conditions within a specified warranty period. Warranty includes
responsibility for removing and replacing other work that conceals modified cement
waterproofing.
C. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Cementitious Material: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
2. Water: Clean, potable.
2.2 Polymer Modified Cementitious, Durable, Waterproof Coating
A. Master Seal 521 or Equal: Composed of specially selected cements, silica sand
and reactive fillers supplied in powder form together with a liquid component of
blended SBR copolymers and wetting agents
1. Density: 2000kg/m3.
2. Coverage: 0.75-0.9kg/m²/coat, depending on the substrate roughness.
(Minimum 2 coats are required).
3. Areas of Applications: Wet areas, Toilets and likes.
Elastomeric, Cement-Based Waterproof Coating
A. Master Seal 595 or Equal Composed of two-component, containing a blend of
Portland cements, selected silica, micro-fibres and modifying agents mixed to a
slurry consistency with the acrylic polymer emulsion to to give an elastomeric
flexible membrane
1. Density: 1750 kg/m3.
2. Coverage: 0.75- 1kg/m²/coat, depending on the substrate roughness.
(Minimum 2 coats are required).
3. Fiber mesh : Use fabric in strip form over joints and cracks or as
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Composed of specially selected cements, silica sand and reactive fillers supplied
in powder form together with a liquid component of blended acrylic copolymers
and wetting agents, Mesh is embedded in the first coat when it is still wet.
1. Density: 1800 kg/m3.
2. Coverage: 1kg/m²/coat (Minimum 2 coats are required).
3. Toxicity: Non-toxic
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine walls, floors, and other surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied for
compliance with requirements for surface preparation, cleaning, and other
conditions affecting water proofing performance.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Application of waterproofing indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
Employed materials shall be less than 3 months old.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Protect other work from fallout or overspray from modified cement
waterproofing during application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying
operation, to prevent polluting the air, and to ensure adequate ambient
temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
Parcel 35 121 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
instructions.
C. Schedule Cleaning and surface preparation so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning and preparation process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
D. Surface Preparation Concrete Cementitious Surface Masonry: Comply with
waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
concrete surfaces. Clean surfaces by using one or a combination of procedures
as needed to effectively remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter,
grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release agents.
E. Prepare concrete masonry unit surfaces by etching with 10% muriatic
(hydrochloric) acid solution or abrade surface by wire brushing.
F. If acid etching is used, remove acid residue by thoroughly flushing surface with
potable water.
G. If wire brushing is used, remove dust and loose particles.
H. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer’s written instructions, unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Brush, broom or spray the mix onto the pre-dampened, prepared surface,
brushing well into the surface. Strike off with the brush or broom in one direction
for a neat appearance. Care must be taken not to spread the material too thinly.
When the material begins to drag or “ball”, do not add more liquid, but dampen the
surface again.
C. Mix waterproofing components according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
instructions.
D. Protect all adjacent surfaces. Dampen wall surface with water before applying
waterproofing.
E. Apply waterproofing coating evenly and fill voids and pores of substrate with
waterproofing slurry. Keep tools clean and free from build-up.
F. Apply the number of coats at the rates recommended by the manufacturer for
each coat.
G. Embed mesh in the first coat when it is still wet
H. Mist-cure waterproofing for two to three days immediately after application as
recommended by the manufacturer.
I. Wet-cure waterproofing when temperatures are above 29°C, relative humidity is
below 30%, wind speed exceeds 24 km/h, or waterproofing is exposed to direct
sunlight for 72 hours after placement.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Surfaces indicated as to be trowelled smooth shall be finished with a steel trowel
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic on unprotected surfaces.
B. Protect applied modified cement waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather
exposure, and water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition
for not less than seven days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other
curing procedures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
PART 7 - This section covers all roofing and deck insulation work as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
PART 8 -
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for roof drains.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and
general recommendations from manufacturers of roofing insulation
system materials, for types of roofing required. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 500 mm square samples of materials, include end-lap
seam, and extruded polystyrene. Submit samples of tiles, metal flashing,
and sealant.
C. Shop Drawing: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof
configuration, slopes and sheet layout, details at perimeter, and special
conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Guarantee: The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee that all work performed
under this section are free from defects in material and workmanship, and shall
withstand thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure.
The Contractor shall, upon notice by the Employer, immediately make good any
defects in materials or workmanship, or both, within the ten (10) years after the final
handing over of the project period covered by the guarantee, all at no cost to the
Employer.
B Certificates of Compliance: The Contractor shall provide all certificates required
for demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with specification requirements,
including mill certificates.
C Contractors Experience: Unless specifically named, the Contractor shall furnish
materials and equipment of the type and size specified which has demonstrated
successful operation, and are in regular use.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
The Contractor shall perform all such tests at his own expense. All sampling and
testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF DECK
Before roofing application is begun, the roofing contractor shall inspect the
concrete roof deck carefully.
Installation of metal fittings and similar work affecting the roofing shall be finished
before work begins.
All cracks, breaks, holes, sharp projections, or other unusual irregularities in the
surface shall be remedied before roofing work is begun.
Surface must be clean, dry, free from grease, loose material, excessive dust and
foreign material, which would interfere with the roofing application. Roof decks
shall be properly graded to all outlets. Deck must be swept free of dust and it
must be reasonably smooth.
3.2 THERMAL INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene Sheets: The extruded polystyrene sheets shall
be applied directly on the membrane without adhesives.
B. A Roofing Filter Fabric shall be laid over the thermal insulation where
indicated on Drawings. The fabric shall be protected from
contamination by surface run-off.
3.7 SEALANTS
Sealants shall be placed in position as shown on Drawings and as directed by
Engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
0.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Shop Drawings:
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material
panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Metal Composite Material Panels: (300 mm) long by actual panel width.
Include fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel
accessories. Standard color samples will be submitted.
Parcel 35 Specifications
0.9 COORDINATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
0.10 WARRANTY
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested
according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as
metal composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to
provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases,
drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet
caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system
as adjacent metal composite material panels.
0.4 FABRICATION
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.
Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.
Parcel 35 Specifications
0.5 FINISHES
PART 12 - EXECUTION
0.1 EXAMINATION
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other
structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed
within alignment tolerances required by metal composite material wall panel
manufacturer.
Parcel 35 133 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
0.2 PREPARATION
B. Fasteners:
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent
metal composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant.
Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent
metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket
system.
1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant
backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to
requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite
material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates
and to result in waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing
and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of (3 m) with no joints
allowed within (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped
expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel
units within installed tolerance of (6 mm in 6 m), non-accumulative, on level,
plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within (3-mm) offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and
drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
Parcel 35 136 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: For recursively units, submit samples representatives of
finished exposed surfaces showing typical range of color texture and of
appropriate thickness.
1. Sample size: 600mm length and of actual thickness.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product;
manufacturer-specific installation instructions for EPS system, including
preparation instructions and recommendations, and storage and
handling requirements and recommendations. Technical information for
each of the products required and proposed to be used including the
following:
1. Metal Framing Anchors
2. Construction Adhesives
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Shall be grade-marked as indicated and of thoroughly seasoned stock
and with 15 to 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Provide four (4) sides dressed lumber unless otherwise indicated.
C. For lumber furnish pieces with grade stamp applied to ends or back of each
piece.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C. The surface of the substrate and the surface of the moldings shall be
clean, dry, and free of grease, paint, oil or any foreign material.
D. The surface of the substrate shall be level, plane and true, being (3mm)
within (1.2m).
E. Dry fit and /or cut on site the molding as per the architectural drawings
and existing structure.
3.1 INSTALATION
A. Any parts where the width is more than 2/3 the height, mechanical
attachment is required.
B. All joints must be tied together using approved reinforcing mesh with a
2" overlap onto each part embedded into approved base coat as per
manufacturer’s instructions. Butting parts together and/or "spline"
detailing joints is strictly prohibited.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Apply adhesive to the back of the molding. Approved glue to join the
moldings.
D. If skinning occurs on the adhesive, scrape off and replace it with fresh
adhesive before installing the molding.
E. Press the molding into place. Use temporary mechanical fasteners to
secure molding while the adhesive cures.
F. Remove excess adhesive (if any) along the molding before curing.
G. Apply caulking at the joint between the molding and the substrate, and
between the joined moldings.
H. Allow the material to cure.
I. When joining two pieces, at the junction, leave a gap of not exceeding
¼ (6mm). Cover all joints with caulking
J. Install a minimum of 2 connectors for each 1.25m or as shown on
approved shop drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
K. Press firmly into the rigid foam until the connector is flush with the
surface.
END OF SECTION 074216
PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Sections:
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special Warranties shall not deprive the Employer
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with
joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's
instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates, including dust, paints (except
for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion
and compatibility), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
and water and surface dirt.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast
cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to
produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above
cleaning operations by blowing out joints with compressed air. Porous
joint surfaces include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. Concrete
b. Masonry
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tiles
d. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.6 CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealants smears adjacent to joints as the work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.7 PROTECTION
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel doors and frames.
2. Door hardware.
B. Related Sections:
Division 08 Section "Hardware."
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent
stated. Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one
affording the greatest protection shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one
at the time of commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of
applicable regulatory requirements.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process
C. HMMA 861: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames.
SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, dimensions, fire rating,
door type, core, reinforcement, finish, hardware locations, cutout locations, frame
profiles, details, metal gage, anchorage details, and finish.
H. Samples:
1. Frame corner, (300 by 300 mm).
2. Door, with glass and glazing stops, (300 by 300 mm).
I. Deliver, store and handle steel doors and frames in a manner to prevent
damage and deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Doors: 44mm thick, full flush continuously welded edge seams with no visible
seams on faces or vertical edges, steel stiffened core.
1. Exterior Doors: ASTM A653 hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, 16 gage
(0.0538 inches minimum) unless otherwise noted.
2. Interior Doors: 18 gage sheet steel (0.0428 inches minimum) unless
otherwise noted.
3. Stile And Rail Doors: 16 gage sheet steel unless noted otherwise, formed
into rectangular tubes with integral formed stop, continuously welded to
form a rigid tubular frame, welds ground smooth and flush.
B. Frames:
1. Exterior Frames: Welded type.
2. Interior Frames: Welded type.
3. Gage: Minimum 16 gage (1.3mm) for openings (1.2 m) in width or less; 14
gage (1.6mm) for openings greater than (1.2 m) in width.
4. Door Silencers: Resilient type, fitted in drilled holes, removable for
replacement.
5. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 22 gage, welded in place; provide where
frames may be grouted.
C. Hinges: Shall be from steel not less than 2.5 mm thick, fitted with a removable pin
of not less 6 mm diameter, hinges shall be zinc coated after manufacture. The
leaves for screwing to the door shall have 4 countersunk holes.
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.2 Fabrication
A. Fabricate doors and frames complying with following gages and SDI standards:
C. Frames:
1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type
frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform
finish.
2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of
knocked down frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field
assembled.
3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4’-0” with two 12 gage
minimum formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.
4. Door Silencers:
Prepare frames for silencers.
Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single door frames and 3 silencers
each strike jamb of double door frames with removable mullions. Provide 2
silencers on head of double door frames without removable mullions. Omit
silencers at gaskets.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide per manufacturer shop drawings. Weld floor jamb
anchors in place.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate door and frame, fabrication and installation with Division 08 Section
"Hardware".
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage,
installation and construction.
1. Paste filler repair is not permitted.
2. Touch up scratched paint surfaces after installation.
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
- AAMA 609/610, Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished
Aluminum.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
- ASTM E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
2. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,
Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door
Assemblies.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction and Materials.
3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design frames and doors to:
1. Accommodate expansion and contraction within service
temperature range of -5˚ to 89˚C.
2. Limit deflection of mullions to maximum 1/175th of clear span
when tested to ASTM E330 under wind load of 1.2Kpa.
3. Movement within system.
4. Movement between system and perimeter framing
components or substrate.
B. Fire rated doors as indicated types. Fire rating minutes as indicated for each type.
C. Certification: Doors shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA 252,
UBC 7-4, UL 9, UL263, CAN4-S106.
D. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall be conducted by an approved independent
testing laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
E. Size glass thickness and glass unit dimensions and types to limits in accordance
with CAN/CGSB-12.20.
F. Provide continuous air barrier and vapour retarder through door system. Primarily
in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type door and frame.
Parcel 35 154 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of
aluminum finishes for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -
Closeout Submittals.
WARRANTY
1. Provide a written warranty for work of this section from manufacturer for
failure due to defective materials and from contractor for failure due to
defective workmanship for ten (10) years respectively from the date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Aluminum extrusions: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5.
1. Steel reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, grade 300 W.
Parcel 35 155 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
- Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3
years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance
and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and
security of glass retention.
ALUMINUM DOORS
A. Construct doors of porthole extrusions with minimum wall thickness of
1.8mm.
B. Door stiles, top rail, bottom rail and side’s rail: widths and size as indicated
on approved shop drawings.
C. Reinforce mechanically-joined corners of doors to produce sturdy door unit.
D. Glazing stops: interlocking snap-in type for dry glazing. Exterior stops:
tamperproof type.
E. Hardware: as indicated on drawings and as per Section manufacturer
standard.
ALUMINUM FRAMES
A. Construct frames of aluminum extrusions with minimum wall thickness of
1.8mm.
B. Centre rails and base for sidelights: same material as doors.
Parcel 35 Specifications
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard powder
coated finish 60 - 80 micron thick unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Color
shall be as selected and approved by the Engineer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FABRICATION
A. Doors and framing to be by same manufacturer.
B. Fabricate doors and frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as shown.
C. Fit joints tightly and secure mechanically.
D. Conceal fastenings.
E. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors, frames and reinforcements to receive
hardware using templates provided under Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
F. Isolate aluminum from direct contact with dissimilar metals, concrete and
masonry.
PART 3 EXECUTION
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions and data sheets.
Parcel 35 Specifications
INSTALLATION
A. Set frames plumb, square, level at correct elevation in alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Adjust operable parts for correct function.
D. Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure that structural loads are not
transmitted to frames.
GLAZING
A. Glaze aluminum doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
CAULKING
A. Seal joints to provide weathertight seal at outside and air, vapour seal at inside.
B. Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Conceal
sealant within the aluminum work except where exposed use is permitted by
Owner’s Representative.
CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning of aluminum components in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and
accumulated environmental dirt.
C. Clean aluminum with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner.
D. Remove traces of primer, caulking, epoxy and filler materials; clean doors and
frames.
E. Clean glass and glazing materials with approved non-abrasive cleaner.
F. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment barriers.
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products and components from damage during
construction.
B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by aluminum door and frame
installation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of cladding and edge
construction and trim for openings, door hardware sets and accessories
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size and elevation of each door; construction
details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors through one source from a single
approved manufacturer.
C. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project
indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
1.6 WARRANTY
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Top and Bottom Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects
which will be visible when finished as specified herein.
B. Core and Blocking:
1. Semisolid core: Manufacturer's standard designed for semi core purpose
intended.
2. Hollow core: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 1:2 solid to hollow
parts.
C. Side Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects which will
be visible when finished as specified herein
1. Wood for side edge bands shall matching face veneers for natural finish
doors.
D. Sub face: Minimum 6mm thick, properly dried plywood.
A. Semi solid core wood skeleton inside, MDF boards for door leaf both sides
B. Thickness of Doors: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, thickness of wood
doors shall be 45 mm.
C. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces
2. Species and Cut: hardwood with oak veneer as specified on drawings
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Door frames shall be constructed in accordance with detailed Drawings. All frames
shall have full width rabbet and dado joints. Joints shall be securely made.
C. Where indicated on Drawings, frames shall have continuous grooves to house
neoprene gaskets according to details.
D. The back of frames shall be primed with two coats of priming before installation.
2.4 Architraves
A. Shall be machine-formed to dimensions and shape shown on Drawings and
constructed of same type of door wood face.
B. Architraves, beads and quarter rounds shall be in unjointed length between angles
and end of runs.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated on drawings.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware
to comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, and
hardware templates.
F. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
Louvers: Factory installs louvers in prepared openings.
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including
cutouts, with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of
finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Grade: Premium
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI
System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
B. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
C. Reject doors with defects.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the Aluminum and glass entrances and shop fronts
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following:
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.
2. Details of fittings and glazing.
C. Hardware quantities, locations, and installation requirements.
D. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
F. Metal Finishes: 300 mm long sections of patch fittings, rails, and other items.
G. Glass: 300 mm square, showing exposed-edge finish.
H Engineering Calculations: include structural computations, material properties, and
other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by
the structural engineer who was responsible for their preparation.
Calculation and shop drawings to be submitted simultaneously.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating all-glass systems without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.5 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
- Glass defects as specified and defined in Division 8, Section “Glazing”.
- Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
- Failure of operating components to function normally.
B. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Taking Over to the Employer.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the
following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
B. Structural Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and area wind loads.
C. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/175 of clear
span or 19 mm, whichever is smaller.
E Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following
ambient and surface temperature changes.
F Temperature Change (Range): 40 deg C, ambient; 60 deg C, material surfaces.
2.2 MATERIALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.5 FINISHES
A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend
into finish.
2. Finishes: Directional Satin Finish: No. 4, or as indicated on drawing, and as
approved sample.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Set units level and plumb.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate
indicated.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Powder coat Aluminum Windows.
B. Powder coat Fire rated Aluminum Windows.
C. The extent of each type of aluminum window unit (including operations) is shown
on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed in exterior perimeter
joints around sliding aluminum-frame
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements
1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
2. ASTM E2010 Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Window Assemblies.
3. ASTM E 283-04, Test Method for Determining Rate of Airflow Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences
Across the Specimen.
4. ASTM E 330-02, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
5. ASTM E 331-00, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions shall
be submitted for approval.
B. shall show elevations of units, full-size sections, thicknesses, fastening, methods
of installation and anchorage, size and spacing of anchors, method of glazing,
locations of operating hardware, mullion details, method and material for weather
stripping, method of attaching screens, details of installation, connections with
other work and window schedules showing locations of each window unit.
C. Certificates of Compliance: Submit certificates of compliance stating that the prime
windows conform to the specified requirements. Quality certification labels affixed
to windows in accordance with AAMA 302.9 for prime windows are acceptable in
lieu of certificates.
1.5 STORAGE
A. Windows shall be stored above ground and under weather- tight coverings or
enclosures.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Protective Coating or Covering: Prior to shipment from the factory, finished
surfaces of aluminum shall receive a protective coating or covering. Coating or
covering shall not chip, peel, or flake due to temperature or weather and shall
protect against discoloration and surface damage from transportation, storage,
and construction activities. Coating or covering shall be readily removable without
affecting the finish.
B. Covering shall be either adhesive paper, waterproof tape or strippable plastic.
Coating applied to aluminum shall be two sprayed-on coats of clear, water-white,
non-yellowing, methacrylate lacquer to a total minimum thickness of 10 microns;
maximum thickness 20 microns.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Extrusions of bars, rods and tubes: 6063-T6 alloy conforming to ASTM B221.
B. Sheets and plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209.
C. Window frames and sashes shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions
not less than 1.8 mm thick.
D. FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FRAMING
1. Frame construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and
thermally broken aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite
material.
2. Assembly: Frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter
joints.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat
transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening
shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.
E. Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or a non-corrosive
material, compatible with the aluminum components and warranted by
manufacturer.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of
hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.
2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer standard high-strength aluminum
units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized
complying with ASTM A 386.
G. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel
conforming to ASTM A 386.
H. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC – Paint
12, compounded for 20 mil thickness per coat.
I. Sealants: Aluminum frames shall be sealed using a sealant of a type conforming
to Section 07900 - SEALANTS, and a color matching with the aluminum profiles.
J. Glass: Conform to Section 08800 - GLAZING. Type of glazing shall be as shown
on the Drawings.
K. Weather stripping: For horizontal sliding or double-wing window units provide
sliding type woven pile weather stripping of polypropylene or nylon pile and resin-
impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip complying with AAMA
701.2. For other types of windows provide compression-type
1. weather stripping, compressible molded expanded EPDM or neoprene
2. Weather stripping gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 509.
L. Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard vinyl glazing gasket.
M. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or Snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with
glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match
window units.
N. Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard hardware fabricated from aluminum or
stainless steel compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform and
function as intended. For fire resistance windows Provide hardware with low
conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame
or vent sash.
B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate fire resistance window units with an
integral concealed low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior
materials and window members exposed on the interior, in a manner that
eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years,
has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
Parcel 35 Specifications
condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of
glass retention.
3. Weep holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating
water to the exterior.
2.2 WINDOWS
A. General: Shapes shown are representations of design, function and required
profile. Dimensions shown are minimum.
2.4 FINISHES
Powder Coated Finish: 80 micron thick. Color shall be approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for the
installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the
work.
B. Set units, plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Anchor securely in place. Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with or
fastened to dissimilar materials, except stainless steel or zinc, the aluminum
surface shall be protected from dissimilar materials. Surfaces in contact with
sealant after installation shall not be coated with any type of protective material.
C. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at
weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
D. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to
avoid damage of the protective coating. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving
parts.
E. Provide protective treatment and other precautions required through the
remainder of the construction period, to ensure that window units will be without
damage or deterioration at the time of acceptance.
F. Remove protection when requested by the Engineer for inspection of finishes, and
replace.
G. Remove mortar and other deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum
immediately.
H. Remove protection when no longer required.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Parcel 35 171 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services for all finish
hardware, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of the Contract
Documents.
B. Related work:
A. Tag or package each item with identification related to hardware schedule. Include
installation instructions.
C. Control items before and after installation so that completion will not be delayed by
hardware losses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Fasteners:
4. Use full thread to head wood screws on wood doors to apply butts.
6. through bolt closers on labeled doors with hex nuts and bolts.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Fit hardware before final door finishing. Permanently install hardware after
finishing operations are complete.
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation or
function.
B. When hardware is installed more than one month prior to final acceptance or
occupancy, during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check
and adjustment of all hardware items.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDS
This section covers the work of glass and glazing as required by the Contract for
the following applications:
Parcel 35 173 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Windows
2. Doors
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials wet or dry used to install glass.
Extent of each type of glass and glazing work is indicated on Drawings and in
Finishing Tables.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and
specification sections for the approval of the Engineer:
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and
fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance
instructions.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: 300 mm square samples of each type and
color of glass indicated and 300 mm long samples of each color required for each
type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample
between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.
C. Certificates: Certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project where tested for adhesion to glass and
glazing channel substrates and compatibility with other materials. Provide testing
for:
D. Different type of glass
E. Glazing sealants
F. Glazing gaskets
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the latest
edition of the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) or other approved International Standard and Sound Practice.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM No.
C 509 Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Materials
C 864 Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
Blocks, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
C 1048 Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass - HS, FT Coated and
Uncoated glass
C 1172 Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
D 412 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion - Adhesion to Flexible
Substrates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. System Performance: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced,
Parcel 35 174 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
thickness required that limits enter deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50
times the short side length or 25 mm whichever is less.
4. Minimum glass thickness for exterior glass lites: Not less than 6 mm.
5. Thermal Movement: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movement
resulting from maximum change in ambient and surface temperature acting on
glass framing members and glazing components.
C. Laminated Glass: Two panes of annealed glass bonded with an interlayer material
for use in building glazing, all complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1172.
D. Body Tinted Float Glass: Solar control glass, floated, transparent glass in which
the whole body is tinted with a solar reflective metallic oxide coating by the
pyrolytic or sputter coating process and shall be flat, heat absorbing and light
reducing glass. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, tinted glass shall be 6
mm thick. The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer test
Parcel 35 176 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
reports of the percentage of visible light transmittance and shading coefficient for
thickness and colors indicated. Body tinted glass shall conform to the
requirements of BS No. 952.
1. Tinted float glass shall be HS heat strengthened where needed.
E. Rolled Plate Glass (Patterned Glass): Rolled translucent patterned one side of
which has a definite pattern (geometric). Thickness shall be as indicated on
Drawings.
F. Heat Treated (Float - Glass): Shall be with surface compression not less than 60
MPa. The area of the largest crack free fragments (dicing fracture/ fragments) shall not
be more than 6.5 cm.
1. All tempered glass shall be tempered glass by horizontal process (tempering
done in a horizontal furnace) to avoid distorted images and with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed. Unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings, fully tempered glass in the project shall have a
thickness not less than 6 mm.
2. All tempered glass shall be heat soaked to approximately 650 º C to remove
all residue and to prevent sudden failure.
3. The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer the result of
impact test including the size and number of fragments of the tested pane that
shall be submitted too.
G. Laminated Glass (Plastic Interlayer - Safety Glass): Shall be two lites of glass and
interlayers material clear or colored with (PVB Polyvinyl Butyral) or cured resin with
thickness indicated but not less than 0.8 mm with proven record of no tendency to
bubble or discolor, The two lites of glass shall be of different thickness to avoid
simultaneous resonance, and the two lites shall be acoustically isolated from the
frame.
H. Insulating Glass (Double Glazing): Preassembled units consisting of two lites of
glass sealed together separated by a dehydrated air space in between with a
perimeter metal spacer containing a primary seal desiccant that absorbs and
maintains a dry interspace and a secondary seal. Unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings, the two lite shall be of tempered glass (safety glass) and shall be of
different thickness to avoid simultaneous resonance and they shall be isolated
from the frame.
1. Air-space shall be defined by the Contractor to achieve the required
performance.
2. The perimeter metal spacer shall be manufacturer standard spacer, made of
aluminum, galvanized steel, stainless steel or can be color coated according to
requirements.
I. Reflective Glass: Shall be float-glass coated with some kind of treatment to
prevent read-through.
J. High Performance Glass: Provide high performance glass with low/low shading
coefficient, according to the required criteria as mentioned.
K. Wire anti-fire glass: Add a wire mesh to the organic rubber pieces or inorganic
slurries in the middle of two layers of glass. The application of wire mesh to
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of
minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing between
joints of joinery or glass framing. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Cleaning of Channels: Clean glazing channels and other framing members to
receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to
substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are
Parcel 35 178 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Glazing to Wood with Beads: The rebated shall be previously treated with one
coat of priming paint and the bedding putty or sealant inserted. The glass shall be
embedded securely in place and screwed to beads.
C. Glazing without Putty or Sealant: Where specified, wash leather ribbon velvent,
felt or similar materials shall be used in place of putty for glazing in conjunction
with beads. The material shall be fitted so that it covers all parts of the glass
which shall be covered by the rebate and beads.
3.4 GLAZING
Except for panels of less than 0.25 m 2 (500 x 500 mm if square) install setting
blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width, never less
than 30 mm from each corner of the glass. Set blocks in thin course of sealant.
Provide spacers inside and outside face opposite each other. Install of correct
size and at spacing to preserve required face clearances.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize
size sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure
that gasket cannot "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section covers the work of plastering as required by the Contract.
1. Portland cement plaster
2. Metal lath
Extent of each type of plaster work is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing
Tables.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data including test
results and certificates of compliance.
B. Samples: Representative samples of all materials and color chart.
1. One meter square panels as samples for each type of plaster finish.
C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing location of different kinds of
plaster, materials or textures, relation with different surfaces, finishing
and plaster joints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 181 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The contractor shall ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give
consistent and uniform color to surface finishes which are not to be painted.
B. Cement: shall be a gray standard brand of ordinary Portland cement
C. Sand: Shall be natural siliceous sands from approved pits conforming to ES hard,
durable, clean and free from adherent coating such as clay and from any appreciable
amount of clay in pellet form. It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites,
salts, coals or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, flaky
or elongated particles in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the
hardening, strength, durability or appearance of any material in contact with it. The
various sizes of particles of which sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed
throughout the mass and shall be graded within the following limits except as otherwise
indicated
1. For finish coat of cement plaster, use sand passing No. l2 sieve.
2. For floated finish coat use sand passing No. 16 sieve.
3. For troweled finish coat use sand passing No. 20 sieve.
D. Lime Putty: Shall be Factory-Prepared lime.
E. Factory-Prepared Stucco Portland Cement Finish Coats: Add water only; comply
with finish coat manufacturer's directions.
F. Water: Shall be drinking water or water of chemical composition acceptable for
drinking, except for bacteriological limits and shall be clean water free from oil,
salt, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter.
G. Color Pigments: Shall be of an approved manufacturer, lime proof, non fading and
complying with BS 1014.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The whole of the work shall be executed in a neat
workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any work
rejected through non-compliance with the specification shall be
removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall commence work when instructed and shall clear all
unused materials and plaster waste from Site when the work is
complete.
B. Surfaces of masonry walls or concrete shall be well cleaned by wire
brush, joints on masonry shall be raked out at least 15 mm.
C. All surfaces then shall be thoroughly wetted with water before spatter-
dash is applied.
D. Spatter-dash after application shall be sprayed with water for a period of 5
days.
E. Dots and bands shall be used to produce plaster surfaces level and true.
Dots shall be plumb of 50 x 100 mm dimension and thickness as required
but not less than 15 mm and shall be made of gypsum at intervals not
exceeding 2.0 m in horizontal and vertical directions, to cover the entire
surface to be plastered.
F. Dots shall be also at intersection of ceiling with walls and corners.
G. Bands shall extend in a horizontal or vertical direction between dots
and be formed of the same mortar as that of the coat applied. The side
of the bands shall be left rough to bond with plaster.
H. Plaster base coat shall be applied between bands to cover the entire
work surface.
I. Dots shall be removed and the resulting voids shall be filled with plaster
and finished as adjacent surfaces.
J. All faces shall be true and flat and angles shall be straight, level, and
plumb.
K. Surface of undercoats shall be well scratched horizontally to provide a
key for finishing coats and left to cure. Surfaces indicated as floated
shall be finished with a wood or felt float to a flat surface free from
trowel marks.
L. Surfaces indicated as trowelled smooth shall be finished with a steel
trowel to a smooth surface free from trowel marks.
M. Plaster shall be flat with opening's frames.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.6 MIXING
B. The mixing shall continue for such time as shall ensure uniform distribution of
materials and uniform color and consistency.
C. The quantity of water used shall be carefully controlled. Do not use excessive
water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D. Do not re temper or use re tempered plaster and all plaster which has begun to
stiffen shall be discarded.
E. No material shall be allowed to remain overnight in the mixers or mixing boxes.
Tools and implements used in mixing or transporting plaster shall be thoroughly
cleaned after each use, and kept clean and free from previous mixes.
3.7 CURING
All plaster coats made of mortar containing cement shall be kept in a constant
moistened condition by being sprayed as often as required for five (5) days.
3.8 DRYING
Protect plaster from too rapid drying and provide air circulation when drying is too
slow.
For exterior plastering the Contractor shall provide a protective covering with
tarpaulins or canvas rolls which must be hung so that it is clear of the finished
surface. Any defects caused by inadequate protection shall be remedied at the
Contractor's expense.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The mix of each successive layer or coat must never be richer in cement than the
mix used for the coat to which it is applied.
Two coats having the same mix properties can only be applied successively if the
second coat is thinner than the first.
The type and mix of plaster shall be for each location as indicated on Drawings
and on finishing table. Adjust mix proportions below within limits to attain
workability.
B. Interior Plastering for Walls
1. Spatter-dash (Tartasha): Shall be done by forcibly throwing on wet
mix of Portland cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 450 kg
cement to 1 m3 sand and shall be kept wet with a fine water spray
until set and shall be allowed to harden before the next coat is
applied.
2. Base Coat 1st Layer: Shall be applied to a thickness of l5 mm
(including dash coat) unless otherwise mentioned. The surface
shall be brought to true planes with all angles and corners to a right
angle with rod and darby, well scored, combed or cross-scratched in
two directions to prepare a good mechanical key for the following
coat.
As soon as base coat has setup enough to carry two coats, the second coat
shall be applied to the depth required.
When plastering is applied in one coat the scratching shall be omitted.
Base coat mix shall be 1 m3 sand to 250 kg ordinary cement
3. Finishing Layer (Float Coat): Shall be 5 mm thick of same
proportions of 1 layer and shall be applied as soon as 1 layer has
set firmly bonded to the background and can carry the second
layers brought to a true even plane. Steel trowel to uniformly
smooth surfaces or wood float as directed, except where other finish
is required.
C. Interior Plastering for Ceiling: Spatter-dash coat and one 15 mm thick
coat as specified above
D. Exterior Plastering
1. Spatter-dash: Shall be done as Clause B above.
2. Base Coat: Shall be 15 mm thick and proportioned as follows:
a. 300 kg ordinary Portland cement 1 m3 sand
b. Lime may be added as required.
c. Base coat shall be finished as per Clause B above.
3. Finishing Coat: Shall be either:
Proportioned as base course applied by hand and the finish shall be smooth,
done by either steel trowelling, wood floating, or by sponge to give a smooth
texture (to be ready for exterior paint application), or shall be proportioned as
follows:
Parcel 35 185 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
White cement
Marble or stone powder
Lime
Colored finish coat plastering shall be colored by the addition of coloring
agents and pigments to the engineer approval.
Finish shall be smooth or rough texture or pebble-dash (sprayed finish) as required.
Smooth rendering shall be done by either steel trowelling or wood floating.
Textured rendering shall be done by using special tools, cork, carpet float
hacks and blades or the edge of steel trowels.
Pebble dash (sprayed finish) shall be applied with an approved machine hand
operated or mechanically operated to give a honeycomb finish of even texture
and thickness. The sprayed finish shall be applied in an approved number of
separated coats allowing time for drying between coats.
Application in one continuous spraying operation to obtain a thick layer shall
not be permitted.
E. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 3 mm in 3000 mm from a true
plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3000 mm
straightedge placed at any location on surface.
3.12 CLEANING
Upon completion of plastering work, sweep and clean floors throughout, including
ledges or other surfaces carrying plaster droppings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. This Section covers the work of gypsum board construction and
includes the following:
1. Gypsum board ceilings.
2. Gypsum ceilings tiles.
3. Metal Framing and Support Systems.
Extent of each type of gypsum board assemblies required is indicated on
Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data from manufacturers for each type of product specified
including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations and complete installations of controls
and expansion joints and including plans, sections, details of
components and attachments to other units of work.
C. Samples in triplicate 50 x 50 cm of all gypsum board in each
manufacturer's texture including tape, studs, etc.
D. Samples from ceiling suspension system accessories for tiles and
board gypsum ceilings (500 mm long of steel studs, hat-shaped furring
etc.)
E. Material Test: Reports from qualified testing laboratory indicating test
results relative to compliance of gypsum board with specified
requirement.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Water Resistance: Average of three (3) specimens shall not be more than the
following after two (2) hours immersion:
Water Absorption Surface Absorption
5% by weight 1.6 gm
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
so that fastening surface and the grid suspension members are level. Do
not vary more than 3 mm measured both lengthwise and transversely
between parallel members.
3.3 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Locate exposed
end-butt joints as far from center of ceilings as possible and stagger not
less than 600 mm in alternate courses of board.
B. Install ceiling boards across framing in manner which minimizes the
number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible.
C. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install
imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light
contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm open space
between boards. Do not force into place.
D. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, or provide intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking behind end joints. Position
boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges
and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not
place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
E. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided
for additional support at openings and cutouts.
F. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
G. Fasten with corrosion resistant screw. Space screws or fasteners a
maximum of 200 mm.
3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions),
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges and damaged areas, if
any, using setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards.
D. Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds
in three (3) coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand
between coats and after last coat:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint compound
3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound
E. Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels, apply primer only to
surfaces are clean, dry and smooth.
F. Painting of gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in
Division-9, Section 099100 "Painting".
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a suitable manner
which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
PART GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section covers the ceramic and porcelain floor and glazed wall work as
indicated on Drawings and required by the Contract and shall include the following
items:
1. Ceramic tiles
2. Mosaic tiles
Extent of ceramic tiles is indicated on the Drawings and finishing tables.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data for each type of tile,
mortar, grout or other product specified.
Installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Including complete installation details and layout plans,
location of expansion, control joints in the tile substrates. Show tile floor
patterns, wall design and locations
C. Samples: In triplicate of all tiles mounted on a tempered hardwood panel 600
x 600 mm and grouted to approved color, special pieces and fittings in each
manufacturer's color, texture and pattern available. Include samples of
accessories involving color selection.
Grout samples showing the full range of color available.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Test Reports: Material test report from qualified testing laboratory indicating
test results relative to compliance of tile, tile setting and grouting products with
requirements indicated and ES.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.6 PROTECTION
Maintain temperature at 30C or more in tiled areas during installation and for 5
days after completion.
Provide tile protection whenever required. Material likely to stain or deface tile
shall not be used. Close grouted tile floors to traffic completely for 24 hours
after installation; thereafter, permit traffic on ceramic tile floors after 4 days and
only over protective covering of cardboard or equivalent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Shall be first grade as specified in the drawings and finishing table
and shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications of the
country of origin. Tiles shall be square edge, flat, vitrified plain clay tiles, or fully
vitrified, true to shape, flat, free from flaws, cracks or crazing and keyed on the
reverse side and from a manufacturer approved by Engineer. The glazed
surface shall show no objectionable surface blemishes or defects when
examined.
B. Thickness and facial dimensions: shall be as indicated on Drawings or in
Finishing Tables. Colors, surface textures, patterns and other appearance
characteristics shall be selected by the Engineer if not indicated on Drawings.
C. The following marks shall be legibly and indelibly impressed on the unglazed
back of each tile, and tile fittings:
1. The name of the manufacturer and identifying mark
2. The name of the country where the tile is made
2.2 GLAZED WALL TILES
A. Wall tiles shall be units with impervious glazed finish surfaced fused to a non-
vitreous body
B. Water absorption shall not exceed 18%. Finish shall be high gloss or matte
glaze surface shininess as required and with square edge.
C. Minimum thickness shall be 6 mm. Glazed tiles shall conform to ES No. 271.
Glazed wall tiles shall be for vertical and non traffic horizontal surfaces.
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.6 MORTAR
A. Mortar shall be cement and sand in accordance with ES added in accurate
proportions.
1. Sand: Shall be clean and sharp, properly graded for the purpose and
containing not more than 3% by weight of clay, loam, silt or other
deleterious matter. Sand shall conform to ES No. 1108.
2. Cement: For mortar beds and backing shall be a standard brand of
Portland cement conforming with ES No. 373.
3. Water: Only potable water or water whose composition is acceptable for
drinking except in respect to bacteriological requirements shall be used for
mixing mortar.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Cement Sand: Shall be white or colored cement mixed with water to a creamy
consistency.
B. Latex Portland Cement Grout: Shall be the mixture of the above grout with a
latex additive added in a concentrate or dilute form at the site, or a factory
prepared dry mix combining cement with aggregate and polymer additive to
which only water is added at the sites.
Latex-based mortar grouting shall be used for the kitchens and where
specified. Care must be taken as latex-portland cement grout is very difficult to
remove from the exposed tile-face.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Prior to setting tiles, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory correction
of defects. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and
other fixtures and fittings, shall be in place and trenches, chases or other
openings in floors and walls shall be properly closed.
Substrates for setting tiles shall be firm, dry, clean and free from oil or waxy
films or curing compounds.
Remove coating, curing compounds and other substances incompatible with
tile setting material by using a concrete grinder, or polishing machine equipped
with a heavy duty brush.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Work shall be set in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's
recommendations except where in conflict with this section. Work shall be
Parcel 35 197 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
carefully laid out, providing symmetry about center lines of the space or areas
and adjust to minimize tile cutting, avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin
cuts and pieces, chipped, spelled or otherwise disfigured tiles, will not be
allowed. Unless otherwise required tile heights of walls may finish one-half
course above or below indicated heights to avoid cutting of tile. Dampen wall
surface with clean water and apply a spatter dash coat composed of one part
cement to one and one-half parts sand. Spatter dash coat shall be applied at
least 16 hours prior to setting tiles. Immediately before applying the mortar
setting beds on wall surfaces, the underlying scratch coats or spatter dash
coats shall be moistened with clean water to prevent it absorbing water from
the bedding coat. Each tile shall be buttered evenly with mortar and tapered
firmly into position so that the bed is solid throughout.
Joints shall be even and not more than 3 mm wide, they shall be continuous
both horizontally and vertically.
For joints grouted with epoxy joints shall not be less than 6 mm.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Floor tile shall be set true to straight edge. Tile floors shall finish flush with the
gratings, stainers and drains.
Extend tile work into recess and under and behind equipment and fixtures to
form a complete covering without interruption.
3.5 GROUTING
Joints shall be grouted up not less than 24 hours fixing tiles.
Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile) and are free of dust
and debris.
Thoroughly wash out wall and floor tile joints and saturate with clean water
before grouting. Grout joints after setting beds are dry according to location
with epoxy based grouting or with neat cement grout white or colored grouting
cement mixed with water to a creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into
joints to fill entire depth.
Joints shall be grouted up solidly without voids, filled to full thickness of tile and
finished flush and neat with face of tile.
Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from faces of tiles.
When coved skirtings are not provided between floor and walls matching silicon
sealant shall be in the joint when using cement grouting, and epoxy compounds
when epoxy grouting is used.
3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS
Locate expansion joints, and other sealant-filled joints, including: control,
contraction and isolation joints where indicated, during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrate.
In large tiled areas provide 6 mm width control joint at a maximum of 4.5 m in
each direction and at the perimeters walls.
Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants".
3.7 CURING
Water shall not be allowed on new tilling until bedding and grouting have
completely set.
Tiled surfaces shall be kept moist for a period of five (5)days to adequately cure
the cement mortar.
3.8 CLEANING
After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, tile surfaces shall be cleaned
using a stiff fiber brush, soap powder and clean water. Traces of cement
epoxy, or dust accumulations and foreign matter shall be completely removed.
Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with an acid solution consisting of ten percent of
muriatic acid and ninety percent water and rinsed with clean water. Where acid
solution is used, exposed hardware and plumbing trim shall be covered with a
coating of vaseline to protect the metal from the acid and its fumes. Following
Parcel 35 199 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
cleaning, the vaseline coatings shall be removed. Do not use wire brushes or
acid solution to clean glazed tile.
Clean-up of all masking materials, equipment and debris from work area is the
responsibility of the Contractor.
3.9 PROTECTION
Provide tile protection wherever required, material likely to stain or deface tile
shall not be used. Completely close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours
after installation. Thereafter permit traffic on ceramic tile floors only over
protective covering of cardboard or equivalent.
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each
type of ceiling tile required.
Parcel 35 200 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s written product warranty per Section Closeout Procedures
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect installation area and conditions under which work is to be performed for
compliance with all manufacturers’ environmental requirements. All wet work in
the installation area must be complete, cured and dry prior to installation. Work
above ceilings shall be complete, inspected and accepted before ceiling work
begins. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations for installation of
ceiling tiles and industry standards.
B. Coordinate the exact size, location and sequencing of penetrations of ceiling
reflectors by all building components.
C. Lay out ceiling pattern per approved shop drawings. Where not otherwise
indicated, lay out tile so margins on opposite sides of rooms are equal or greater
than ½ tile width.
D. Where ceilings of different heights abut, install acoustical material matching ceiling
at vertical surface of ceiling break match ceiling.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stone work.
1. Stone flooring and bases.
2. Countertop
3. Wall cladding.
4. Column cladding.
5. Interior trim including window stools, base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of stone,
stonework accessory, and other manufactured products required.
1. Include submittal of stone sealer manufacturer’s recommended methods
for application of impregnator and surface protection coatings based on
testing of project specific stone flooring materials.
2. Include submittal of stone sealer manufacturer’s recommended methods
for application of impregnator and surface protection coatings based on
testing of project specific stone countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes,
dimensions, sections and profiles of stone units, arrangement and provisions for
jointing, supporting, anchoring and bonding stonework; and other details
showing relationships with, attachment to, and reception of, related work.
1. Include dimensions and profiles of stone units.
2. Show locations and details of joints.
3. Show locations and details of anchors.
4. Include elevations and details of graphics and carvings.
5. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer.
6. Show the extent of each type of movement joint. Show widths,
details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in substrates receiving stone and finished stone surfaces.
C Samples: Samples: Submit samples for each stone type required, exhibiting the
full range of color characteristics expected.
1. Submit a minimum of 2 each, 300 x 300mm in size, in each color and finish
specified.
2. In the case of more variegated stones, color photos shall be submitted in
addition to the number of samples to show the full range of color and markings
to be expected.
Parcel 35 204 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
D Graphics and Carvings: Electronic files for drawings of graphics and carving work
will be provided by the Engineer.
1. Submit sets of (300-mm) square samples for each color, grade, finish, type and
specie of stone consisting of units not less than full face size indicated for each
stone thickness. Include 3 or more units in each set of samples showing the full
range of appearance characteristics to be expected in completed Work.
2. Stone delivered to the jobsite, or installed, and which does not fall within the
accepted sample range, may be Subject to removal and replacement with stone
that falls within the accepted sample range at no cost to the Owner.
3. Submit one (300-mm) long sample of each stone divider and transition strip.
4. Submit (300-mm) long grout Samples for each color grout to be used to
grout each type, composition, color, and finish of stone.
5. Adhesively Joined Shapes: Submit three (3) samples of stone
countertop to apron sections bonded together with specified adhesive for
each specie and finish of stone and consisting of units not less than 12-inch
(300-mm) long x full size profile shown on the drawings. No fabrication of
assembly shall be permitted until approval of sample is obtained.
C. Floor Stone Testing Results: Submit test reports from qualified independent,
Los Angeles City Approved testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of stone flooring with requirements specified
for slip resistance.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for each type of product
specified.
E. Product Certificates: Submit manufacturers certifications for each type of
grout and bonding material being provided are suitable for the intended use
and meet or exceed the referenced standards and the requirements of this
specification.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealants:
1. For Countertops: ‘'Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant’
2. Floor Joints: ‘Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Paving Applications’,
B. Floor Cleaner: Provide stone cleaners of proper formulation for stone types,
finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone supplier. Use
cleaning agents which do not contain caustic or harsh fillers that will damage
stone or stone finishes.
C. Countertop Sealer: Provide stone sealing materials as per section joint
sealant.
1. Prepare countertop surfaces to receive sealer in accordance with the
countertop sealer manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply sealers and
surface protection coatings in accordance with the countertop sealer
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Divider and Transition Strips: Stainless steel shapes and flat bar trims
fabricated from ASTM A666 (for flat bar) and ASTM A276 (for shapes) Type 304
stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated, depth as required to suit conditions
shown and having an integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or
substrate, unless otherwise indicated. Provide NAAMM #4 satin finish at
exposed top edge in the long direction, furnish in longest lengths available.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to the installation of stone, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the
project site to review the material selections, substrate preparations, installation
procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and conditions,
standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work.
The meeting shall include the Owner, Architect, the Contractor, stone installer,
stone and setting material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives
of other trades or subcontractors affected by the installation.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where the stonework will be installed, with Installer
present.
1. Verify that substrates for setting stone flooring are sound and free of
voids, bug holes, rock pockets, honeycombs, and protrusions; and which
are dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical
and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind
stone units has been completed before installing stone.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in the existing floor substrates are
coordinated with stone floor joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint
locations in consultation with Architect.
4. Do not commence installation of flooring materials until floor substrate is
Parcel 35 211 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Grind or scarify concrete substrates to remove existing floor adhesive and
mortar residues (if any), laitance, films, sealing and curing compounds if they
are determined to be present on the substrate.
B. Blending: Color blend stone flooring units at Project site before installing.
1. Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of
the site (i.e. corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each
other, etc.).
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Stonework shall be installed by skilled mechanics. Employ skilled stone
fitters at the site to do necessary field cutting as stones are set.
1. Use power saws with diamond tipped blades to cut stone. Cut lines
straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop
Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments
indicated or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust anchors,
supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with
uniform joints of (3-mm), unless greater widths are indicated, and with edges
and faces aligned. Do not install stone units which are warped, curled,
cracked, chipped, or broken, discolored or not properly finished.
C. Extend stonework into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures
to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of
stone without marring visible surfaces. Fit stone closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap
stone. Where cut edges will be visible after installation, finish to match factory-
fabricated edges.
E. Lay stone in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining stone units on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out
stonework and center stone fields in both directions in each space beginning at
thresholds. Lay out stonework and center stone fields in both directions on
Parcel 35 212 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced
not more than 18 inches apart across back of unit, but provide not less than 1
setting spot per 2 sq. ft., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use Portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone is applied to inside
face of exterior walls.
B. Anchors: Provide a minimum of 4 anchors per panel up to 12 sq. ft. in face area,
plus a minimum of 2 additional anchors for each additional 8 sq. ft. C. Grout joints
after setting.
Parcel 35 Specifications
prior to its surface drying, remove all excess “puddled” impregnator using a
white cloth to avoid splotchy/dull areas. Allow 72 hours for impregnator to
cure.
2. Surface Protection Coating: Not more than 4 days before occupancy by
Owner apply no-rinse stone surface protection coating to stone using dilution
rates as recommended by the surface protection coating manufacturer.
Apply surface protection coating by using either mop and bucket or auto-
scrub brushing techniques in accordance with the surface protection coating
manufacturer’s recommendations. If scrub brushing, thoroughly scrub stone
flooring using soft medium bristle brush heads, instead of nylon pads, to deep
clean textured surfaces and grout joints of polished and honed finished
surfaces. Test brushes, to ensure that they will not harm each of the
finishes, and types, of stone flooring prior to cleaning operations. During
auto-scrubbing operations monitor the quality and cleanliness of the brushes,
to assure that they do not become worn or contaminated and scratch the
finish of the stone flooring. Do not rinse with water as rinsing will remove the
stone surface protection coating.
C. Leave finished installation clean and free of warped, curled, cracked, chipped,
broken, un- bonded, discolored and otherwise defective stone units.
1. Replace warped, curled, cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, discolored and
otherwise defective stone in manner which results in stonework matching
approved samples and field-constructed sample installations, showing no
evidence of replacement.
D. Protect installed stone work with kraft paper or other heavy, breathable, covering
and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the stone material
manufacturers and installer that ensures that stone work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
End of Section
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 section includes
This Section includes the Terrazzo roof tiles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of terrazzo tiles and fittings indicated. Include
terrazzo fabrication and installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, patterns, elevations, sections, joints details,
and adjoining to other Work.
C. Samples: For each type, color, and pattern of terrazzo tiles and fittings
required and in size indicated below:
1. Terrazzo Tiles: Full size samples.
2. Fittings: Full size sample of each type of fitting specified.
D. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Cement: For manufacture of tiles and for mortar beds, cement shall be a
standard brand of Portland cement conforming to Egyptian Standard
Specification (ESS) No. 373.
B. Sand: For manufacture of tiles (backing layer) and fittings shall be to ESS
1109, clean, siliceous sand. Use sand of coarse grading.
C. Sand: For manufacture of tiles (face layer) and for mortar beds, shall be clean,
siliceous sharp, properly graded for the purpose and shall conform to ESS No.
1108. Clay, loam and silt content shall not exceed 3%.
D. Stone Chips: From natural local marble or granite as selected by the Engineer,
well-graded and of maximum size of 8 mm.
E. Pigments: Shall comply with requirements of BS EN 12878. Use pure mineral
pigments, alkali resistant, color stable and compatible with mix materials.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Bedding Mortar Admixture: Liquid-type admixture to increase workability of
mortar and increase bonding.
H. Reinforcement: Mild steel plain bars, 6 mm diameter formed to approved
details. Tie wire shall be 1.00 mm diameter annealed steel wire.
I. Joints Sealants: Urethane Sealant as specified in Division 7, Section “Joint
Sealants”.
2.2 TERRAZZO TILES
A. Terrazzo Tiles and Fittings shall be to BS EN 13748, mechanically vibrated in the
moulds, hydraulically pressed by 14 - 18 N/mm2 (depending on size of tile) and
steam cured with 100% humidity for 24 hours at 65 deg. C, comprising:
B. Marble, granite aggregate or mixture there from.
C. Size of aggregate up to 8 mm random
D. White cement for facing layer and grey cement for backing layer.
E. Pigment to BS EN 12878, color as selected by the Engineer
F. Corners and edges of tiles and fittings shall be absolutely square
G. Water absorption for any single test when tested in accordance with BS EN
13748 shall be not more than 0.4 g/m2 for tile face and 8 % for the whole tile
unit.
H. Transverse strength shall not be less than 3 N/mm2 for any single result.
I. The facing layer shall be such as to provide a minimum wearing thickness of
not less than 8.00 mm after grinding. 70% of the facing layer shall be covered
with marble aggregate.
J. The base layer shall consist of a 1: 3 mix of cement-aggregate (by weight).
Aggregates shall conform to BS 882.
K. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, terrazzo tiles shall be 300 x 300 mm,
by 25 mm thickness.
L. Terrazzo tiles and fittings shall have a factory-applied fine grit finish so as
exposed surfaces are smooth and polished but without luster.
Parcel 35 218 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
M. Precast Terrazzo Base Units: Minimum 20-mm- thick, precast terrazzo units,
lengths coordinated with tile size
N. Construction: One layer from face matrix.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Use
polyurethane based sealants, trafficable grade of colors approved by the Engineer.
B. Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is
biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by cleaner manufacturer
for use on terrazzo type indicated.
C. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically
neutral with pH factor between 7 and 10, does not affect color or physical
properties of terrazzo, is recommended by sealer manufacturer.
D. Control-Joint System: Is to be prefabricated, heavy-duty EPDM rubber section
reinforced with stainless steel angles and confirming to the requirements of BS
5385: Part 3. Select depth of section to comply with depth of stone slabs or
tiles and bedding mortar according to manufacturer's details.
E. Joint Filler: as specified in Division 7, Section "joint sealer"
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to setting all units, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory
correction of defects.
B. Clean substrates to produce clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo
application.
C. Remove substances that might impair bond of terrazzo system, including oil,
grease, and curing compounds.
D. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and other fixtures
and fittings shall be in place and trenches, chases or other openings decks
properly closed.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Work shall be carefully laid out, avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin cuts and
pieces, chipped, spalled or otherwise disfigured tiles shall not be accepted.
Mortar for setting beds shall be composed of 350 kg cement per cubic meter of
sand with sufficient mixing water. Approved liquid-type admixture may be
added to the mix to improve workability.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to
setting and shall be applied to setting beds while damp, but without free water
on the back of tile.
Tiles shall be accurately set, firmly pressed and tamped into full mortar beds
with well fitted joints in true planes, sloped or level as indicated on Drawings
and neatly cut and fitted closely against abutting work.
Intersections and returns shall be accurately formed and cuts rubbed smooth
with fine stone. Cut edges shall be set against fixtures or other tile penetrations
with at least a 1 mm joint.
Beds that have partially hardened shall not be retempered.
Movement Joints: Are to be to the full depth of tiles and mortar bedding,
extending entire perimeter of tiling area and at 15-meter intervals in both
directions. Install control joint fittings and fillers at vertical surfaces during setting
of tiles. Completely seal movement joints after grouting of normal joints.
3.5 SETTING TOLERANCES
Thoroughly open tile joints before grouting. Grout joints after setting bed is dry,
but not less than before 12 hours elapse, with colored ordinary Portland cement
mixed with water to a slurry consistency and thoroughly forced into joints to fill
entire depth.
3.7 BASES
Setting Mortar: Same proportions as used for floors with stiff consistency to fill
back of tiles entirely.
Firmly press and tamper tiles into backing mortar with well fitted vertical joints,
level and aligned top edge.
Fill any open vertical joints with grout as specified.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Protected installed floor tiles from premature drying of setting mortar. Cover
finished tile area with wet jute for a minimum period of 72 hours.
3.10 CLEANING AND CURING
Continuously during installation, tile surface shall be cleaned and traces of mortar or
residual tile pieces and foreign matter shall be completely removed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
GENERAL
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit
written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and
flame resistance and smoke development characteristics.
B. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition.
C. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of carpet
to be used for the work.
D. Manufacturer's standard color chart.
E. Certificate of compliance.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written 5 years guarantee, starting from substantial handover of project,
for all items specified under this section, signed by manufacturer and the
Contractor, against defective material and workmanship.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The carpet should be 100% washable and stain resistant. The carpet should be
commercial grade of class33 and
Warranty and allergy certificate 10 years. Nylon carpet sheet class fiber based
anti-microbial sanitized carpet roll of 4.3mm thickness
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. 100 mm high oak wooden skirting. Installation should be done by authorized
installer of company
Parcel 35 Specifications
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Measurement: Measure each space to receive carpet as a basis of supplying and
cutting the carpet. Do not scale Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions
shown.
B. Patch holes and cracks, and level to a smooth surface. Seal powdery or porous
surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
C. Vacuuming: Immediately prior to carpet installation, vacuum substrate and remove
all deleterious substances which would interfere with the installation or be harmful
to the work.
D. Substrate: Prior to installation of the carpet, ascertain that floors are completely
dry to prevent accumulation of moisture under carpet, and that the temperature of
the premises is proper to prevent sag, buckle, and shrinkage of carpet after
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams
perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not
bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.
B. Where required, install carpet cushion.
C. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and
closets of each space.
D. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by
protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
E. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to
substrate.
F. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming tape to provide
sufficient strength for stretching where carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
G. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to
stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where
carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning agent.
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with
commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace
carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn.
C. Vacuum clean carpet.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and the Engineer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or
deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and substrate for
Wood Stone wall panel system.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors and finishes, and species list available for Wood Stone wall panel system.
A. Source Limitations: For field-finished Wood Stone wall panel system, obtain each
species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide
materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B. Forest Certification: Provide Wood Stone wall system produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver Wood Stone wall panel system materials in unopened cartons or bundles
and store in a dry, warm, ventilated, weather-tight location.
A. Install Wood Stone wall panel system after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wood Stone wall panel system
by one of an approved manufacturer as the followings:
1. Oak wood species (unless Otherwise Specified) in the construction of the
Wood Stone wall panel system.
2. The Wood Stone wall panel shall have solid wood blocks fastened in the
specified design to 1/2" plywood panel measuring. Panels are manufactured to
be fastened to substrate 16" O.C.
Parcel 35 226 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. All solid wood blocks in width and length as indicated in approved shop
drawings
4. Solid wood block depth: 25mm.
5. Panels will be preassembled with some solid wood finish blocks shipped
unattached to facilitate attachment of the plywood to the substrate.
6. Wood Stone wall panel system shall to be stained with Natural stain.
7. Wood Stone wall panel system shall be finished with Clear Satin, finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Wood Stone wall panel system.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum and hand wipe clean area where panels are to be installed immediately
before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for any additional
substances requiring removal. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Wood Stone wall panel system manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
C. Solid wood finish blocks will be installed with construction grade adhesive after
mechanical fasteners have attached panels to substrate.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed Wood Stone wall panel system during remainder of construction
period.
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the work of site applied painting as required by contract and
include the following:
1. Latex Emulsion Water Binder Paint
2. Alkyd Paint (drying oil and resin binder)
3. anti- Carbonation Protective paints
4. Stains
B. The work includes surface preparation, priming painting, and finishing of exposed
interior and exterior items, and surfaces of ferrous metals, carpentry, concrete and
plaster.
C. Extent of each type of Painting shall be where required to patch the works and as
directed by the Engineer.
D. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar
adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Engineer shall select
these from standard colors or finishes available.
1.3 Definitions
Paint includes coating systems, materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains,
sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, inter-
mediate or finish coats.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen
and work areas are adequately protected from fire and health hazards resulting
from handling, mixing and application of paints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 Materials
A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade (Premium grade) of various types of
coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers.
Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade
product shall not be acceptable.
Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply
that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
Emulsion paint used for the exterior elevation shall be based on acrylic or
polyurethane paint as indicated on drawings.
Paint used for woodworks shall be lacquer paint with rubber base binders and shall
be single pack polyurethane lacquer from an approved manufacturer.
B. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service
indicated as to provide:
1. Color and opacity
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work shall be
applied and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
4. Wood: 15 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
6. Plaster: 12 percent.
D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
G. Precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting process.
H. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
I. The time and conditions necessary for a paint to dry must be checked.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Porous surfaces may require a block filler or a cement grout/ latex primer.
Stopping and filling shall be, when hard and dry, rubbed down level with the
surrounding surfaces.
D. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, oil and foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits and sand-paper as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots and apply a
thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot-sealer before application of
primer. After priming fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty, sand
smooth when dried, all nail holes, cracks and other small holes shall be filled after
the full prime coat.
1. Prime, stain or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases and paneling.
2. When transparent finish is required, back prime with spar varnish.
3. Back prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on backside.
4. Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
5. Unless otherwise described, all coatings to timber work shall be applied by brush.
6. Wood work required to be stained: Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease
and dirt. The wood shall then be stopped, filled and rubbed down. In the case
of oak surface shall be cleaned with white spirit to remove free oil.
Hard stopping for surfaces tinted shall be an approved tinted filler to match the
color of the surface.
Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with BS
1215.
All hardwood and softwood to receive decorative staining shall receive two (2)
coats of pigmented stain and three (3) coats of silk-lacquer; sand surfaces
between coats.
3.3 Materials Preparation
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir
as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.4 Application
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
2. Apply additional coats when putty undercoats, stains or other conditions show
Parcel 35 234 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
4. It is essential to use a grade of abrasive paper appropriate to surfaces, the
surface shall be sanded in the direction of and not across the grains.
5. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and
touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Each stage of the work shall be subjected to inspection and approval.
B. Painting Procedure: Apply primer coat or first-coat material to surfaces that have
been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. After preparation and the prime coat, apply on the over all surface a smoothing
and leveling putty (filling) the material must be stiff and applied with a putty or
stopping knife, firmly pressed into cavity, and knifed flush with surrounding
surfaces, it may be required filling in two stages.
2. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the
application method. Sand between applications to produce an even smooth
surface.
3. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint
does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness on the entire
surface as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Mechanical Work: Painting of mechanical work is limited to those items exposed
in occupied spaces and exterior areas exposed to view.
a. Mechanical items to be painted include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports
2. Tanks
3. Ductwork, insulation
4. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports
5. Accessory items
A. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or
finished and which has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry
and harden before application of subsequent coats.
Parcel 35 235 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture.
Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or
other surfaces imperfections.
C. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Sand surfaces smooth
prior to applying primer and after applying putty. Cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections shall not be
acceptable.
D. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth
surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color
irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes or other surface
imperfections.
Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 Completed Work
Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or
repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.6 Clean-up and Protection
During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans
and rags at end of each work day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping,
using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,
and repainting, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work,
after completion of painting operations.
At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Apply necessary putty of the same material and color to smooth surfaces.
c. Second Coat: Acrylic resin water-based emulsion, trowel applied, with a
course textures 3.0 Kg/m2.
4. Alkyd Paint Finish: Prepare surfaces as indicated in Item 3.7.C.
a. Prime Coat: Apply one coat alkyd paint of the color required over the 2
coats of putty.
b. Sand and apply necessary putty of the same material and color.
c. Second and Third Coat: Apply an enamel coating of the color required.
5. Anti-carbonation paints: Coat application made by brush onto correctly
prepared surfaces. The material shall be mixed and applied in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions
B. Ferrous Metal
1. Alkyd Paint: Compatible primer coat shall be required on shop-primer items.
Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness
not less than 75 microns.
a. Prime Coat: Red Lead Base Primer, or zinc chromate primer. Prime coat
is not required on items delivered shop primed.
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Interior Flat Latex Base Paint.
2. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film
thickness not less than 65 microns.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer
b. First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat
c. Second Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
3. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 65 microns.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer
b. First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat
c. Second Coat: Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel
4. Stove Enamel Paint: Paint is sprayed over primed surfaces and unit shall be
heated in special stove to obtain the required enamel according to Engineer
requirements.
5. Electrostatic Coating: Shall be a powder coating electrostatically applied with
electrostatic equipment to obtain, a uniform thickness, decorative, attractive
and durable coating.
a. The powder shall be a formulated polymer and curing agent.
b. Surface to be coated shall be clean either mechanically or chemically to
obtain a good adhesion of the coating film to the metallic surface.
c. Thickness of the coating shall not be less than 60 microns, the average
weight of the zinc layer shall be 550 g/m2 with a minimum of 500 g/m2.
Parcel 35 Specifications
6. Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating: steel or iron units shall be dipped in molten zinc to
obtain a zinc coating and zinc-iron alloy layers, according to BS No. 729.
7. Finish Appearance: Surfaces of articles shall be free from uncoated areas,
blisters, flux deposit and blackspots.
8. Surface shall be smooth, coating shall be reasonably uniform in thickness and
free from flux stains.
C. Piping and Fittings: The recommendations of the paint manufacturer shall be
followed closely in order to achieve the optimum properties.
Apply first layer of paint (primer coat) to surfaces that have been cleaned
pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried or where it feels firm, coat does not cause lifting or loss
of adhesion of the under layer.
Flange facings shall not be painted.
D. Wood Work: Clean and treat wood seasoned knots with knotting material or apply
one thin coat of white shellac.
1. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film
thickness not less than 100 microns.
a. Prime Coat: Pure linseed oil or alkyds with zinc chromate and zinc oxide.
b. First Coat: Interior flat - latex - base paint
c. Second Coat: Interior enamel undercoat
d. Third Coat: Odorless interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel
E. Alkyd Gloss Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film
thickness not less than 65 microns
1. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel
2. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel
F. Low-Luster (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer.
1. First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
2. Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
G. Woodwork and Hardboard
Stained Woodwork
1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open-
grain wood. Wipe filler before applying stain.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain, Semi Transparent, Penetrating
Wood Stain
b. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler
c. First Coat: Cut Shellac
d. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
e. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
2. Stained-Wax Polished Finish:4 finish coats over stain.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain, Semi Transparent, Penetrating
Parcel 35 239 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Wood Stain
b. First Coat: Cut Shellac
c. Second Coat: Paste Wax
d. Third Coat: Paste Wax
e. Fourth Coat: Paste Wax
3. Natural-Finish Woodwork.
Rubbed Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats over shellac plus filler on open-grain
wood.
a. First Coat: Cut Shellac
b. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler
c. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
d. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
4. Polished Wax Finish: 4 coats.
a. First Coat: Cut Shellac
b. Second Coat: Paste Wax
c. Third Coat: Paste Wax
d. Fourth Coat: Paste Wax
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
GENERAL
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory
required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance
to fading, and flame resistance and smoke development characteristics.
B. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition.
C. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of
carpet to be used for the work.
D. Manufacturer's standard color chart.
E. Certificate of compliance.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EPOXY RESIN FLOOR SCREED
A. Epoxy Resin Floor Screed: Shall be a three component solvent free mortar
consisting of an epoxy resin base, a modified polyamine hardener, and a
specially selected and graded silica aggregate of high crushing strength and
applied over two-part epoxy resin primer. Screed shall be trowel-applied at
thickness shown on drawings. Products complying with other equivalent
standards than mentioned herein shall be acceptable if meeting the
specifications requirements.
B Physical Properties:
1. Compressive Strength (BS 6319:Part 2 1985): 70 N/mm2.
2. Flexural Strength (BS 6319:Part 3 1985): 16N/mm2.
3. Bond to primed concrete (Elcometer pull off): Greater than tensile strength
of concrete.
4. Tensile Strength (BS 6319:Part 7 1985): 11 N/mm2.
5. Water Absorption (in house): 0.1 %.
3
6. Density: 2300 kg/m .
7. Color: As indicated
C Chemical Properties: Resistant of chemicals at 30 0 C, as follows:
1. Petrol
2. Sodiumchloride (saturated solution)
3. Sodium hydroxide. (50% solution)
4. Hydrochloric Acid
5. Motor oil.
2.2 COLORED EPOXY
A. Coating: Colored epoxy coating shall be a two component water dispersed
epoxy resin coating system complying with BS476, Part 7: 1987 – Class 1
spread of flame. Products complying with other equivalent standards meeting
the specifications requirements shall be acceptable. Coating shall be suitable
for application by brush or lambswool roller in 2 coats to total dry film thickness
of 100 micron unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Color of epoxy coating
shall be as shown drawings or approved by engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to epoxy screed and epoxy
coating manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide
clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,
efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminates incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written
instructions are more stringent.
2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3. Cleaned substrates shall be at least 14 days at 35 0 C before epoxy screed
shall be applied.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to
resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Epoxy Screed: Mix components, prepare materials and lay screed to primed
area according to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Use
epoxy resin primer approved by the epoxy screed manufacturer.
E. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks
from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing
surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of
resinous flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring
to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate.
C. Apply self-leveling slurry body coat(s) in thickness indicated.
Parcel 35 244 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the toilet partitions as vertical solid surface product types
1.3 DEFINITION
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
B. Shop drawings:
b. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures,
soap holders and other items installed in solid surface.
C. Samples:
D. Product data:
Parcel 35 Specifications
Performance requirements.
E. Maintenance data:
A. Qualifications:
1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to
those required for this project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator/installer qualifications:
D. Pre-installation conference:
A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.8 MAINTENANCE
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
2.2 MATERIALS
B. Fixations:
1. Bolts
2. Metal angles.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Shop assembly
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Smooth edges.
B. Thermoforming:
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 REPAIR
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design,
operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may
be used in the work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by
toiles locations of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
2. Identify products using designations indicated.
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Plate glass, one piece mirror shall be of quality grade No.1, not less than 6 mm
Parcel 35 251 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
Finish: Bright
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of four <4> keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using
fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at
heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust toilet and bath accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms
function smoothly.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing the protective coatings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Panel stainless steel signs.
2. Plexiglass signage.
3. Metal & Plexiglass signage.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in
permanent construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be
provided by others, and accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed
component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic
symbols.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a
sign schedule.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, registered in the
State of Florida, to design sign structure and anchorage of all sign type(s) to
withstand design loads as indicated on Drawings.
B. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from
ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform
faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Solid-Sheet Sign, Returns, and Back: Metal sheet with finish specified in
"Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows:
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign.
b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl film.
2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Square cut.
b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.
C. Plexiglass sign: Sheet as recommended producer type of use and finish indicated
Thick. 10mm if not otherwise indicated on drawings
D. Adhesives: Silicone adhesive as recommended by producers for permanent
Parcel 35 255 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage
of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to
requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply
markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather
to resist water penetration and retention.
3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide
welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring
exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and
dress exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.
6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to
attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed
fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and
perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of signage work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs
without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply
with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes
or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar
minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, material, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation Cubicles
partitions of HPL, high plastic laminated finish and solid phenolic core material
with floor mounting. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for completion of
work in this section as shown in the approved shop drawings and specified
herein. Door hardware for the cubicle doors shall be integral with the system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For type of cubicle specified. Include details of construction relative
to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and
fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of cubicles. Include plans,
elevations, section, details, and attachments to other works.
C. Samples of color and finish required, prepared on 150-mm square samples of
same thickness and material indicated for work.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written Warranty signed by Manufacturer and
Contractor agreement to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,
but are not limited to the following:
1. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
2. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Against delamination for 5 Years. The factory authorized
fabricator, product installer and phenolic manufacturer must sign the warranty and
submit a copy to the General Contractor. The project name must be on the
warranty.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Material – Doors, panels, pilasters and urinal screens shall be fabricated from
phenolic material comprised of multiple layers of melamine resin impregnated kraft
paper, and a decorative surface sheet on both faces. All layers shall be fused
together under high temperature and pressure.
B. All components shall be water‐resistant. Rough edges shall be machine sanded
with a 45 degree radius edge and black finish
C. Stile Shoes and Caps: Shall be 20 gage ASTM A-167, Type 304 stainless steel,
not, Number 4 Satin (brushed) finish.
D. Panel performance requirements:
1. Compressive strength: 24,000 psi minimum.
2. Weight: 93 lbs. per cubic foot maximum.
3. Flame spread (ASTM E-84): Class 1A (25).
4. Non-porous surface and edges.
5. Will not support micro-organic growth.
E. Hardware.
1. Hinges: Supply minimum two heavy duty cast stainless steel hinges Type 304
with Number 4 finish for Solid Surface.
2. Latch and Keeper: Type 304 stainless steel with Number 4 finish. Latching
device shall consist of a slide latch with combination stop and emergency
release feature.
3. Coat Hook: Type 304 stainless steel with Number 4 finish coat hook
4. Door Pull: Type 304 cast stainless steel with a Number 4 finish
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens and stiles fabricated for
compartment system. Furnish units with cut-outs and drilled holes to receive
compartment hardware as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 730mm wide in-swing
doors for ordinary toilet compartments and minimum 1100mm wide (clear
opening) out-swing doors for compartments that meet the requirements of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
F. Toilet Cubicles
1. Design: Moisture resistant solid phenolic core high plastic laminate finish
panels in conjunction with vertical and horizontal stainless steel profiles.
1. Front posts, doors & dividing panels and urinal screens:
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install units’
rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 5 mm between
pilasters and panels and not more than 5 mm between panels and walls. Secure
units in position with manufacturer’s recommended stainless steel anchoring
devices.
B. Floor Anchored Compartments: Set Pilaster units with anchors penetrating not
less than 50 mm into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s
written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten of pilasters when doors are in closed
position
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,
general Construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage
methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific
requirements.
1. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to
2. Permanent construction. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) panel constructed of
specified frame members and wire mesh. Show method of finishing members at
intersections.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh partitions indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
B. Welding certificates.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and
doors and with posts wrapped, palleted, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification, and include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
J. Hinge Doors: Constructed of the same materials as panels, with 1-1/4 inch
by 1/8 inch flat steel bar cover on sides. Complete with all necessary mounting
and locking hardware to install and operate.
1. Hinges: Three butt hinges
2. Floor Shoes: Metal, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical
framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling
adjustment.
2.4 FABRICATION
B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of wire mesh units unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.
1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter postinstalled
expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each
post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and
plumb installation.
B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner
panel framing and as follows:
C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter
"U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.
E. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run,
provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.
F. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb or Level: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in total partition height.
B. Maximum Misalignment from True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
A. Remove and replace defective work, including framing that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.7 SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
0.8 SUBMITTALS
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by
an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers to ensure fit and function.
0.10 WARRANTY
PART 13 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher
indicated.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 14 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 44 16- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers to ensure fit and function.
WARRANTY
PRODUCTS
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher indicated.
Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated ABC cartridge type, 6-kg nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard
enameled container.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated [10-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] nominal capacity, with carbon
dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
Automatic Dry-Chemical: UL-rated ABC type, 12-kg nominal capacity, with mono
ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General: Arm rising barriers shall be installed for the incoming and
outgoing vehicles.
3. Exit Verifier
4. Parking Computers.
7. Car Counter.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. During the construction of the system, the contractor shall put in writing
all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested
alternations from the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment
or devices which arise from coordination between the system and other
activities.
B. Provide a complete as built set of drawings for approval.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.06 WARRANTY
PART-2 PRODUCTS
B. The computer shall communicate with main host computer through RS-
485 or Rj45/Cat6 interface to allow receiving up-to-the minute transaction
information from the computer.
C. Detailed daily, monthly and yearly reports should be easily generated via
interface with a PC.
D. Specifications.
Parcel 35 Specifications
O
Temperature : 0 C to
O
40 C Relative Humidity : 10% to
90%
Clock system : Operated by a quartz oscillator and LS1
B. Proximity card readers should work in the range of min 15-20 cm with
reading verification and activation maximum time of 5 seconds
D. The proximity card used should be the same which used for access control
system
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Operation:
G. Two Channel Radio control with 433. 92 MHZ operating frequency powered
by a
12 V D.C battery.
B. Loop Detector should be coordinated with the parking entry and exit. Loop
detector slots should be 5mm wide to a depth of 35-50mm.
C. 3 turns of 1.5mm2 (Min.) cable should be inserted into slots width tall
being twisted and then fed back to the speed gate where connection is
made to the vehicle detection loop amplifier, and/or as per manufacturer
recommendations.
Parcel 35 Specifications
one (1) set of normally open and normally closed contacts Mounting
screws for surface mounting are to be provided inside the enclosure or, if
exposed, shall be tamper- proof requiring a special for removal.
A. The Contractor shall supply the spare parts not less than 5 percent(5%)
of the quantity of each components:
PART-3 EXECUTION
A. Connect the Parking control panel with a disconnect switch with lockable
handle or cover.
C. Cable Taps: use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet
boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are
made.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.03 GROUNDING
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits,
minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode
returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 4-ohm
maximum ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report
ground resistance.
A. Pretesting: after installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and
perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the
compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and
Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory
performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic
recording of acceptance test results.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and
measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit
resistance of each circuit on record drawings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
6. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved.
A. Cleaning: remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
3.07 TRAINING:
Parcel 35 Specifications
END OF SECTION 11 12 00
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Complete, Detailed, and Original Catalogue for the
manufacturer and marked up for all of the proposed equipment.
B. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number and quantity for all of the
proposed equipment.
C. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection
between all of the system components and the interface with all other system.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings indicating all of the proposed equipment, part numbers, cables,
raceways, Etc.
E. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement
with this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or
accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner different from that
described and specified a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
Parcel 34 Specifications 280 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly
manufactured and regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.
B. All systems and components will have been thoroughly tested and proven in
actual use.
C. All systems and components will be provided with an explicit manufacturer
warranty.
D. The speed gate is usually used in bank lobby, office building, fitness club,
school, it prevents unauthorized people to enter the restricted areas,
E. The speed gate barriers are designed to work in a normally closed mode and
retract inside the pedestal after a valid card has been presented to allow the
authorized user to pass. The fast moving close behind the authorized person
to deter tailgaters.
F. Architecture:
1. The System shall conform to the TCP/IP networking communications
protocol between the application server(s), client workstations, control
panels, and database subsystems, using 10/100Mb Ethernet connectivity
over LAN/WAN network typologies.
2. The System shall be flexible and scalable in architecture, permitting
expansion of both capacity and functionality, to be implemented
progressively as needed, through software licensing and/or software
upgrades.
3. The System shall provide the ability to perform network deployed software
updates. Network deployed updates shall have the option to be deployed
manually or automatically.
4. The System shall provide a real-time display of all system status and data at
all operator workstations.
Parcel 34
5. The shall monitor status and record activity transactions of all secured areas
and alarm input/output points; visually and audibly annunciate alarms upon
change of status, for assessment and response at all operator workstations.
6. The System shall monitor and record card access, alarm, and operator
activity to an online history/archive database for reporting.
7. Each equipment shall be able to continue access control and alarm-
monitoring operations autonomously, in the event of System hosting failure
or network segment outage through interface with access control & BMS
system.
8. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall manage and
automatically download in real-time, all database changes made at all
operator workstations, to the control panels that require notification of the
specific database changes or updates.
9. Also it shall be centralized by integrated with BMS, access, elevator and
barrier gate through one server.
G. Features
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
First Name.
Middle Name 1.
Middle Name 2.
Last Name.
Employee Number.
Personnel Type
Telephone.
A. CONTROLLER OPERATION:
1. Built in Access Control downloads all “local” access control parameters from
the Host PC to the access control panel, so that it may operate in a
Parcel 34
B. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
Parcel 34
B. PROXIMITY CARDS:
1. The proximity cards will be a PVC credit card size, with a punched slot for a
strap, clip, or for attachment to a key ring.
2. The presence of small metal objects such as keys or coins near the card will
not alter the code read by the reader or prevent the code form being read by
the reader.
3. The individual card will be coded from a population of at least 134 million
unique codes. Cards will be sequentially numbered. The user may specify
codes or numbers. Exact replacements for cards which may be lost,
damaged or stolen will be available upon request. Cards having the same
number will also be available upon request.
4. Cards may be used interchangeably and will be compatible with all readers
in the system, regardless of the reader’s physical size or style, and
without any code matching or memory devices in the reader.
5. The card manufacturer will guarantee the availability of additional quantities
of cards having the same facility code, for a period of at least eight years.
2.4 SOFTWARE
The system software will be compiled for faster execution speeds and will offer
all of the following features and capabilities:
Input/output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely
connected PC workstation, the system operator will have the capabilities
through the keyboard/mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or
status using a tabular or graphic format. A global database sort utility will allow
an expanded tabular display of only the points on the current graphic display.
This expanded tabular display will list point name, hardware address, dynamic
state or value, alarm status, override status, and test mode status.
A. Obtain a summary of all gates with status (under access control, access
control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to
the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above
states, or provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or
return to automatic control (remove manual state).
B. Add, delete, or change points within each panel/module or application routine
while on- line.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and
conditions under which the system is to be installed. The Contractor will notify
in writing if the conditions are found to be detrimental to proper completion of
the work, prior to installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor will install the system, including associated control devices as
indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves the intended function.
B. The contractor will coordinate with other works as necessary, to interface the
installation of the work with Architecture and other disciplines .
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values
for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirements are
not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure
enclosures are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware
and accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide equipment earthling connections for the access control system as
required.
F. Provide link between Fire alarm detection system, BMS, and Access control, in
case of fire, the related infection area with fire shall open access doors.
Parcel 34
Upon completion of installation and after circuitry and equipment have been
energized, the contractor will demonstrate capability and compliance of the
access control system with all specified requirements. Where required, the
contractor will correct malfunctioning units at site, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
retest.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to the training manuals, above, the security Contractor is required
to provide two copies, one paper and one electronic, of the
handover and commissioning documentation. This documentation will
include, but is not limited by, the following.
END OF SECTION 11 14 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 288 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
C. Refer to the Drawings and cut sheets for furniture layout and configurations.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include all associated
accessory. Include installation instructions.
1.
Clearly indicate (by red cloud line) furniture components that are larger
than those specified.
B. Samples: For all exposed components and fabrics.
Parcel 34
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in 36-inch length.
2. Broken components, hardware and accessories.
3. Laminate delimitation or separation from substrate.
4. Separation of anchors, screws, or panels from supporting components.
5. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
A. General: Provide the fabrics and finishes as indicated in the Office Furniture
Schedule at the end of this Section and as indicated in the Finish Schedule
on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Provide and install trash receptors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit a complete material list for written approval prior to
performing any work. The material list shall include the manufacturer, model
number and description of all materials and equipment to be used.
B. Samples: Submit color/material samples for items prior to ordering
materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and with
contract documents. Field verify with Owner's Representative.
Parcel 34
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provision of plastic planter pots
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard catalog cut sheets.
B. Samples: As required for color selection only.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom applications, showing critical sizes and dimensions
for installation and integration with other work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to planter liner fabrication, the contractor shall verify as-built dimensions of
planter receptacles ensure proper size, fit and quantity required. 6
B. Unless liners have drainage fittings as in 2.3.A, drainage holes to be located and
made by contractor in the field to fit to drainage system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install planters to allow for easy removal if necessary.
B. Provide continuous basal support.
PART - 4 GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
1. Piping and piping specialties.
2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
Parcel 34 Specifications 294 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
Parcel 34
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Include design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure,
drawn to scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of
extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted
items, and the following:
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
Parcel 34
2.4 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,
capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended
flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing
agent when container is removed from manifold.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or
low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to
control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical
interlock to cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting work performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Parcel 34
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Parcel 34 Specifications 302 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
3.6 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment,
and panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they
are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning
of the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
Parcel 34
3.8 CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner.
Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before
installing nozzles or discharge devices.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-
agent extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout
Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."
Parcel 34
END OF SECTION
SECTION 139670
PART - 5 GENERAL
3.12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
9. Piping and piping specialties.
10. Extinguishing-agent containers.
11. Extinguishing agent.
12. Detection and alarm devices.
13. Control and alarm panels.
14. Accessories.
15. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
16. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
3.13 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
Parcel 34
appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean
agent indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea (FM-200) within 10
seconds and maintain 7.1 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21
deg C) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
1. HFC 227ea (FM-200) concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0
percent immediately after discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout
holding time will not be accepted without written authorization from Owner
and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig (4278-kPa) calculated working
pressure and 360-psig (2484-kPa) initial charging pressure.
C. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound
alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing
agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.
D. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on
activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on
actuating second-detection device.
E. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning
and ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected
area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel,
energize audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to
protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge
for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent. On agent discharge,
release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe
lights inside and outside the protected area.
F. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when
activated.
G. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while
being activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge.
Release of hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the
time delay has expired.
H. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
I. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set
pressure.
J. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
K. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping and containers shall be
capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."].
3.16 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34 Specifications 306 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART - 4 PRODUCTS
4.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
Parcel 34
4.4 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,
capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended
flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing
agent when container is removed from manifold.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
4.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or
low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to
control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical
interlock to cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
Parcel 34
PART - 5 EXECUTION
5.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting work performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Parcel 34
5.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm
system. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 13
Section "Fire Alarm."
5.6 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment,
and panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they
are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning
of the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
Parcel 34
5.8 CLEANING
Parcel 34
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner.
Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before
installing nozzles or discharge devices.
5.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-
agent extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout
Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13968
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the
firefighting division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this
division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
Parcel 34
DESCRIPTION
Standards and codes that are generally applicable to the work of this section are
listed below:
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation
views of components and enclosures and details of control panels.
E. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling
and controls.
Parcel 34
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
J. Single-source Responsibility:
L. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all
system components, all detection equipment, agent storage cylinders, discharge
nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release, audible and visual alarm devices,
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other
operations necessary for a functional Fire Suppression System for use with
CO2.
Parcel 34 Specifications 317 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
M. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is
connected to the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen
along with the cylinder contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the
valve piston moves up, the valve opens and the extinguishing agent is
discharged through a separate piping network.
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate
the System:
N. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and
limitations for these systems.
A. General Requirements
B. CO2 Storage
3. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
Parcel 34
C. Valve
4. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves
when the system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of
unauthorized manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
5. All valves shall be tested against leakage prior to be validated for sales. The
maximum leak rate authorized shall be 5xl0-6 mbar. L/s.
a. Chemical Analysis
b. Tensile strength test results
c. Adjustment of regulator verification
d. External leak tightness test results
e. Internal leak tightness test results
f. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness,
Identification and marking control
7. The valve must present a digital measurement port, in order to get a signal
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring
and maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal
Parcel 34 Specifications 319 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
when the quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end
user.
D. Mounting Brackets
E. Burst Disc
2. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves
where they’re mounted on.
F. Pressure Gauge
1. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate
internal sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to
display the acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
2. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to
provide electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the
system requires digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to
an alar m device to provide an audible and visual supervisory condition
signal in the event the sensor tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3
bar) of working pressure.
1. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation
tubing.
2. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually
activated and without external power require.
Parcel 34
5. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here
the system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or
other electric signal.
2. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance
to UV and chemicals.
3. The week and year of production shall be marked on the sensor tubing.
I. DISCHARGE NOZZLE
1. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent
into the hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
Parcel 34
J. PIPING REQUIREMENT
1. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel
316L, according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a
minimum working pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of
the fittings must not be exceeded.
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge
valve by any one of the following:
Parcel 34
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the
contractor. Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The
contractor shall familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system
functions, and recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner
with a complete operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary
of any functional tests conducted.
The check-out procedures is intended to represent the minimum requirement for
the extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required
by the applicable governmental or regulatory authorities.
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the
hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall
system performance.
N. AREA CONFIGURATION
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the
system plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent
weight shall be recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied.
The area shall also be checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which
have been added or changed. If partitions have been added, installer shall
check to see that all areas within the compartment still receive adequate
agent distribution.
Parcel 34
O. CONTAINERS
1. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely
fastened.
3. Installer must verify that cylinders of correct weight and pressure are
installed in accordance with the design drawings.
P. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
a. Duration of training
3.3 - MAINTENANCE
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation
and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets", and are meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2
systems. These procedures do not preclude those required by the applicable
governmental or regulatory authority. More frequent service intervals may be
necessary if systems are installed in more severe service applications.
Parcel 34
3.4 - INSTALLATION
3.5 - WARRANTY
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one
(1) year from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to
be performed during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The
standard life time for the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating
condition and within the stated specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.3 SUMMARY
0.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous
and may be used interchangeably:
B. Electric Traction Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted by wire ropes
using electrically driven traction sheaves and are defined to include driving
machines; cars; hoistway doors; guide rails; guide-rail brackets; roping;
buffers; counterweights; signals; control systems; electrical wiring within
elevator system; and devices for operations, safety, security, required
performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator
installation and system , doors and car finishes , control and protection.
0.5 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
B. Shop Drawings: For each elevator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-
scale details indicating service at each landing, coordination with building
structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from
specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on
building structure at points of support, and locations of equipment and signals.
Include maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment;
75 mm square samples of sheet materials; and 100 mm lengths of running
trim members.
Parcel 34
a. Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone
2A.
0.7 WARRANTY
PART 15 - PRODUCTS
Capacity: 800 KG
Roping: 2:1
Parcel 34
Overhead: 4000 mm
Car Design (as per ID choice): Ceiling: Decorative with direct lighting,
LED panel
Car Wall: F Asturias Satin
Cabin front wall: F Asturias Satin
Mirror :
Glass mirror
FW/PH Full width/Partial height
Full Width mirror on side C
Handrail:
Handrail is on C and D walls
HR64-Tube D38 w/ rounded ends
Skirting:
F - Asturias Satin, brushed St.St.
Parcel 34 Specifications 329 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Door design
2L,Two-panel to left opening
F Asturias Satin
To prevent injury to people by the self-
closing doors, the cabin door is fitted with
a closing force limiter. This also reduces
the risk of damage to the door system or
objects in the door area.
Curtain of light, fix to sill (CF)
Car Door Sill Type – A Side:
N Sill without carpet profile
Car Door Sill Material:
A Extruded aluminum
Landing door
Narrow Frame
F - Asturias Satin
K, With labyrinth, without insulation
E-Expander Bolt
Landing Door Sill Type
N1 - Sill w/o carpet trim, in the well
Landing Door Sill Material
A - Extruded aluminum profile (standard
w/o surface treatment)
Operating and signal elements, stops
F Asturias Satin
LCD display
W - On Wall
ADDITIONAL FEATURES:
o ALARM BELL
o PRE-OPENING DOORS
Parcel 34
o CAR VENTILATION.
o 180 START/HOUR
Parcel 34
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required for
normal operation and routine maintenance of the systems. Supply is to
include, but is not limited to, the following:
PART 16 - EXECUTION
0.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, and
pits, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
0.2 INSTALLATION
Parcel 34
B. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time
and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established benchmarks,
lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. Coordinate
equipment installations with the building construction to prevent alteration to
structure and cutting of holes and chases after equipment installation has
started. Ensure provision of pit screen separators between adjacent elevators
and for screening off counterweight to a height of 2.5 m from bottom of pit for
safety of maintenance personnel.
F. Builder's Work: Carry out all builder's work necessarily required in connection
with installation of elevators, including but not limited to, forming or cutting
chases, rebates, etc., grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide
convenience power, lighting and other services required, from assigned
terminal points, to carry out construction work.
G. Elevator Shafts: Ensure that entrance shaft wall is in same vertical plane as face
of landing doors and that whole face is perfectly smooth.
H. Fixing Elevator Guide Rails: Keep rails in proper alignment using steel splice
plates of adequate strength. Verticality of rail is to be within 0.2% tolerance.
Space fixing brackets to minimize rail vibration during operation, and at not
more than 2 m centers.
Parcel 34
possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft.
Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.
D. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by
tests or damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for
tests.
0.4 DEMONSTRATION
0.5 PROTECTION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
K.IP fixed dome outdoor camera with IR motion detection shall be mounted on the
on wall of the building to monitor the entrance and exit.
L.All cameras shall be true IP camera.
M.All outdoor cameras shall be in IP-66 housing.
N.All outdoor items for cameras like JBs, power supply, etc. shall be in water poof
and dust proof housing.
O.Purchaser’s LAN network being laid by third party would be utilized to extend
the IP CCTV connectivity to central server.
P.Focal length shall be calculated by special supplier based on selected vendor
list.
Q.Storage capacity shall be calculated by special supplier based on selected
vendor list.
A. The system shall comply with the Egypt regulations and related CCITT
Recommendations.
B. The components and the installation shall comply with the applicable
IEC recommendations and with NEC-Article 800.
B. Recording:
Parcel 34
D. Permanent Recording:
Recording rate and image quality can be adjusted individually
F. Camera Check:
The integrated camera check shall be available to compare picture quality
H. Filter Function:
Recorded pictures of a camera can be filtered for time and date, event specific
data or for event types.
I. Motion Search:
The motion search function shall offer the possibility to search for movements
or activity on recorded pictures in a user definable area of the camera picture.
J. Zoom:
The digital zoom function shall allow zooming into recorded pictures to verify
details. A rectangle section within the picture to be magnified and defined will
then be adapted and displayed accordingly in the active video window.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCT
1. Transmit and Receive H.264 and MPEG-4 Video and bi-directional Audio.
2. Video and alarm management software under one single front end and
should be on open platform with support to renowned IP camera brands
(like Axis, Samsung, Pelco, DvTel, Honeywell, Panasonic, Sony etc.)
3. Support for multi user and multi user group environment in addition to user
hierarchy
Parcel 34 Specifications 338 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
B. The camera housings with IP66 are smartly styled enclosures that
enable you to use the Cameras in an outdoor environment or in areas
where the cameras need to be protected
C. Technical specifications
Parcel 34
– Scan: Progressive
– Color representation: complies with ITU-R BT.709
– Aspect ratio: 16:9
– Frame rate: 25 and 30 frames/s
– Sensor type 1/2.7-inch CMOS
– Sensitivity – (3200K, reflectivity 89%, F1.4, 30IRE)
• Color 0.25 lx
• Mono 0.05 lx
– Dynamic range 76 dB Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
– Signal-to-noise ratio > 50 dB
– Day/Night Color, Monochrome, Auto
– Shutter: Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES) Fixed shutter (1/25[30] to
1/15000), Selectable, Default shutter
– Noise reduction Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction with Separate
temporal and spatial adjustments
– Vari focal megapixel IR corrected lens. 1/1.8" sensor max; C-mount; 4-
pin DC-iris; MP; 12 to 50 mm; F1.6 to T360
– Lens mount CS mount (C-mount with adapter ring)
– Lens connector Standard 4-pin DC-iris connector
– Focus control Manual adjustment
– Iris control Automatic iris control
Parcel 34
• Frequency range: + 5%
5. Output
• Voltage: 220VAC/ 230VAC/ 240VAC
• Voltage Regulation: + 1%
6. Battery
• Battery type: SMF
• Communication interface
• Optional: SNMP
7. Display
• Standard: 2 line x 20 characters, Backlight LCD
Parcel 34 Specifications 342 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
• UPS status (Mains fail, Individual phase fail, Battery low DC high,
Overload with shut down time, Output low, Output high, over temperature,
UPS bypass)
8. General
• Operating temperature: 0 to 45 Deg C
• Audible alarm: Mains failure alarm/ Low battery alarm/ Overload and load
on by pass/ DC high/ Inverter fault
G.Monitors (LED)
A. Some of this monitor will be fixed in CCTV console & and other ones at wall
as shown in Drawings.
B. The flat panel 32” LED monitor shall have performance-enhancing features
such as Picture-in- picture, menu controls to adjust video features, and
automatic detection of a PAL or an NTSC signal.
C. The flat panel LED monitor shall provide a front panel that allows the user to
adjust image quality, brightness, size, position, and geometry for optimal
viewing.
H.CAT – 6 Cable:
1. 23 AWG Annealed bare solid copper, CAT-6 UTP Cable, Channel
optimized to 350 MHz
2. Meets EIA/TIA 568-B.2-1 Category 6 specifications, Passed UL 444 test
and meets CM and CMR ratings
3. Worst Case Cable Skew: 45 nsec/100 meters
4. Characteristic Impendence : 100(+/- 3 ) Ohms 500MHz , Tested till 700
Mhz
Parcel 34
I.Other equipment:
Incase equipment are mentioned in drawings without and specification. It shall
be provided by supplier for review and approved before supply stage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 34
B. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and
operation only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
Parcel 34
control panel.
E. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving
alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be
notified of the testing to prevent unnecessary response.
A. Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced as
mentioned in drawings and BOQ (if needed)
3.5 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on
the installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the
equipment. The training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 5
working days.
Parcel 34
PART 17 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 DEFINITIONS
0.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
Parcel 34
PART 18 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting
materials and joining methods.
Parcel 34
0.4 SLEEVES
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
0.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Parcel 34
0.6 GROUT
PART 19 - EXECUTION
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
Parcel 34
mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
Parcel 34
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to
support, and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
0.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
PART 20 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
Parcel 34
0.4 SUBMITTALS
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
A. Installer Qualifications:
Parcel 34
PART 21 - PRODUCTS
A. Above ground steel Pipe: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
Parcel 34
A. General Requirements:
B. Check Valves:
2. Standard: UL 312.
3. Standard: UL 262.
4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Standard: UL 262.
5. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
6. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Parcel 34
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting
pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
5. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
6. Material: Brass or bronze.
7. Size: NPS 1 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 25 or DN 65), as indicated.
8. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
9. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose
valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
threads.
10. Pattern: Angle or gate.
11. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
12. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 100 psig (690 kPa).
13. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose.
5. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
6. Material: Brass or bronze.
7. Size: NPS 1 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 25 or DN 65), as indicated.
8. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
9. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose
valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
threads.
10. Pattern: Angle or gate.
11. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Parcel 34
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and
tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
B. Standard: UL 393.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
0.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
Parcel 34
0.9 SLEEVES
Parcel 34
0.11 GROUT
PART 22 - EXECUTION
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
Parcel 34
E. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-
department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside
building.
H. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with
soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and
valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject
to freezing.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes,
tubes, and fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves
and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Parcel 34
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set-screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
I. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
Parcel 34
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Parcel 34
0.9 IDENTIFICATION
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
END OF SECTION
PART 23 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
0.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
0.3 DEFINITIONS
Parcel 34
0.6 SUBMITTALS
F. Welding certificates.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
A. Installer Qualifications:
Parcel 34
0.9 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
PART 24 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
A. General Requirements:
B. Check Valves:
Parcel 34
2. Standard: UL 312.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material: Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2. Standard: UL 262.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
A. General Requirements:
B. Ball Valves:
A. General Requirements:
Parcel 34
B. Alarm Valves:
2. Standard: UL 193.
3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gages, retarding chamber and fill-line attachment with strainer.
5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main
drain piping.
6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
2. Standard: UL 1726.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
6. End Connections: Threaded.
2. Standard: UL 213.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as
required to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
Parcel 34
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
4. Body Material: Brass.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
0.8 SPRINKLERS
B. General Requirements:
Parcel 34
1. Standard-Response Applications:
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
E. Special Coatings:
1. Wax.
2. Lead.
3. Corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Guards:
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:
2. Standard: UL 753.
3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
8. Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:
Parcel 34
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 220-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and
tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
D. Pressure Switches:
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
B. Standard: UL 393.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include “AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
Parcel 34
0.11 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
0.12 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent
to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless
otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
0.14 GROUT
PART 25 - EXECUTION
0.1 PREPARATION
B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow
preventers in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping".
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
Parcel 34
A. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water supply.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-
department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and
check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside
building.
Parcel 34
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes,
tubes, and fittings before assembly.
H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting.
Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
Parcel 34
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves
and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set-screw.
Parcel 34 Specifications 380 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
Parcel 34
cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor
level. Comply with requirements for flashing in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim".
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
0.10 IDENTIFICATION
Parcel 34
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run excess-pressure.
6. Coordinate with local fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
0.12 CLEANING
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with grooved ends; Victaulic fittings and
joints.
Parcel 34
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
O. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions,
apply to work of this section.
P. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the fire fighting
division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to
this section unless specified to the contrary.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
Standards and codes which are generally applicable to the work of this section are
listed below:
Parcel 34
1.4 Submittals
A. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features, components,
ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components
and enclosures and details of control panels.
B. Maintenance data for systems and products to include in "Operating and Maintenance
Manual" Include the following:
C. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
E. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at the site
for ready access.
F. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling and
controls.
G. Qualification data for Manufacturer and Contractor as specified in clause 1.5 of this
section. Data describe capabilities and experience.
A Manufacturer Qualifications
B Single-source Responsibility:
Parcel 34
Obtain system components from a single Manufacturer with responsibility for the entire
system.
1. The amount of CO2 agent in the system shall be at least sufficient for protection of
the largest single hazard within single area or groups of areas that are to be
protected simultaneously with the same gas battery.
2. CO2 agent shall be discharged into the room to be protected (hazard area),
including false ceilings and raised access floors and alike, through nozzles designed
for the intended purpose. The nozzles shall be sized and located to provide the
rates of discharge and coverage needed. The size of pipe and nozzles shall be
determined on the basis of calculated flow and terminal pressure. Flow and nozzle
data shall be in accordance with established test data.
3. The Drawings indicate the extent and the general arrangement. The location of
hangers and the final routing of the piping shall be subject to acceptance. Piping
and hangers 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller may be located in the field with general
installation Drawings and system diagrams. All piping shall be shop-fabricated and
installed according to the layout Drawings.
4. All materials, equipment, and appliances provided shall comply with NFPA 12
requirements and shall bear the listing mark of UL (Underwriters Laboratories) or
FM (Factory Mutual).
B Gas Cylinders:
1. The high pressure CO2 agent storage units shall be of seamless steel and consist of
45 kg pressure cylinders of 150 bar designed to meet the requirements of the ASME
boiler and pressure vessel. Storage units will have a pilot cylinder with slave
cylinder(s) and pilot function.
2. The storage units shall be super-pressurized with dry nitrogen in accordance with
NFPA 12.
Parcel 34
4. Each cylinder shall be fitted with a brass quick action valve. The pilot cylinder valve
shall be actuated electrically. The sequence cylinder(s) shall be actuated
pneumatically by the pilot line pressure.
C Cylinder Connectors:
1. Each cylinder valve shall be connected to the manifold with a synthetic rubber,
galvanized steel hose.
2. Connectors shall be the same nominal size as the cylinder discharge valve or larger
in order not to restrict flow. Each connector shall be fitted with a brass non return
valve to prevent the loss of Clean Agent if a cylinder is disconnected.
D Distribution Piping:
2. Schedule 40 pipes will permitted to be used for sizes 3/4-in. and smaller. Pipe
that is 1 in. through 4 in. shall be a minimum of Schedule 80.
3. Welded joints, screwed and flanged fittings (malleable iron or ductile iron)
shall be permitted to be used.
5. Class 300 malleable or ductile iron fittings shall be used through 2-in. internal
pipe size (IPS) and forged steel fittings in all larger sizes.
6. Flanged joints upstream of any stop valves shall be Class 600. Flanged joints
downstream of stop valves or in systems with no stop valves shall be permitted to
be Class 300.
E Discharge Nozzles:
3. The nozzle discharge pattern and size shall be designed for the area to be
protected. Size shall be determined by the geometry of the area to be protected and
based on flow calculations.
Parcel 34
F Automatic Controls:
1. Each system shall be provided with means for manual and automatic release
of CO2 agent. Automatic release shall be initiated by cross zoned electric heat and
ionization smoke detectors. A pressure alarm switch with non return valve, pressure
indicator and test connections shall be provided.
4. Battery back up shall consist of an automatic battery charger and dry cell
units, providing emergency power for the detection and activating the extinguishing
systems for a period of 24 hours.
5. Each system shall have cross wired detection circuits. A pre-alarm shall be
announced on the control panel display, when one (1) circuit is activated. The alarm
shall activate a visual and audible alarm to alarm personnel to leave or do not enter
the room. Two (2) circuits activated will release CO 2 agent and a fire alarm will be
announced on the control panel display.
G Accessories
Each system shall include an adjustable timing device to delay discharge after
initiation of the automatic actuation sequence. The timer shall not delay discharge
after a manual actuation.
4. Additional Contacts:
The alarm system of CO2 or any building control system should be able to perform
the following functions without delay:
Parcel 34
i. Provide flash light at each entrance of protected room, wired back to the
control panel.
iii. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation in the event of fire alarm.
iv. Leave room immediately.
v. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation activated. Do not enter the room.
Q. The pre-engineered extinguishing system is used for total flooding applications. Total
flooding protection is applicable to enclosed special hazards such as rooms or space
containing flammable liquid, electrical equipment, records, or other combustibles where
the agent may be used for extinguishment. The hazard area must have no outside air
flow present in order to successfully achieve the extinguishing concentration within the
enclosure.
R. The system shall provide a minimum agent design concentration, as defined by NFPA 12,
in all protected spaces. The system should be designed to discharge its contents in 60
seconds or less. Final concentration inside the room shall not exceed 5% for normally
occupied spaces. Concentration may vary depending on the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ} but may never be less than the one defined by NFPA 12.
S. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all system
components, all detection equipment, agent storage cylinders, discharge nozzles, pipe
and fittings, manual release, audible and visual alarm devices, caution/advisory signs,
functional checkout and testing, training and all other operations necessary for a
functional Fire Suppression System for use with CO2.
T. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is connected to
the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen along with the cylinder
contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the valve piston moves up, the
valve opens and the extinguishing agent is discharged through a separate piping
network.
Parcel 34
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate the
System:
U. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and limitations for
these systems.
V. General Requirements
4. The extinguishing system unit shall be designed to operate between -4°F (-20°C)
and 130°F (55°C).
W. CO2 Storage
8. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to reduce
the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
9. The pre-engineered fire suppression system shall suitable for applications where
the cylinder ambient storage temperature is between -4°F (-20°C) and l30°F
(55°C).
10. A complete traceability system shall be set up and the following documents
shall be accessible for all cylinder batch series:
Parcel 34
X. Valve
8. The valve shall be made of brass, equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor the
system pressure, with a ball valve interfacing the tubing and the cylinder, and with
a burst disc for protection against over pressure.
9. Each discharge an d filling port shall be fitted with hexagonal safety nuts for
safety purposes during transportation and intended to prevent uncontrolled
discharge of a cylinder in the event of accidental system activation.
10. All valves shall be delivered with a safety clip preventing from
unauthorized manipulation of the ball valve when sea led.
11. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves when the
system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of unauthorized
manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
12. All valves shall be tested against leakage prior to be validated for sales. The
maximum leak rate authorized shall be 5xl0-6 mbar. L/s.
13. A complete traceability system shall be set up and an inspect ion certificate 3.1
according to EN 10204:2004 shall be available on demand for all valve bodies and
give the following information:
g. Chemical Analysis
h. Tensile strength test results
i. Adjustment of regulator verification
j. External leak tightness test results
k. Internal leak tightness test results
l. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness, Identification
and marking control
14. The valve must present a digital measurement port, in order to get a signal
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring and
maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal when the
quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end user.
Y. Mounting Brackets
3. The cylinder wall mounting brackets shall be in powder-coated steel and must be
used to mount the cylinder in vertical position.
Z. Burst Disc
4. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves where
they’re mounted on.
Parcel 34
4. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate internal
sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to display the
acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
5. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to provide
electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the system requires
digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to an alar m device to
provide an audible and visual supervisory condition signal in the event the sensor
tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3 bar) of working pressure.
6. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation tubing.
7. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually activated
and without external power require.
8. EOL Manual Actuator shall use piston technology. No diaphragm technology (or
Technologies requiring replacement of components after actuation) shall be used.
9. EOL Manual Actuator shall be provided with a sea l or other device to minimize the
potential for accidental discharge.
10. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here the
system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or other
electric signal.
8. Linear Thermal Detector and Actuation Tubing shall be designed to meet the
following Requirement:
9. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance to UV
and chemicals.
10. The week and year of production shall be marked on the sensor tubing.
12. The compatibility between most widespread chemicals and sensor tubing shall
have been tested and results shall be accessible to end-users.
Parcel 34
13. All devices and equipment shall be tested and validated by UL and FM during the
certification process of complete systems. The following tests shall have been
processed and validated:
14. The Linear Thermal Detector shall be validated and considered as a mean of
detection by UL.
2. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent into the
hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
6. The discharge line shall be connected to the ground to avoid the accumulation of
static electricity during discharge.
2. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel 316L,
according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a minimum working
pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of the fittings must not be
exceeded.
i. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Parcel 34
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge valve by
any one of the following:
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be manually activated by installing the
manual release device at the end of the linear sensor tubing. The manual release
device shall depressurize the linear sensor tube and open the valve to activate the CO2
discharge through the discharge nozzle installed within the protected! Area . Pressure
switch is activated and opens (or closes) electric contacts to switch on/switch off electric
devices.
The system automatically operates when the thermal temperature sensitive tubing
installed as linear detection capability bursts because of heating. Heat or direct flame
impingement during a fire situation will cause the tubing to rupture. The tubing ruptures
at the hottest point along its entire length, and then the CO2 is discharged through the
piping network and nozzles to extinguish fire. Pressure switch is activated and opens
(or closes) electric contacts to switch on/switch off electric devices.
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the contractor.
Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The contractor shall
familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system functions, and
recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner with a complete
operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary of any functional tests
conducted.
The check-out procedures is intended to represent the minimum requirement for the
extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required by the
applicable governmental or regulatory authorities.
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the hazard
may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall system
performance.
Parcel 34 Specifications 394 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the system
plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent weight shall be
recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied. The area shall also be
checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which have been added or changed. If
partitions have been added, installer shall check to see that all areas within the
compartment still receive adequate agent distribution.
LL. CONTAINERS
4. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely fastened.
5. Installer must check inside pressure of all containers. It can be measured directly
through the digital measurement port of the valve.
6. Installer must verify that cylinders of correct weight and pressure are
installed in accordance with the design drawings.
MM.AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owner's personnel. Each training session shall include manual and
(optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary
functions and emergency procedures.
d. Duration of training
iv. MAINTENANCE
Parcel 34
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation and
Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical Cabinets", and are
meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2 systems. These procedures do
not preclude those required by the applicable governmental or regulatory authority.
More frequent service intervals may be necessary if systems are installed in more
severe service applications.
A regular maintenance program must be established for the continuous operation of all
fire suppression systems. A periodic maintenance program shall be established and
followed. A maintenance log must be maintained for ready reference. The log must
include the following accumulated data:
Any time rust or corrosion is found on a fire suppression cylinder it should be taken out
of service and replaced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
After the system has been installed, adjusted and placed in proper operating condition,
it shall be field inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 12, to meet the approval
of the Government Representative or authorized Fire Service Officer.
Parcel 34
i. WARRANTY
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one (1) year
from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to be performed
during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The standard life time for
the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating condition and within the stated
specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 00
PART 26 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
Parcel 34
0.2 DEFINITIONS
0.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
PART 27 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting
materials and joining methods.
Parcel 34
C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each
sealing element.
Parcel 34
0.5 SLEEVES
0.6 ESCUTCHEONS
0.7 GROUT
Parcel 34
PART 28 - EXECUTION
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
Parcel 34
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
D. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
Parcel 34
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to
connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
Parcel 34
0.7 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 19
PART 29 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
Parcel 34 Specifications 404 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
3. Dial-type pressure gages.
4. Gage attachments.
0.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product certificates.
PART 30 - PRODUCTS
C. Standard: ASME B40.200.
D. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm)
nominal diameter.
F. Connector Type(s): Union joint, [adjustable angle] [rigid, back] [and] [rigid,
bottom] , with unified-inch screw threads.
G. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
H. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.
Parcel 34
3. Standard: ASME B40.200.
4. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
7. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings graduated in deg F and deg C.
8. Window: Glass or plastic .
9. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to
a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to
a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
Parcel 34
3. Standard: ASME B40.100.
4. Case: Sealed type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch (114-
mm)nominal diameter.
5. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
7. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to
pointer.
8. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in psi and kPa.
9. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
10. Window: Glass or plastic.
11. Ring: Stainless steel.
12. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
PART 31 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
C. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
Parcel 34
G. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F and 0 to 150
deg C.
Parcel 34 Specifications 408 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F and minus
20 to plus 70 deg C.
A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.
B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi and 0 to 1400 kPa.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 23
PART 32 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
0.2 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
PART 33 - PRODUCTS
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as
required for system pressures and temperatures.
D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the
following features:
E. Valve-End Connections:
Parcel 34
PART 34 - EXECUTION
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where
necessary.
Parcel 34
1. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal
position with hinge pin level.
0.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and
put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if
persistent leaking occurs.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze
or nonmetallic disc.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check
valves with lever and weight or with spring.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm
Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the
same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except
where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends
except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules
below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends
except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules
below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
Parcel 34
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead
of threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronzedisc.
3. Ball Valves: One or Two piece, full, regular or reduced port, brass or
bronze with brass or bronze trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS or RS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronzedisc.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 05 29
PART 35 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
B. See Division 5 for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers
for pipe and equipment supports.
0.2 DEFINITIONS
0.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
C. Welding certificates.
PART 36 - PRODUCTS
0.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
Parcel 34
PART 37 - EXECUTION
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that
are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and
equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
Parcel 34
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required
for riser clamps.
Parcel 34
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and
contraction of piping system from base support.
Parcel 34
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as
specified above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead
loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected
equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes
and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services
piping) are not exceeded.
Parcel 34
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth
bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers
and equipment supports.
Parcel 34
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
0.5 ADJUSTING
0.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.05 mm).
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 16
PART 38 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Section:
0.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Comply with DIN standards for plastic, potable domestic water piping and
components.
PART 39 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
0.6 ESCUTCHEONS
Parcel 34
0.7 SLEEVES
0.9 GROUT
Parcel 34
PART 40 - EXECUTION
0.1 EARTHWORK
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test
tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the
same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless
otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
N. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing
pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for
pressure gages.
P. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 for thermometers.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes,
tubes, and fittings before assembly.
C. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving
plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each
water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate
valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for
piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points
in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are
specified in Division 22.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis
hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller
hangers.
D. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP-R piping with the following maximum
horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-
inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
E. Install supports for vertical PP-R piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69
and manufacturer's written instructions.
0.9 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 34
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep
pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split
plate, stamped steel with set screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 for joint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 for joint sealants.
Parcel 34
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical
Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Stack sleeve fittings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.
5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and
Parcel 34
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
0.13 IDENTIFICATION
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been
inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day
before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in
presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass
tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for
reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are
not air bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping
uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
Parcel 34
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
0.15 CLEANING
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in
either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does
not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as
work progresses.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are
not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Parcel 34
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 19
PART 41 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
1. Strainers.
2. Hose bibbs.
0.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 42 - PRODUCTS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers :
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
Parcel 34
A. Hose Bibbs :
PART 43 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and
pump.
C. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap,
or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
Parcel 34
0.3 ADJUSTING
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified.
Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and
rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
Parcel 34
A. Manufacturers:
As mentioned in approved vendor list.
a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with wear rings and threaded
companion-flange connections for pumps with DN 50 pipe
connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS DN 65 pipe
connections. Include pump manufacturer's base attachment for
mounting pump on concrete base.
b. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
c. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel or steel shaft, with copper-
alloy shaft sleeve.
d. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel
spring, ceramic seat, and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water
slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
e. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
A. Manufacturers:
B. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid.
Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing.
Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching
pump connections.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
H. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping
equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping."
Parcel 34
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 13 16
PART 44 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and
vent piping inside the building:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa) .
0.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 45 - PRODUCTS
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Parcel 34
PART 46 - EXECUTION
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
shall be of the following:
D. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall
be of the following:
E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
shall be of the following:
F. Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be of
the following:
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each
service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals are specified in Division 22.
E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping
using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and
short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of
flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend
fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain
Parcel 34 Specifications 442 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size
of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system.
Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to
manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum
slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
H. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to DIN
standards.
I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. PVC Non pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to DIN standards.
1. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve,
on each sewage pump discharge.
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22. Install the following:
Parcel 34
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis
hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller
hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring
cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-
inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-
inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
0.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping via
inspection chambers and gully traps.
Parcel 34
B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass
test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
0.8 CLEANING
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work
stops.
0.9 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two
coats of water-based latex paint.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 13 19
PART 47 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Area Drain
4. Garage Drain
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6. Trench drain.
7. Gully trap
8. Slow down chamber
9. Oil interceptor
0.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
PART 48 - PRODUCTS
0.1 CLEANOUTS
Parcel 34
0.3 Area Drain 400*400mm hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate, black color matte
finish with a decorative natural shape for the openings:
0.4 Garage Drain 400*400mm hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate.
C. Vent Caps :
A. Trench Drains 300mm width hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate as a
drainage grill cover, black color matte finish with a decorative natural shape for
the openings:
Parcel 34
A. Plastic gully trap with opening in top recessed to accommodate light duty
cover and frame.
A. Oil Interceptors
Parcel 34
PART 49 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with
top flush with finished floor.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates
of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that
extend through roof.
H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches (51 mm)
above floor.
J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require
trap-seal primer connection.
M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
Q. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates
of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
0.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other
drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-
inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft.
(20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
Parcel 34
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at
least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or
commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7.
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe,
or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
0.5 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 13 29
Parcel 34
PART 50 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for
sanitary drainage piping systems in buildings:
0.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include
certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated
capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
PART 51 - PRODUCTS
0.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
Parcel 34
2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion
flange for piping connection.
Parcel 34
C. Pit Cover: Cast iron or coated steel and suitable to support controls. See
Part 2 "Sewage Pump Pits" Article for other requirements.
A. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and
separate cover.
2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for
access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent
connections, and power cables.
Parcel 34
PART 52 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
F. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping.
Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and
fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set
pit curb frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb
flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
Parcel 34
2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump.
Install unions on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves
same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 22 for general-duty valves
for sanitary waste piping.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 14 13
PART 53 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the
building.
0.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 54 - PRODUCTS
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Parcel 34 Specifications 457 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 55 - EXECUTION
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each
service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals are specified in Division 22.
F. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system.
Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to
manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
Parcel 34
J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22. Install the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis
hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller
hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring
cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch
(10-mm) minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
Parcel 34
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-
inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-
inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
0.5 CONNECTIONS
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass
test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
0.7 CLEANING
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work
stops.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 14 23
PART 56 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
1. Cleanouts.
2. Roof drains.
3. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
0.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 57 - PRODUCTS
0.1 CLEANOUTS
Parcel 34
PART 58 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with
top flush with finished floor.
E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
G. Install cast-iron soil pipe downspout boots at grade with top of hub 6 inches
(152 mm) above grade.
Parcel 34
0.2 CONNECTIONS
0.3 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 33 00
PART 59 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include
rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
D. Warranty.
0.4 WARRANTY
Parcel 34
PART 60 - PRODUCTS
0.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
Parcel 34
setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
i. Gages: Combination temperature and pressure type or separate
thermometer and pressure gage.
Parcel 34
PART 61 - EXECUTION
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are
accessible.
Parcel 34
D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap
into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points
in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater
storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
0.2 CONNECTIONS
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm
proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections
and retest as specified above.
0.4 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 34
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 33 00
PART 62 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include
rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
D. Warranty.
0.4 WARRANTY
Parcel 34
PART 63 - PRODUCTS
0.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 64 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are
accessible.
D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap
into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points
in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater
storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
0.2 CONNECTIONS
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm
proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Parcel 34 Specifications 474 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections
and retest as specified above.
0.4 DEMONSTRATION
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 65 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 DEFINITIONS
0.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
A. Lavatory Faucets, :
A. Shower Faucets, :
A. Sink Faucets, :
A. Toilet Seats, :
Parcel 34
A. Water Closets, :
0.7 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories, :
A. Kitchen Sinks, :
A. Service Sinks, :
Parcel 34
PART 67 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste
piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for
accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach
to supports.
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be
directly connected to sanitary drainage system.
J. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle
mounted on wide side of compartment.
L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include
adapters if required.
Parcel 34
N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in
faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns.
Include adapters if required.
U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using
sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to
fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7.
0.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for
locations where installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and
other specified components.
Parcel 34
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper
operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest.
Repeat procedure until units operate properly.
0.4 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 21 05 00
PART 68 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
0.2 DEFINITIONS
0.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34 Specifications 484 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
A. Welding certificates.
PART 69 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting
materials and joining methods.
Parcel 34
0.4 SLEEVES
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
0.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Parcel 34
0.6 GROUT
PART 70 - EXECUTION
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
Parcel 34
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
Parcel 34
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to
support, and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
0.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
PART 71 - GENERAL
0.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
Parcel 34
0.4 SUBMITTALS
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
A. Installer Qualifications:
Parcel 34
PART 72 - PRODUCTS
A. Above ground steel Pipe: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40.
Parcel 34
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
A. General Requirements:
B. Check Valves:
2. Standard: UL 312.
3. Standard: UL 262.
4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
3. Standard: UL 312.
Parcel 34 Specifications 494 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
4. Standard: UL 262.
5. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
6. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting
pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
5. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
6. Material: Brass or bronze.
7. Size: NPS 1 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 25 or DN 65), as indicated.
8. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
9. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose
valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
threads.
10. Pattern: Angle or gate.
11. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
12. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 100 psig (690 kPa).
13. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
3. Standard: UL 312.
4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose.
5. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum.
6. Material: Brass or bronze.
Parcel 34 Specifications 495 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
B. Water-Flow Indicators:
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and
tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
B. Standard: UL 393.
Parcel 34
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
0.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
0.9 SLEEVES
Parcel 34
0.11 GROUT
PART 73 - EXECUTION
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
Parcel 34 Specifications 498 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
F. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-
department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside
building.
I. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with
soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and
valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject
to freezing.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes,
tubes, and fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves
and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Parcel 34
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set-screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
Parcel 34 Specifications 501 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
I. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
Parcel 34
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
0.9 IDENTIFICATION
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
SECTION 211313
PART 74 - GENERAL
0.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
0.3 DEFINITIONS
Parcel 34
0.6 SUBMITTALS
F. Welding certificates.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
A. Installer Qualifications:
Parcel 34
0.9 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
Parcel 34
PART 75 - PRODUCTS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
Parcel 34
A. General Requirements:
B. Check Valves:
2. Standard: UL 312.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum
4. Type: Swing check.
5. Body Material: Cast iron.
6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2. Standard: UL 262.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
A. General Requirements:
B. Ball Valves:
Parcel 34
A. General Requirements:
B. Alarm Valves:
2. Standard: UL 193.
3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gages, retarding chamber and fill-line attachment with strainer.
5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main
drain piping.
6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
2. Standard: UL 1726.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
6. End Connections: Threaded.
Parcel 34
2. Standard: UL 213.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as
required to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
4. Body Material: Brass.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
Parcel 34
0.8 SPRINKLERS
B. General Requirements:
1. Standard-Response Applications:
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
E. Special Coatings:
1. Wax.
2. Lead.
3. Corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Guards:
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:
Parcel 34
2. Standard: UL 753.
3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
8. Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 220-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and
tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
6. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa).
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
D. Pressure Switches:
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
2. Standard: UL 346.
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
Parcel 34
B. Standard: UL 393.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include “AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
0.11 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
0.12 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent
to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless
otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
0.14 GROUT
PART 76 - EXECUTION
0.1 PREPARATION
Parcel 34
B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow
preventers in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping".
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
A. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water-distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water supply.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Parcel 34
I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-
department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and
check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside
building.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes,
tubes, and fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting.
Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves
and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Specialty Valves:
Parcel 34
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in
main supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attachment, and fill-line attachment.
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set-screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Parcel 34
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise
indicated.
Parcel 34
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and
size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
0.10 IDENTIFICATION
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run excess-pressure.
6. Coordinate with local fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
0.12 CLEANING
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
Parcel 34
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with grooved ends; Victaulic fittings and
joints.
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
OO. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the fire
fighting division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this
division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
Standards and codes which are generally applicable to the work of this section
are listed below:
1.4 Submittals
K. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation
views of components and enclosures and details of control panels.
Parcel 34
P. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling
and controls.
A Manufacturer Qualifications
B Single-source Responsibility:
Obtain system components from a single Manufacturer with responsibility for the
entire system.
Parcel 34
6. The amount of CO2 agent in the system shall be at least sufficient for
protection of the largest single hazard within single area or groups of areas
that are to be protected simultaneously with the same gas battery.
7. CO2 agent shall be discharged into the room to be protected (hazard area),
including false ceilings and raised access floors and alike, through nozzles
designed for the intended purpose. The nozzles shall be sized and located to
provide the rates of discharge and coverage needed. The size of pipe and
nozzles shall be determined on the basis of calculated flow and terminal
pressure. Flow and nozzle data shall be in accordance with established test
data.
8. The Drawings indicate the extent and the general arrangement. The location
of hangers and the final routing of the piping shall be subject to acceptance.
Piping and hangers 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller may be located in the field
with general installation Drawings and system diagrams. All piping shall be
shop-fabricated and installed according to the layout Drawings.
9. All materials, equipment, and appliances provided shall comply with NFPA
12 requirements and shall bear the listing mark of UL (Underwriters
Laboratories) or FM (Factory Mutual).
B Gas Cylinders:
5. The high pressure CO2 agent storage units shall be of seamless steel and
consist of 45 kg pressure cylinders of 150 bar designed to meet the
requirements of the ASME boiler and pressure vessel. Storage units will
have a pilot cylinder with slave cylinder(s) and pilot function.
8. Each cylinder shall be fitted with a brass quick action valve. The pilot cylinder
valve shall be actuated electrically. The sequence cylinder(s) shall be
actuated pneumatically by the pilot line pressure.
Parcel 34
C Cylinder Connectors:
7. Connectors shall be the same nominal size as the cylinder discharge valve
or larger in order not to restrict flow. Each connector shall be fitted with a
brass non return valve to prevent the loss of Clean Agent if a cylinder is
disconnected.
D Distribution Piping:
11. Class 300 malleable or ductile iron fittings shall be used through 2-in.
internal pipe size (IPS) and forged steel fittings in all larger sizes.
12. Flanged joints upstream of any stop valves shall be Class 600. Flanged
joints downstream of stop valves or in systems with no stop valves shall be
permitted to be Class 300.
E Discharge Nozzles:
6. The nozzle discharge pattern and size shall be designed for the area to
be protected. Size shall be determined by the geometry of the area to be
protected and based on flow calculations.
F Automatic Controls:
Parcel 34
6. Each system shall be provided with means for manual and automatic
release of CO2 agent. Automatic release shall be initiated by cross zoned
electric heat and ionization smoke detectors. A pressure alarm switch with
non return valve, pressure indicator and test connections shall be provided.
10. Each system shall have cross wired detection circuits. A pre-alarm shall
be announced on the control panel display, when one (1) circuit is activated.
The alarm shall activate a visual and audible alarm to alarm personnel to
leave or do not enter the room. Two (2) circuits activated will release CO 2
agent and a fire alarm will be announced on the control panel display.
G Accessories
9. Additional Contacts:
The alarm system of CO2 or any building control system should be able to
perform the following functions without delay:
Parcel 34
vi. Provide flash light at each entrance of protected room, wired back to
the control panel.
viii. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation in the event of fire alarm.
ix. Leave room immediately.
x. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation activated. Do not enter the
room.
PP. The pre-engineered extinguishing system is used for total flooding applications.
Total flooding protection is applicable to enclosed special hazards such as
rooms or space containing flammable liquid, electrical equipment, records, or
other combustibles where the agent may be used for extinguishment. The
hazard area must have no outside air flow present in order to successfully
achieve the extinguishing concentration within the enclosure.
QQ. The system shall provide a minimum agent design concentration, as defined by
NFPA 12, in all protected spaces. The system should be designed to discharge
its contents in 60 seconds or less. Final concentration inside the room shall not
exceed 5% for normally occupied spaces. Concentration may vary depending on
the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ} but may never be less than the one
defined by NFPA 12.
RR. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all
system components, all detection equipment, agent storage cylinders, discharge
nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release, audible and visual alarm devices,
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other
operations necessary for a functional Fire Suppression System for use with
CO2.
Parcel 34
SS. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is
connected to the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen
along with the cylinder contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the
valve piston moves up, the valve opens and the extinguishing agent is
discharged through a separate piping network.
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate
the System:
TT. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and
limitations for these systems.
13. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
Parcel 34
14. The pre-engineered fire suppression system shall suitable for applications
where the cylinder ambient storage temperature is between -4°F (-20°C)
and l30°F (55°C).
WW. Valve
15. The valve shall be made of brass, equipped with a pressure gauge to
monitor the system pressure, with a ball valve interfacing the tubing and the
cylinder, and with a burst disc for protection against over pressure.
16. Each discharge an d filling port shall be fitted with hexagonal safety
nuts for safety purposes during transportation and intended to
prevent uncontrolled discharge of a cylinder in the event of accidental
system activation.
17. All valves shall be delivered with a safety clip preventing from
unauthorized manipulation of the ball valve when sea led.
18. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves
when the system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of
unauthorized manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
19. All valves shall be tested against leakage prior to be validated for sales. The
maximum leak rate authorized shall be 5xl0-6 mbar. L/s.
20. A complete traceability system shall be set up and an inspect ion certificate
3.1 according to EN 10204:2004 shall be available on demand for all valve
bodies and give the following information:
m. Chemical Analysis
n. Tensile strength test results
o. Adjustment of regulator verification
p. External leak tightness test results
q. Internal leak tightness test results
r. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness,
Identification and marking control
21. The valve must present a digital measurement port, in order to get a signal
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring
and maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal
Parcel 34 Specifications 529 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
when the quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end
user.
6. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves
where they’re mounted on.
7. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate
internal sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to
display the acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
8. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to
provide electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the
system requires digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to
an alar m device to provide an audible and visual supervisory condition
signal in the event the sensor tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3
bar) of working pressure.
11. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation
tubing.
12. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually
activated and without external power require.
14. EOL Manual Actuator shall be provided with a sea l or other device to
minimize the potential for accidental discharge.
Parcel 34
15. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here
the system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or
other electric signal.
15. Linear Thermal Detector and Actuation Tubing shall be designed to meet
the following Requirement:
16. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance
to UV and chemicals.
17. The week and year of production shall be marked on the sensor tubing.
19. The compatibility between most widespread chemicals and sensor tubing
shall have been tested and results shall be accessible to end-users.
20. All devices and equipment shall be tested and validated by UL and FM
during the certification process of complete systems. The following tests
shall have been processed and validated:
21. The Linear Thermal Detector shall be validated and considered as a mean
of detection by UL.
3. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent
into the hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
Parcel 34
3. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel
316L, according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a
minimum working pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of
the fittings must not be exceeded.
i. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge
valve by any one of the following:
Parcel 34
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the
contractor. Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The
contractor shall familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system
functions, and recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner
with a complete operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary
of any functional tests conducted.
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the
hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall
system performance.
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the
system plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent
weight shall be recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied.
The area shall also be checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which
have been added or changed. If partitions have been added, installer shall
check to see that all areas within the compartment still receive adequate
agent distribution.
KKK. CONTAINERS
Parcel 34
7. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely
fastened.
9. Installer must verify that cylinders of correct weight and pressure are
installed in accordance with the design drawings.
g. Duration of training
iv. MAINTENANCE
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation
and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets", and are meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2
systems. These procedures do not preclude those required by the applicable
governmental or regulatory authority. More frequent service intervals may be
necessary if systems are installed in more severe service applications.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
After the system has been installed, adjusted and placed in proper operating
condition, it shall be field inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 12, to
meet the approval of the Government Representative or authorized Fire Service
Officer.
i. WARRANTY
Parcel 34
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one
(1) year from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to
be performed during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The
standard life time for the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating
condition and within the stated specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 52 00
FOUNTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
2. Filters
3. Pumps
7. Sundries
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
A Product data for each fountain filter, pumps, nozzles, drains, and special duty
valves. Include rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialities and
accessories, and installation instructions.
C. Maintenance data for fountain filters, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specialities
and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual
specified in the General Requirements and Division-22 Section "Basic
Mechanical Requirements".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTUREERS
Parcel 34
2.3 PIPES
2.4 PUMPS
A. Type: submirsable circulation pump package designed for specified flow rate and
operating pressure and hydrostatically tested at factory to specified test pressure.
A. Generally: fountain fittings to be heavy cast bronze, heavily chrome plated with
polished finish to withstand corrosion and action of chlorine.
B. Inlet Fittings: round ajustable louvre type with outer face fixable in any position for
regulating flow of water into fountain.
F. Main Drains: square grate and frame to cover sumps. Grate is to fit frame closely
and be flush at surface.
2.6 SUNDRIES
Parcel 34
pressure of 200 kPa and with quick opening cover lid, positively sealing O-ring,
yoke type cover clamp with threaded tightening bolt and 40 mm IPS drain plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install fountain fittings and piping embedded under fountain and in concrete walls
of fountain and plant room during concreting.
C. Lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support
and anchor during concreting.
D. Coat And Plug fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.
E. Earth Metal Fittings by connecting to fountain reinforcing steel with copper wire
welded to fitting and reinforcement.
F. No-Leak Flanges: provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and
vacuum fittings within concrete fountain wall.
Parcel 34
G. Pipe Connections through plant room walls to have no- leak flanges fitted
centrally in wall.
3.3 EQUIPMENT
3.5 TESTS
END OF SECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.8 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.9 GROUTING
Parcel 34 Specifications 541 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methodsto
complement other Division 22 and Division 23 Sections.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 22 and Division 23
piping system Sections.
Parcel 34
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood
supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
Parcel 34
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-
stem movement.
Parcel 34
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and
viewing angles of identification devices.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade.
Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging
and bending.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure
during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Calpico, Inc.
c. Or approved equal
2. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
c. Or approved equal
3. Dielectric Nipples:
Parcel 34
b. Perfection Corp.
d. Or approved equal
4. Flexible Connectors:
f. Metraflex Co.
i. Or approved equal
a. Calpico, Inc.
c. Thunder line/Link-Seal.
d. Or approved equal
6. Transition Fittings
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
Parcel 34 Specifications 547 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
g. Or approved equal
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
e. Or approved equal
A. Refer to individual Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for pipe and
fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated;
and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent
maximum lead content.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
Parcel 34
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber
gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035-
or 2070-kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
107 deg C.
Parcel 34
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will
provide flexible pipe connections. Include 860-kPa minimum working-pressure
rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the
following:
3. Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain
ends.
Parcel 34 Specifications 551 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
5. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-
plated finish.
6. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.8 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
A. General: Install
piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.
Individual
Parcel 34
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building
walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building
elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for
ceiling panel removal.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls,
wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and
polished chrome-plated finish.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
Parcel 34 Specifications 554 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.
Parcel 34
U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically
required in individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of
steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe
is being threaded.
Parcel 34
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller
threaded pipe connection.
Parcel 34
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support
and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
Parcel 34
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other
surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of trades involved.
3.9 GROUTING
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.4 GUIDES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
3.5 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping
systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 34
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Metraflex Co.
f. Or approved equal.
c. Or approved equal.
3. Guides:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc.
c. Grinnell Corp.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Or approved equal.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2.4 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for
alignment of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. C.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of
0.05 mm.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS
2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
2.13 TEST PLUGS
2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
2.16 VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS
2.17 FLOW INDICATORS
2.18 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
2.19 WATER METERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Thermometers:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ernst Gage Co.
c. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
e. Or approved equal.
2. Pressure Gages:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ernst Gage Co.
c. Noshok, Inc.
d. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
f. Or approved equal.
3. Test Plugs:
a. Flow Design, Inc.
b. MG Piping Products Co.
c. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
d. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Or approved equal.
4. Flow Elements:
a. ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
f. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.
g. Taco, Inc.
h. Or approved equal.
5. Flowmeters:
a. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
b. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
c. Hersey Measurement Co.
Parcel 34 Specifications 572 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
d. Onicon, Inc.
e. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Measurement Div.
f. Or approved equal.
6. Thermal-Energy Flowmeters
a. Data Industrial Corp.
b. ONICON Incorporated.
c. Thermo Measurement Ltd.
d. Or approved equal.
7. Flow Indicators:
a. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
b. Emerson Electric Co.; Brooks Instrument Div.
c. Ernst Gage Co.
d. Or approved equal.
8. Water Meters:
a. ABB Water Meters, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
c. Hersey Measurement Co.
d. ISTEC Corp.
e. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
f. Or approved equal.
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.
3. Condenser Water: minus 18 to plus 70 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.
4. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E 1.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front,
spring secured, 230 mm long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length
to suit installation.
Parcel 34 Specifications 573 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for
remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to
support meter.
3.7 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and utility's
requirements.
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water
meter inlet. Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass
around meter, unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter
inlet and outlet and on full- size valved bypass around meter. Support
meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to
utility's instructions and requirements.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and Division
23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow
service and maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters
and devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s
published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after
installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred
surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.
END OF SECTION 230519
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
2.3 GATE VALVES
2.4 BALL VALVES
2.5 PLUG VALVES
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
2.8 CHECK VALVES
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
3.8 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 581 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design,
pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating
materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances,
and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating
at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in
successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on
adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations"
Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and
ASME B31.1 for power piping.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm
drainage piping valves unless referenced.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents
referenced.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Parcel 34
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do
not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Valves:
b. Econosto (Holland)
d. Hattersley (UK).
f. Or approved equal.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under
ground or above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated
with 7.5 mm fusion bonded epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule"
of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and
temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the
following special operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
Parcel 34
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1
wrench for every 10 plug valves.
Parcel 34
A. Plug Valves: Lubricated MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bonnet, cast- iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or
grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 and larger,
2400 mm or higher above floor.
2. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Lever handle with latch lock.
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor:
Chain-wheel operator.
Parcel 34
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126,
AWWA C508 having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air
cushioned side mounted cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to
ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved connection.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main
components), horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc
or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered end
connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent
disc movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and
seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper
size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and
damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and Division
23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system
shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm above finished floor
elevation.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system,
and bronze or teflon disc.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast-iron body.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer
check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast-iron body.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer
check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
Parcel 34
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak
persists.
END OF SECTION 230523
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment.
Parcel 34
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings
Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe
Hangers and Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test
water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test
water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and
supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system
component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for
multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design
calculations justifying forces, sizes, embedments and characteristics of
components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
operators.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and
calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified
professional engineer.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and
calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a
qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of hangers, supports and seismic restraints that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 34
b. Grinnell Corp.
d. Erico-Caddy.
f. Or approved equal.
d. Unistrut Corp.
e. Erico-Caddy.
f. Or approved equal.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to
DN900, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type
support for pipes, DN65 to DN900, if vertical adjustment is required, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750,
from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65
to DN500, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN1050, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN600, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
DN50 to DN750, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, DN20 to DN500, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to
various types of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C piping
installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper
attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom
flange of beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
Parcel 34 Specifications 593 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For
attaching to structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg.
8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam
is required.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject
to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree
insert of high-density, 690-kPa minimum compressive-strength, water-
repellent-treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with
vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
Parcel 34
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-
89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly
support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as
specified above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.
Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-
69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves,
flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of
piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms
and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed
and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder- actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Parcel 34 Specifications 595 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement
of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors,
and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead
loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected
equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes
and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping," is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed
on rollers.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified."
3. Cooling towers.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
8. Rubatex Corp.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than
25 mm thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times
the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa and a deflection not less than 2 mm per
25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa.
Parcel 34
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Hot-dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
Parcel 34
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height
with not less than 25- mm clearance above the floor.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide
for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify
actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation
bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation
bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete,
and trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in
Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration
isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or
concrete inertia bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-
mounted piece of equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the
vibration isolators and bolt to supporting structure.
Parcel 34
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze
anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend
across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-
iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze
anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to
hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal
operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so
they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at
operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal
mode of operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written
recommendations to resist seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-
control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 606 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
1. Material: Brass.
Parcel 34
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
6. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150
mm for equipment.
Parcel 34
indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification,
operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple
systems of same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by
following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 40 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts,
tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according
to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and
terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Parcel 34
shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose connections, and
HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures
and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color
scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.
4. Sprinkler: Red.
5. Gas: Yellow.
4. Sprinkler: White.
5. Gas: Black.
Parcel 34
8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, , fan coil units, controls
and components.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with
duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and
direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed
spaces and at maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are
exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
Parcel 34
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
2.2 PREPARATION
2.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
2.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.8 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
2.9 MOTORS
2.10 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
2.11 TEMPERATURE TESTING
2.12 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
2.13 TOLERANCES
2.14 REPORTING
2.15 FINAL REPORT
2.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment,
such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including
submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more
factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow,
whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally
dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to
yield repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the
pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on
the suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the
performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from
those presented when the fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters
or leaves the distribution system.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for
systems and equipment, VAC controls installers, and other mechanics to
operate VAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting,
and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on
air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project
requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may
preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
Parcel 34 Specifications 616 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks
and controls.
Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended
controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness
of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone
units, mixing boxes, and variable- air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-
way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different
from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet
manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
Parcel 34 Specifications 620 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within
specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume
dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified
tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the
limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
2.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence
starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows
against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus
5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following,
in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at
design flow.
3. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential
pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-
displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open.
4. Set system controls so that automatic valves are wide open to heat
exchangers.
5. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-
balancing device so that motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
6. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
2.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for
positive-displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and
correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the
manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake
horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's
performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with
Parcel 34
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to
achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as
follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design
flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the
lowest percentage over design flow.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,
voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures,
including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the
conclusions of balancing.
2.8 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems
at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified
above for hydronic systems.
2.9 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the
following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
3. Motor rpm.
Parcel 34
6. Airflow.
Parcel 34
2.14 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract
Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the
adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes
and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to VAC
systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring
and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed
procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list
of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced.
Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems
serving multiple floors.
2.15 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard
bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and
balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
Parcel 34
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the
following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
7. Report date.
11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from
design values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the
following:
b. Conditions of filters.
Parcel 34
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
Parcel 34
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
Parcel 34
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
c. Fan rpm.
H. Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
Parcel 34
h. Air-terminal-device size.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
J. System-Coil Reports: For coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
e. Flowmeter type.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Unit identification.
Parcel 34 Specifications 629 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
b. Location.
e. Compressor make.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
f. Control settings.
r. The kW input.
t. Number of fans.
Parcel 34 Specifications 630 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
L. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller
size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
i. Pump rpm.
p. Seal type.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
Parcel 34
b. Serial number.
c. Applicatin.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
Parcel 34
2. All data points mapped from the BMS to the third party system are
displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on both systems.
4. All points mapped from the third party system to the BMS meet all
of the specifications detailed in the contract documents for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
D. The third party systems that shall be interfaced with the BMS Automation Level
shall be:
1. Variable speed drive controllers
E. Certain of the extra low voltage systems interface with the Management Level
Network. The interface between the Management Level Network and the third
party systems shall be demonstrated at an offsite location prior to the award of
contract for the third party system. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the
mechanical contractor who shall liaise with each party concerned and shall
ensure that the necessary test facilities including a data port to a 1 gigabit per
second Ethernet network, a terminal server and a BMS thin client workstation
are available and operational.
F. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS thin client workstation on the
Management Level Network can communicate with the third party system and
vice versa. Provide a report detailing the tests undertaken and the results of
the tests. If the tests are successful a time shall be established that is
acceptable to the Employer and Engineer when the interface can be
Parcel 34
demonstrated. Each party involved in the test shall provide the applicable
components necessary to perform the demonstration. Ensure the presence of
suitably skilled personnel at the tests. The components provided for and the
functions performed at the tests by each party shall be those that they are
required to provide for the actual installation.
G. The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the
third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
1. All data communicated from the third party system to the
Management Level Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply
completely with ASHRAE SSPC/135.
2. All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the third
party system are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on the third party system and the BMS thin
client workstation.
4. All points mapped from the third party system to the Management Level
Network meet all of the specifications detailed in the BMS specifications
for points directly monitored/controlled by the BMS.
H. The third party systems that shall be interfaced with the Management Level
Network shall be :
1. UPS Controllers.
I. All parties associated with the exchange of data between the third party
systems and the Management level Network and between the third party
systems and the BMS Automation Level shall coordinate their work so as to
ensure that the intent and requirements of these specifications, the
specifications for the third party systems and the specifications in Section
15900 are attained.
Parcel 34
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
3.7 FINISHES
3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory
and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
Parcel 34
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections
of each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for
each type of field-applied finish material indicated.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
Parcel 34
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation
application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Manson.
2. Fiberglass Ltd.
3. Johns-Manville.
7. St. Gobain.
Parcel 34
8. Izocam
9. Manson
2. Density : 24kg/m3.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended
by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Parcel 34
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with
top of roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal
ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
Parcel 34 Specifications 641 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at
cross bracing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation
by removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13- mm staples, 25 mm
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150- mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage
rates for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Parcel 34
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400
mm o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints.
Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against
surface at cross bracing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation
by removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13- mm staples, 25 mm
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150- mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
Parcel 34
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-
cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,
apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to
allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
following systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner.
Parcel 34
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
2. Thickness: 25 mm.
2. Thickness: 25 mm.
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
3.5 FINISHES
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory
and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
Parcel 34
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square
sections of each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for
each type of field-applied finish material indicated.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following or approved equal:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
c. Izocam (Turkey)
d. Johns-Manville. (USA)
e. Lapinus (Cypus)
c. K-Flex (Italy )
Parcel 34
2. Density: 48 kg/m3.
2. Density: 24 kg/m3.
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the
manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
and free of voids throughout the length of equipment.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each equipment system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to
receive a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
Parcel 34
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of
tanks and vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end
joints with manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent
of chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small
tanks, whichever is greater.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
3.8 FINISHES
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
2. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
4. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and
protection saddles.
Parcel 34
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory
and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for
each type of insulation and hanger.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50.
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for
each type of field-applied finish material indicated.
Parcel 34
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
g. One reducer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
Completion.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields
specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
e. St. Gobain.
f. Or approved equal.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
b. Or approved equal.
b. Rubatex Corp.
c. Or approved equal.
b. Or approved equal.
Parcel 34
b. Pabco.
d. Or approved equal.
b. Or approved equal.
b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-
fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for
bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
Parcel 34
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll
stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material, finish,
and thickness as jacket.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the
manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe
runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to
receive a vapor retarder.
Parcel 34
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by
the hanger, support, and shield.
Parcel 34
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
voids with vapor- retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with
top of roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints
with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at
intervals of 4.5 to 6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation
segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 150 mm o.c.
Parcel 34
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended
by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply
mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with
wire, tape, or bands.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories.
Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
Parcel 34
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation
with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of
insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
Parcel 34
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75
mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire
spaced at 300-mm intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands
at 300-mm intervals.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
Parcel 34
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
C. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end
joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-
cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,
apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective
coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
following systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
Parcel 34 Specifications 666 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow
regulators.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber; except for pipe drops to fixtures within
walls, use flexible elastomeric, 13 mm thick.
Parcel 34
6. Finish: None.
6. Finish: None.
6. Finish: None.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
5. Division 23 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and
check valves.
6. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and
pressure gages.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings
2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are
made on threads(metric dimensions)
4. BS 1387 Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars for plain end steel
tubes suitable for welding of for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
7. BS 4504 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and
pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings,
calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow- control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe
support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their
attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment
guides, and expansion joints and loops.
Parcel 34 Specifications 670 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Or approved equal.
d. Taco, Inc.
e. Or approved equal.
3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
d. Or approved equal.
4. Safety Valves:
d. Or approved equal.
b. Griswold Controls.
Parcel 34
c. Or approved equal.
6. Expansion Tanks:
b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Taco, Inc.
d. Reflex
e. Pneumatex AG
f. Or approved equal.
b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Taco, Inc.
d. Reflex
e. Pneumatex AG
f. Or approved equal.
A. Steel Pipe, DN 300 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, DN 350 through DN 450: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-
resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel,
plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, DN 500 and Larger: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance
welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black
steel; seamless for DN 50 and smaller and electric-resistance welded for DN
65 and larger.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
D. Casing: HDPE
E. Casing accessories include the following:
1. Joint Kit: Half-self, pourable or split insulation, casing sleeve, and shrink-
wrap sleeve.
3. End Seals: Shrink wrap the casing material to seal watertight around
casing and carrier pipe.
F. Source Quality Control: Factory test the carrier pipe to 150 percent of the
operating pressure of system. Furnish test certificates.
2.6 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section
"Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 1035-
kPa working pressure, 107 deg C maximum operating temperature, and having
threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for
portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a
memory stop to retain set position.
D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball
type, 1035-kPa working pressure, 107 deg C maximum operating
temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have
calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter
with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
Parcel 34
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control
valve, with stainless- steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and
temperature test valves, and designed for 2067 kPa at 121 deg C.
H. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve type which are in accordance with
MSS SP-80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above
with a threaded end connection. Valve shall be provided with a water hose
nipple adapter.
I. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa minimum
CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass
ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel
handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Parcel 34
C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 400 kPa working pressure
and 121 deg C maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from
system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible [diaphragm]
[bladder] securely sealed into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain fitting
and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with
steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory
fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed
and labeled for 860-kPa minimum working pressure and 191 deg C maximum
operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to
direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections;
threaded connections for DN 50 and smaller; flanged connections for DN
65 and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-
system flow capacity.
E. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to
decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to
1206 kPa and liquid temperature up to 149 deg C.
F. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to
separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.
Maximum working pressure of 1035 kPa and temperature of 121 deg C.
G. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 860-kPa working
pressure; 19-L capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to
prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected
equipment.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Chilled Water, DN 65 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and
flanged joints.
1. Contractor Option: Use of grooved mechanical-joint couplings.
C. Condenser Water: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
1. Contractor Option 1: Use of grooved mechanical-joint couplings.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply
connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is
connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch
connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or
cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as
required to control flow direction.
E. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as
required to regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic
piping installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying
insulation and servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 ball valve, and short DN 20
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and
elsewhere as required for system drainage.
Parcel 34 Specifications 678 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping
6 m or longer.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20: Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
H. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and
ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel
control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of
chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling,
and to sustain the water characteristics appropriate to use.
B. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination
during test.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that
system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under
test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not
Parcel 34
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no leaks.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until
satisfactory results are obtained.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic
system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced
position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed
and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Parcel 34
3.11 PAINTING
A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in
equipment rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned,
primed and painted.
B. Refer to Section “Painting” for painting requirement.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but
before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction
diffusers.
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.3 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 End-Suction Pumps
2.2 Horizontal / Vertical Split Case Pumps
2.3 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
2.5 Horizontal Multi-Stage Pumps
2.6 Centrifugal In-Line Pumps
2.7 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Pumps
3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
3.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.7 Guarantee and Warranted Period
3.8 Approved List of Manufacturers:
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
C. Pump casing shall be of high tensile strength gray iron and fitted with
bronze wear ring.
D. Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed, accurately machined and statically
and dynamically balanced. It shall be fitted with a key and locked in
place. Shaft shall be stainless steel of ample size to carry any axial and
radial thrust.
E. Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and
ceramic type. Pump ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all
axial and radial thrust.
F. For chilled water applications, the necessary disconnect switches and
motor starters shall be supplied and installed under the electrical part
of the works.
2.3 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
A. For Specification of the variable speed / variable frequency drive, refer
to Electrical Specification.
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
A. Each pump shall be the type specified and shall be directly coupled to
an electric motor. Pump body shall be manufactured from high tensile
grey iron. Shaft shall be stainless steel and fitted with balance drum to
reduce axial loading on motor bearing. Balance drum of stainless steel
shall run in bronze bearing in each stage piece. Impeller stage pieces
and tie rods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
B. Pump shall have mechanical seal-self adjusting type with carbon
rotating against a stationary ceramic seal.
C. Pump/motor coupling shall be manufactured from cold forged steel or
cast iron.
D. Each pump set, for domestic water supply application, shall be
complete with the following:
E. Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage
protection as required by the Authorities. Phase failure protection,
starters, automatic electric alternators, indicating lights and selector
switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust and splash proof
to minimum IP 55 type with lockable door,
F. Panel and door shall be rust proof.
G. Panel shall include volt free contacts for connection to BMS 0-10v DC,
4-20 mA.
H. Pump speed shall be shown in the pump schedule.
2.5 Horizontal Multi-Stage Pumps
A. Each pump shall be the type specified and shall be directly coupled to
an electric motor. Pump body shall be manufactured from high tensile
grey iron. Shaft shall be stainless steel and fitted with balance drum to
reduce axial loading on motor bearing. Balance drum of stainless steel
shall run in bronze bearing in each stage piece. Impeller stage pieces
and tie rods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
2.5 VALVES
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
3.8 CONNECTIONS
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 CLEANING
3.12 COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 692 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct
1 test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Refrigerants:
e. or approved equal.
g. or approved equal.
Parcel 34
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type A (ASTM B 88, Type K), annealed
temper.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.5 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135
deg C (275 deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or
bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms,
rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-
end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135
deg C (275 deg F) working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-
brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded
stem packing, with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with
removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe
design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with
cast-bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically
retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with
solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with
copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with
solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ARI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature
rating, 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve
seat, 2-way straight-through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual
operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1 solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-
inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass
or cast bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage
tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and wrought- copper fittings for solder-end
connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot
operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat,
factory sealed and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ARI 750; thermostatic-adjustable,
modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements;
Parcel 34
solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for
hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of
compressor unloading; solder- end connections.
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure;
forged-brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel
screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working
pressure; steel shell with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C
(200 deg F) operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable,
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator, and
solder-end connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel
shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit,
including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel
support, ARI 730 rated for capacity.
Parcel 34
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed;
2760-kPa (400-psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure
relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and
stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8D;
2760 kPa (400 psig) with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure
relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.8 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane (for small size split units only).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-
copper tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-
copper tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints,
elbows, and fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for
service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and
hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through
floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full- thickness insulation.
F. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and
all leaks have been eliminated.
Parcel 34
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically
and symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing
will be exposed to mechanical injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4
percent downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward
to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain
oil in vertical runs.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
Parcel 34
V. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe pressure relief
valves on receivers to outdoors.
W. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following
ASHRAE 15 procedures.
X. Charge system as follows:
1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg
C (35 deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
Parcel 34
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing
to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at
compressor inlet and outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet
and outlet, and on each side of strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid
lines on multiple condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between
receiver shutoff valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction
lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass
valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.
Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
Parcel 34
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat
requirements.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and
fittings with trichloroethylene.
3.12 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
D. The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation,
testing and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete HVAC water
treatment system as described, shown detailed or implied in the tender
documents of the project.
E. The contractor shall employ a specialized and approved water treatment
company to carry out the works as per the following requirements.
F. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories
as well as manpower, scaffolding, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense
to execute a complete operable system.
G. The contractor shall be responsible for flushing and cleaning the piping
system and for the supply and installation of water treatment chemicals and
chemical feeding equipment for the control of scale, corrosion and algae in
the system.
H. The Contractor shall supply with each system an estimate of one year's
supply of water treatment chemical as specified.
I. A complete water analysis shall be conducted at the job site by the water
treatment chemical equipment supplier and a written report shall be
submitted.
J. The Contractor shall include the services of a water treatment company every
thirty (30) days during the first full year after system is placed in operation.
The company shall make complete water analysis at the time of each service
call and a written report of the findings shall be left with the Owner's operating
personnel. The Company shall also be present for the initial charging of each
system with chemical and shall fully instruct Owner's operating personnel to
insure continuation of proper water treatment.
K. The chemical feeding equipment shall be automatic as shown on Drawings.
L. Related Works Specified Elsewhere
The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are
included in this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein
verbatim.
Section 23 05 01 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
Section 23 73 00 - Central Station Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 19 - Fan Coil Unit
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
M. The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other
Parcel 34
The chilled water system cleaning shall be carried out for removing rust,
millscale, debris and other foreign bodies by:
i. Initially fill the system with fresh water and circulate water by
operating existing system circulating pumps for 30 minutes.
ii. At the end of this period the system shall be partially drained
from the lowest drain points.
iii. Dismantle the strainers and refix after removing all impurities
iv. Refill the system and operate the circulating pumps
v. Fill the system with sufficient dose of non acidic pre operational
cleaner
vi. Once it is established that the chemical is completely mixed after
being circulated for at least 16 hrs. The system shall be
completely drained from the lowest drain point.
vii. Refill the system with fresh water and re-circulate for a minimum
period of 2 Hours and then drain the whole water.
viii. Continue flushing procedure with fresh water only until tests
indicate that the water is of an acceptable quality within the
following parameters, before continuing the process:
Total dissolved solids - Equivalent to incoming main
Parcel 34
Finally the water shall be analyzed to confirm the correct condition and
concentration of chemicals, these results shall be approved by the
Engineer and shall be recorded on a Completion Certificate within the
following control parameters.
pH 9.0 – 10.5
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
3. Fittings.
Parcel 34
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
stainless steel. Gauge of mtal shall be suitable for welding. Welded joints in concealed
locations will not be required to be ground or polished but must be neat. Welde joints in
visible locations shall be ground and polished.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
Parcel 34
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for
steel rod diameters.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with 3-mm thick, carbon-steel sheet for
concealed ducts and 2.5-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel.
Continuous weld seams and joints.
D. Fabricate locker room shower exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick aluminum.
Continuous weld seams and joints.
E. Acid-Resistant Ducts: PVC-coated galvanized steel.
Parcel 34 Specifications 712 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480
mm and larger and 0.9 mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced
panel area, unless ducts are lined.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent
coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation
to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make
longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7
m/s.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from
transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness
as specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain
metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4-mm diameter, with an overall open area
of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning
vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)
or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall
Parcel 34 Specifications 713 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 717 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Motorized dampers.
5. Duct silencers.
6. Turning vanes.
8. Flexible ducts.
9. Flexible connectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Motorized dampers.
5. Duct silencers.
7. Flexible ducts.
Parcel 34
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-
noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss,
dimensions, and weights.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 34
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4
mm thick zinc-plated steel, and a 19 mm hexagon locking nut. Include center
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.4 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum, galvanized-
steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than
1.6 -mm galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge
seals.
1. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
4. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for
running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than
that indicated.
Parcel 34
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed
under not less than 5 percent compression.
G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or
otherwise react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan
static pressure or 1500-Pa(6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.
Parcel 34
C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an
inner and outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door
shall consist of two panels spot-welded together which totally encapsulate
insulation identical to corresponded ductwork insulation. The inner and outer
doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a configuration that
the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich
fashion.
D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical
springs shall be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and
removal of the door. Fireproof neoprene gasket shall be used around the
outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not both, to seal the door.
E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval
ductwork.
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89
mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet
steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected
ducts.
C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric
146 mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized,
sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with
connected ducts.
D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89
mm wide attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized,
sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with
connected ducts.
E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric
double coated with polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and
NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside
and where indicated.
C. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written
instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
F. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged
with loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets.
G. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct
access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes,
and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
H. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum
1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
J. Label access doors according to Section "Mechanical Identification." Section.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PROPELLER FANS
2.3 MOTORS
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CONNECTIONS
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
3.7 COMMISSIONING
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Aerovent, Inc.
5. or approved equal.
Parcel 34
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring
with baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider
bolted to cast-iron hub.
D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels:Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to
cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil
blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades
with nylon bearings.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
Parcel 34
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing
of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
B. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and
terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
Parcel 34
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,
starters, and disconnects.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction,
and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt
guards.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
2.3 FAN UNITS
2.4 HOUSINGS
2.5 WHEELS
2.6 SHAFTS
2.7 BEARINGS
2.8 BELT DRIVES
2.9 ACCESSORIES
2.10 MOTORS
2.11 FACTORY FINISHES
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure
point.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Greenheck Fan Corp
2. Aerovent, Inc.
3. Carnes Co.
7. or equal approved.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit
construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99
and to requirements specified.
Parcel 34
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan
speed has been determined.
D. Fresh air fans shall be associated with air filter in compliance with Division 23
section “Air Filters”.
2.3 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with
indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.4 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make
curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or
panels to allow access to internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel
to fabricate fans downstream from humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting
and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel
cabinet.
d. Outlet flange.
2.5 WHEELS
Parcel 34
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.
Parcel 34
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically
balanced at factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm
thick, 20-mm diamond- mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short
circuiting vibration isolation. Include provision for adjustment of belt tension,
lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
Parcel 34
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft
bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width
fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to
housing.
2.10 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed-sheave standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable,
pivoted motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits proper
installation.
2.11 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat
before assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not
required.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Parcel 34 Specifications 740 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using
neoprene pads or housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to
anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices
are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.
Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM
A 36), size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide
cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
Parcel 34
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland
cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 27 MPa compressive strength, and
normal-weight aggregate.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23
Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct
accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and
terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor
shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt adjustments, and lubrication, and to report
results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters,
and disconnects.
Parcel 34
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan
drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" Section for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
centrifugal fan units. Refer to Division 1.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.5 MOTORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 34
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels clearly describing contents.
Parcel 34 Specifications 747 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
Parcel 34 Specifications 748 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302.
Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA
99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted
inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other
provisions are required, and shall be constructed in accordance with
applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and
coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint.
Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of:
ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and
ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,
with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be
imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel
alloys and shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy
rating of 200,000 hours. Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for
lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron unless
otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be
surface ball check type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease
pressure relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal
construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite
the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance
locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel
spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper
pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified
materials and ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be
provided for fans driven by motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2
horsepower (375 watt).
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.
Parcel 34
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,
enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan
bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
Parcel 34 Specifications 750 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
2.5 MOTORS
Parcel 34
E. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
Parcel 34
3.4 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 34
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect
fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTSMANUFACTURERS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.2 FANS
2.3 MOTORS
2.4 FILTERS
2.5 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for
each unit indicated.
Shop Drawings:
Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet
velocity, and power consumption.
Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service
Establishments."
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming
manufacturers and products.
Parcel 34
2.2 MATERIALS
Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and
capable of reducing air-outlet velocity by 60% with louver in totally closed
position. Air intake to be protected against inclement weather for units
installed on the outside wall.
Unit shall be fire retardant and corrosion proof. Steel of 18 gage paint lock metal
and doubly protected with grey rust preventative coating. All interior parts
safeguarded against inclement weather.
Parcel 34
2.3 FANS
L. Fans: direct drive double width and double inlet squirrel cage blower wheels
and fan housings Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet.
Fan Drives: Direct or Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves
and pulleys for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
2.4 MOTORS
M. Motor Type: Motor shall be continuous duty type, totally enclosed with
sealed lubricated ball bearings, resilient mounted and protected by an
automatic thermal over-load switch. U.L. approved. Explosive proof motors
available. Multispeed resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed,
air over with integral thermal-overload protection.
2.5 FILTERS
Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and
suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Automatic Door Switch: Plunger type installed in door area to activate air curtain
when door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
P. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
Provide air curtain fans at doors to food preparation, food serving, warehouses
and shop areas as indicated on the Drawings
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of
individual components.
After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation
and unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test gas train and verify that there are no gas leaks.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Parcel 34
PART 77 - GENERAL
0.2 SUMMARY
0.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Delegated Design: Design restraint and anchors for fuel-oil piping, ASTs,
and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
Parcel 34
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified [ and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event]."
0.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
3. Fuel maintenance system.
4. Liquid-level gage system.
5. Leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility fuel-oil piping layout. Include plans, piping
layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors,
hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and
loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of
anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks are
shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.
Parcel 34
H. Brazing certificates.
I. Welding certificates.
F. Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and local authorities
having jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel-oil storage tanks and monitoring of
tanks and piping.
Parcel 34
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging the
coating and to protect from direct sunlight.
0.9 COORDINATION
0.10 WARRANTY
PART 78 - PRODUCTS
A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and
joining materials are applied in various services.
Parcel 34
1. Metallic Connectors:
2. Nonmetallic Connectors:
Parcel 34
B. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: [80]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
C. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and
bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: [80]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
D. T-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end
cap for strainer maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
3. Strainer Screen: [80]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 57 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 750 psig (5170 kPa).
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
Parcel 34
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540
deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than
0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various
services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for
Liquid Service: Comply with UL 842.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
0.6 SLEEVES
Parcel 34
0.8 ESCUTCHEONS
0.9 GROUT
Parcel 34
A. Pressure test and inspect fuel-oil storage tanks, after fabrication and before
shipment, according to ASME and the following:
PART 79 - EXECUTION
0.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 34
0.2 EARTHWORK
0.3 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or
piping section.
A. Install underground fuel-oil piping buried at least [18 inches (457 mm)]
below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
1. If fuel-oil piping is installed with less than [12 inches (305 mm)] of cover to
finished grade, install in containment piping.
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining, to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by
protective coating manufacturer. Review protective coating damage with
Architect prior to repair.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump
sidewalls for liquid-tight joints.
F. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at
piping connections to AST and UST.
Parcel 34
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building
structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
1. New Piping:
Parcel 34
M. Prohibited Locations:
Parcel 34
D. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping
systems.
G. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and
return lines.
H. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points
in fuel-oil piping.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
Parcel 34
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Comply with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use
wrench according to fitting manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not
overtighten.
A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15
feet (4.5 m).
Parcel 34
E. Support vertical copper tube at each floor and at spacing not greater than
10 feet (3 m).
A. Submersible Pumps:
B. Transfer Pumps:
A. Install suction line, with foot valve, at one end of storage tank, 1 inch (25
mm) from the bottom of tank.
B. Install return line at the opposite end of storage tank from suction line.
0.12 CONNECTIONS
B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve
and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe
connection.
Parcel 34 Specifications 776 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union
between valve and equipment.
C. Install detectable warning tape directly above fuel-oil piping, [12 inches
(304 mm)] below finished grade, except [6 inches (152 mm)] below subgrade
under pavements and slabs. Terminate tracer wire in an accessible area, and
identify as "tracer wire" for future use with plastic-laminate sign.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except
components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except
components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
c. Where vertical height of fill and vent pipes is such that the static head
imposed on the bottom of the tank is greater than 10 psig (69 kPa),
hydrostatically test the tank and fill and vent pipes to a pressure equal to the
static head thus imposed.
d. Maintain the test pressure for one hour.
Parcel 34
0.17 DEMONSTRATION
A. Underground fuel-oil-tank fill and vent piping shall be[ one of] the following:
A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be[ one
of] the following:
Parcel 34
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall
be[ one of] the following:
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be[ one of] the following:
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
3.6 REGISTERS
3.7 GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 782 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's
standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the
same material to be used for the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 34
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Dampers shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall.
Terminal velocity is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer
velocities through diffuser are not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be
able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room temperature without
causing objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the
face of the device. Volume adjustments shall be made by removable key or
tamper-deterring device.
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished
surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage),
provide sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air
quantity, as measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless
specified otherwise
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Parcel 34 Specifications 785 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated,
or as directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Equip with baffles or other devices required to provide proper air distribution
pattern. Provide factory- fabricated, single key, volume dampers. Except for
linear diffusers, internal parts shall be removable through the diffuser neck for
access to the duct and without the use of special tools.
B. Ceiling Diffusers to have flange suitable for flush mounting on false ceiling and
round neck sized to fit outside duct. They are to be complete with volume
Parcel 34
3.6 REGISTERS
Parcel 34
3.7 GRILLES
A. Construct and finish as specified above for registers, except that volume
dampers shall be omitted.
B. Door grilles:
1. No-vision, V-shaped louver type. Grille net free area to be not less than
70% of gross face area.
C. Transfer Grilles:
1. To be fixed blade type with blades set at 45-degree deflection parallel to
long dimension. Grille net free area not to be less than 70% of gross face
area.
D. Wire Mesh Grille
Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas, fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh 13
mm aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with
approximately 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) margin.
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.3 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 34 Specifications 789 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
1. Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report
shall be less than five years old and will have been prepared by an
independent testing laboratory using test equipment, method and duct
section as specified by ASHRAE Standard 52.1-92 for type filter under
test and acceptable to Resident Engineer, indicating that filters comply
with the requirements of this Specification. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm)
will be accepted for lower velocity rated filters provided the test report of
an independent testing laboratory complies with all the requirements of
this Specification.
2. Selection procedures: All filters tested shall have been procured by
the independent testing laboratory from the open market independent
of manufacturer of these filters and a statement to this effect must
accompany test report.
C. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or nameplate indicating
manufacturer's name, filter size, rated efficiency, UL classification.
D. Electronic Air Cleaners and Electrical Devices and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
F. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of
testing and rating air- filter units.
G. Comply with ARI 850.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to
the Engineer.
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 34
A. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or
non-supported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air-conditioning,
heating and ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface
type fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by
maximum (final) pressure drop.
B. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard
900.
C. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:
1. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.
2. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.
3. Grade C: 50-60 prefilter.
4. Grade D: 25-30 prefilter.
D. Filter Media:
1. Grade A, B and C Nonsupported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high-
density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat
in woven or non-woven backing material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to
maintain pleat shape in a proper frame to insure no air leakage for life of
filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
2. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be
composed of high-density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening
methods used to maintain pleat shape, (metal backing or aluminum
separators) shall be sealed in a proper enclosing frame to ensure no air
leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
3. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural
fibers. A metal grid backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the
media to maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper airflow and
Parcel 34 Specifications 792 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
F. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter cartridge when
operated at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:
Initial Final
Resistance Resistance
Parcel 34
Initial Final
Resistance Resistance
deep)
G. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face
velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face
area) filter shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the dust holding
capacity shall be proportionally higher or lower to the face area.
Grade A (Bag) 300 grams
H. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter (square feet) for
each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter at 150 m/min (500 fpm)
face velocity shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter sizes the net effective
media area shall be proportionally higher or lower.
Grade A (bag) 8.5 (91.0)
Parcel 34
A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream
(front) or downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for
assembly into modules. Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal
members without interfering with either filter installation or operation.
B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from front or back.
C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to
ensure seal between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
A. Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves,
black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
1. Diameter: 115 mm.
Parcel 34
2. Diameter: 50 mm.
3. Range: 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg).
B. Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum
scale, logarithmic-curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to
read from 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg), and accurate within 3 percent of full
scale range.
C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting
bracket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Parcel 34
3.3 CLEANING
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General
P. The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled air-cooled
packaged refrigeration machines. The number and capacity of which shall be
as indicated in the capacity schedule shown on the Drawings.
Q. Each machine shall consist of refrigerating circuits comprising screw
compressors, air-cooled condenser, and evaporator, interconnecting
refrigerant piping, controls, safety devices, accessories, and control power
transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum. No
phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
R. The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Environment
Friendly Refrigerant. All factory wiring and piping shall be contained within the
machine enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from the
weather.
S. Each machine shall have heavy steel base frame with coil frames and panels
of galvanized steel phosphatized, and finished with baked-on enamel paint.
T. Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to
ensure unit is capable of operation from 0 F to 125F (-18C to 52C )
ambient. Unit shall ship in one piece and shall require installer to
provide only a single evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connection.
Chiller model that ships in multiple pieces shall NOT be acceptable.
Trim kits and multiple evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connections shall
NOT be acceptable to meet the single piece shipment requirement of
this specification.
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
B. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-
sections are included in this Section in each applicable part, as if
repeated herein verbatim.
Section 23 05 01 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
Section 23 73 00 - Central Station Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 19 - Fan Coil Unit
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
Section 23 25 00 - Hvac Water Treatment
Parcel 34
The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the units
capacity schedules.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Chiller Controller
D. Microprocessor based controller shall be housed in a weather proof
enclosure with removable panels to allow for customer connection of
power wiring and remote interlocks. All controls including sensors
shall be factory mounted and tested prior to shipment.
U. Microprocessor controls shall provide all control functions including start-up,
shut-down, leaving chilled water temperature control, compressor and
electronic expansion valve modulation, fan sequencing, antirecycle logic,
automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load limiting.
V. Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator
freezing, loss of refrigerant, low refrigerant pressure, high refrigerant
pressure, reverse rotation, compressor starting and running over current,
phase loss, phase imbalance, phase reversal and loss of oil flow. Panel shall
have a clear language display to indicate operating data points including
chilled water set point, current limit set point, leaving chilled water
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
B. The water flowing through the baffled shell and refrigerant through the
tubes. Shell shall be manufactured from seamless carbon steel pipes,
seamless copper tubes with aluminium star inserts, anti-corrosive steel
baffles around tubes. Design working pressure tube side shall be 230
psig and water side 200 psig or applicable to withstand CHW system
pressure.
i. Vent and drain connection shall be included.
ii. Refrigerant heads shall be removable.
iii. Equipped with antifreeze protection heater.
iv. The shell shall be completely insulated with 2" (50 mm) thick
urethane foam insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket.
2.4 Air-Cooled Condenser
I. The condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type, copper
tube / aluminium fins OR Al Al Microchannel coils
CC.Condensing coils shall be seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded
to plate aluminium fins of min. thickness of 0.12 mm and max pitch of
16 FPI. Fins shall have full self spacing collars and completely cover the
tubes.
DD.Condenser coil fins shall have factory applied anti-corrosive coating as
approved by the Engineer against the high humidity and salty
atmosphere.
EE. A separate sub-cooling coil integral with main condenser coil to be
provided for each refrigerant circuit. Fans shall be propeller type,
placed to have uniform air distribution and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced for minimum noise and vibration. Motors for
outdoor application and specified ambient shall be tropicalized T. E. A.
O. class "F" insulation and with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
Heavy gauge protections guards are to be provided for each condenser
fan. Condenser coils shall be factory leak tested at 21 Bar.
FF. Coils shall be fitted with PVC coated steel guards.
2.5 Refrigerant Circuits
J. Chillers shall have at least two completely independent refrigerant
circuits with one or more screw compressor per circuit. Each
refrigerant circuit shall include compressor suction and discharge
service valves, liquid line shut-off valve, removable core filter drier,
sight glass with moisture indicator, charging port and an electronic
expansion valve.
2.6 POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
K. Power/Control Panel:
NEMA (IP55), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and
gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing.
Provide main power connections(s), compressor starters and fan motor
contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring. Panel shall include
control display access door.
L. Short Circuit Withstand Rating shall be 30,000 Amps
Parcel 34 Specifications 802 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General Requirements
P. The manufacturer shall perform all field or factory testing, balancing
and final adjustment of the refrigeration machines in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the relevant ASHRAE Standards.
GG. The following data shall be compiled and certified:
i. Temperature of chilled water "In and Out".
ii. Chilled Water flow (gpm).
iii. Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water).
iv. Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes
and power factor.
HH.Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements
shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced.
II. Unless indicated otherwise on electrical drawings Each packaged unit shall
be factory equipped to connect to only one electrical power feeder with the
necessary built-in circuit breakers or disconnect switch.
JJ. The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance model
of the approved manufacturer, which combines best COP, FER and noise
level ratings. Contractor shall be responsible to select accordingly and to the
approval of the Engineer.
KK. Each packaged unit shall be mounted on spring type vibration isolators
flexible enough to dampen any vibrations.
LL. The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance model
of the approved manufactureres which combines best COP, EER and noise
level ratings. Contractors shall be responsible to select accordingly and to
the approval of the Engineer.
3.2 CHILLER SEQUENCE CONTROLLER
Q. Introduction
The Contractor shall supply and install the chillers sequence controller
as specified under this section of the specifications.
Parcel 34 Specifications 803 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
R. Controller
i. The controller shall serve all the chillers and the chilled water
pumps and shall be of the electronic type.
ii. The Controller shall be complete with a remote water temperature
sensor in the return chilled water header with all the necessary
interlocking devices, and all necessary items required for
satisfactory operation of the central chilled water system as
generally described herein below.
iii. This controller shall be supplied in addition to the individual
control panels of each chiller which is factory assembled and
wired and as specified under the chiller specifications.
S. Operation Sequence
iv. All the chillers shall be electrically interlocked with the chilled
water pumps such that no chiller shall operate unless the duty
chilled water pump(s) have run for a pre-set time interval. Each
shall also be interlocked with it's water flow switch, installed in the
water outlet of the chiller in such a way that the chiller stops
automatically when its flow switch fails to sense water circulation
through it.
v. The Contractor shall produce a schematic line diagram to show the
manual and automatic control system described hereinafter and
shall submit this diagram to the Engineer for approval.
vi. The control and operating sequence for the cooling equipment
shall be as follows:-
The chilled water pump(s) shall be started manually by placing
the selector switch on automatic position.
The flow switch in the chiller water circuit shall, after sensing
the rated flow, permit the starting of the refrigeration machines
provided that a signal from the sequence controller is received
by these machines.
vii. The water temperature sensor in the return chilled water header of
the system shall control the operation of the refrigeration
machines through the sequence controller which sends its signal
direct to the multi-stage temperature controllers of the refrigeration
machines. When there is need for cooling, one stage of the multi-
stage controller shall operate a control relay which permits the
operation of the condenser fans and the corresponding refrigerant
solenoid valve and non-recycling relay, one at a time.
viii. One stage of the first compressor can then start after the above
mentioned relays are in operation provided the following safety
and control cutouts are closed:-
High pressure cutout
Low pressure cutout
Oil pressure cutout
Low temperature cutout (freeze protection)
Parcel 34 Specifications 804 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
ix. When there is need for more cooling. The other stages of the first
compressor shall operate until the first compressor is fully loaded.
The same sequence will follow for the other compressors of the
refrigeration machine when more cooling is needed.
x. A step controller shall prevent the compressors from starting all at
the same time and it shall start them one at a time with a time delay
between one another.
xi. Upon a further increase in the return chilled water temperature the
sequence controller will send a signal to the second refrigeration
machine and the same sequence of first machine will be repeated
and so on until the load is satisfied and design water temperatures
are maintained.
xii. Upon a drop in load one stage of the multi-stage controller opens
and as a result, the last operated compressor starts unloading and
upon further drop in load the relay of the solenoid valve is de-
energized and starts the pump down cycle until the compressor
stops by the action of the low pressure cutout. When load is
diminished more, and return water temperature drops further,
other compressors of the refrigeration machine are de-energized
by the same procedure. The condenser fans keep running after the
relay is de-energized, through the period of pump down and will
stop after the last compressor of refrigeration machine stops. On a
further drop in load, another step of the sequence controller
similarly de-energizes the compressors of the second refrigeration
machine through its multi-stage controller. The chilled water
pump(s) shall run continuously and shall be independent of the
automatic starting and stopping of the refrigeration machines.
xiii. A manual switch in the sequence controller shall enable the
operator to alternate the operation of the duty and stand-by pumps
and chillers.
xiv. A reversing switch shall be provided on the sequence controller to
equalize the running time of the refrigeration machines.
3.3 Spare Parts
T. The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a separate list (as
an option) of spare parts for all the equipment supplied sufficient for
three years of operation all in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturers of the equipment.
3.4 Special Tools
U. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and
equipment supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be
supplied by the Contractor at the completion date of the project.
3.5 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
V. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate
bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
Parcel 34 Specifications 805 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
xv. Brief description of each system and its service and basic
operation features.
xvi. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional
components of the systems listed on the Drawings, control
diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers. List shall give system
No., unit no., Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's drawing
no. Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended spare
parts for one year operation.
xvii. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
xviii. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
xix. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
xx. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment
control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
xxi. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all
electrical motor controller connections and interlock connections
of other mechanical equipment.
xxii. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for
his review as to the fulfilment of the specified requirements.
xxiii. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the
substantial completion date.
3.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEED PERIOD
W. All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-
Contractor under this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum
period of 1 year and 5 years from the date of final completion certificate.
X. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the
Contractor shall immediately provide and install a replacement unit of
equal or superior performance until such time as the original unit is
repaired. Failure by the Contractor to comply within 6 hours of
notification, will entitle the Employer to purchase or hire a replacement
and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all related
disbursements.
Y. The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any
manufacturing or installation defects for a period of five years, starting
from the date of issue of the substantial completion certificate.
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.6 COORDINATION
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.4 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 CONNECTIONS
3.4 COMMISSIONING
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate
between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of
sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-
applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
and "Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret
test results for compliance with performance requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Parcel 34
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with
polystyrene.
Parcel 34 Specifications 810 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to
controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide
brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on
vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: [Reciprocating] [Scroll].
2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low- pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins,
complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. F.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 7 deg C .
G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 34
3.4 COMMISSIONING
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
2.3 CONFIGURATION
2.4 MATERIALS
2.6 FAN
2.8 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 34 Specifications 814 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and
configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and
configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and
coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
Parcel 34 Specifications 815 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish 1spare filter for each filter installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 spare fan belt for each unit installed.
Parcel 34 Specifications 816 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components
shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
1. Carrier Corp.(U.S.A.)
2. York International Corp. (U.S.A.)
3. Trane Company; North American Commercial Group. (U.S.A. or
France)
2.2 GENERAL
A. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed
models.
B. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.
C. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with
auxiliary water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor,
and motor control.
D. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be contained within a double walled
enclosure or sealed with a coating that is impervious to moisture.
Parcel 34 Specifications 817 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
Power Level 60 55 53 50 48
2.3 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet filter, chassis, coil, drain pan,
fan, and motor in blow- through configuration with hydronic cooling coil.
B. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter,
chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with
hydronic cooling coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.
2.4 MATERIALS
Parcel 34
2.6 FAN
Parcel 34
2.8 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual
locations before fan-coil unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Parcel 34 Specifications 820 of 1190
MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in
writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs
or replacements are made.
Parcel 34
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 34
Parcel 34
PART1- GENERAL
The Contractor shall be fully aware of the general terms and conditions of the
contractor and the related work contained in specification sections.
General Requirements
Electrical Services
Mechanical Services
Parcel 34
The contractor shall provide a detailed technical proposal with his tender,
including
The following information:
e. other submittals need by consultant and owner for approved the provided
system.
PART2- PRODUCTS
v). Personal computer workstation C/w graphic user interface and all
accessories as per needed.
c. The system shall be modular in nature and shall be suitable for expansion in
capacity and functionality.
Parcel 34
e. The failure of any single component shall not interrupt the execution
of control strategies or after operational devices.
2.3. NETWORK
a. The design of the BMS shall network the operator workstation with the
DDC Panels.
b. The system shall have the facility of interfacing with Internet and other
systems as mentioned in drawings, BOQ
b. Each outstation shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system.
On off control
Energy Management
Alarm Management
Maintenance support
Operator I/O
Dial up communication
Parcel 35 Specifications
c. Each outstation shall provide the following point inputs and outputs:
The DDC outstation shall have the ability to perform energy management
controls.
a. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with the fire alarm
system to indicate graphically the layout of the systems and to log events.
b. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with the KNX lighting
system. The system shall have the capacity of operating and monitoring the
status of the lighting system which are controlled via local panel board.
c. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with chillers, child water
pumps, and fan coil units for monitoring and controlling.
Parcel 35 Specifications
f. smoke fans inside the parking shall be monitored via the BMS.
g. The attached BMS input output schedule lists the points, which are connected
to the system, the contractor shall provide with his tender a full schedule of
equipment list and all item associated with the system
a. Analogue Inputs (IA): The AI function shall monitor each analogue input. Perform A
to D conversion, and hold the digital value in a buffer for interrogation. The AI
components shall include:
Signal conditioning for each analogue input. All analogue inputs shall
be individually calibrated for zero and span, in hardware or in
software.
Input ranges: Within the range of 0.20Vdc, plus to minus 10Vdc, and
0-50mA-dc.
b. Analogue Inputs (AI): The AI function shall monitor each analogue input.
Parcel 35 Specifications
d. Digital Inputs (DI): The DI function shall provide open/close contact closures,
or other two-state data indications. It shall be equipped with isolation and
protection against input voltage surges, up to 180Vac peak.
e. Digital Outputs (DO): The DO function shall provide contact closures for
momentary and maintained operation of field devices.
Closures shall have minimum duration of 0.1 second. The DO function shall be
equipped with the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
2. 15% from total of DDC’s at least one DDC similar to minimum installed DDC.
3.6 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which BMS shall be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to installer.
E. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the Contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation
only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
J. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the
testing to prevent unnecessary response.
K. Tests of all systems shall be made at intervals of not more than 24 hours.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced with fire the
alarm system:
3.10 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on the
installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the equipment. The
training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 10 days.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers end-user Low current devices such as push buttons, card
reader, nurse call push buttons …ETC.
B. Devices listed in this section may or may not be used on this project.
Specifications for devices not included in the Contract Documents are included in
case they are needed during construction phase.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Equipment shall comply with relevant standards, including the following (or updated
editions):
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the local regulations,
codes and standards applicable in the project/host country. Components shall
be standard approved manufacturers’ products, uniform and modular.
2. Standards Compliance: provide wiring devices, which are listed and comply
with applicable standards for the various applications indicated in the
specification.
3. 3Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
IEC 60669-1 and IEC 60884-1 pertaining to wiring devices.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer’s data on each electrical wiring device specified
for approval by the Engineer.
B. Submit Samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Engineer’s
comments on product data submittal. Include color and finish samples of device
plates and other items per Engineer’s request.
C. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC
60669-1 and IEC 60884-1 pertaining to wiring devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 INTRODUCTION
A. Use the products of a single manufacturer for each type of wiring device..
B. Surface or Recessed Boxes: provide compatible type with conduit or cable system
and of shapes and sizes compatible with standards applicable to switches, socket
outlets and lighting fixtures approved.
C. Unused Openings: close with knock-out closers manufactured for the purpose.
D. Blank Plates: provide blank plates on outlet boxes installed in the tenant space or
on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus installed does not have
suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be attached by a bridge
with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
E. Nonmetallic boxes are to be used for recessed outlets in ceiling or wall.
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.3 MATERIALS:
Large floor service boxes shall be a steel recessed floor box with four wiring
compartments or as indicated in drawings. Fully adjustable mounting hardware.
Wiring compartments shall be interconnected within the box with removable
dividers. Each floor box shall use flush activation. The cover shall be suitable for
the application. Specifically a flush access hatch with carpet trim or flush furniture
partition feed. The exact type of cover for each box will be determined by the
owner in conjunction with the interior finishes. Boxes with no connections shall
be equipped with the flush access hatch. The covers shall not be installed until the
floor covering or tile is installed. The boxes shall be protected from damage during
construction
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
PART 1 – GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
C. It’s the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above.
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and
special Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work of this division.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally
indicate equipment connections to be used for various systems. Provide system
raceway and wiring as required for actual systems installed on this project. Provide
all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or
description of any item, in the Drawings of Specification or both, carries with it the
instruction to furnish and install the item complete with all appurtenances or
accessories necessary to complete any required system, regardless of whether or
not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a
complete interpretation of the work.
Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the
electrical and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated
on final architectural and structural working drawings and on equipment shop
drawings.
I. Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the
dimensioning and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the
purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination
for the indicated work.
K. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings and
other parts of the Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of either is in
doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner's authorized
representative on such matters before commencing the Work.
A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work and
the Contractor shall submit for consultant review and approval evidence of the
suitability and number of his staff who will undertake these tasks.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance testing be
carried out by a specialist firm, full details of the capability and experience of such
firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and approval
A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and
equipment proposed for the Work.
B. Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be purchased
from other sources without the prior written agreement of the consultant.
The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the
guarantees of performance, the inclusive price for the twelve months following practical
Completion, and terms under which annual maintenance may be carried out thereafter.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
A. The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
TE - Telecom. Egypt.
BS - British Standards.
Parcel 35 Specifications
EN - European Standards.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
FM - Factory Mutual.
Installation”
Parcel 35 Specifications
"Agreement"
"Acceptance"
ii) When given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the
contract Documents or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with the
design intent and information given in the Contract Documents or contained in
subsequent Instructions.
iii) When given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those
methods are satisfactory.
A. The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design,
manufacture and site work for public health, mechanical and electrical installations
shall be those of the IEE Regulations, the IOP, plumbing Services Design Guide,
CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory Acts.
B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents shall be
that used in the IEE Regulations unless specifically identified by values or
descriptions are not covered by such terminology.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as meaning
"high voltage" under the IEE Regulations.
D. Any reference to M.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V A.C. or 1500V D.C.
between conductors, or 600V A.C. or 900V, D.C. between any conductor and earth.
F. "Fixing only" or - Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning “fix
only" empty cases, wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely storing,
protecting, taking from store, handling, hoisting lowering, fitting, placing in position,
fixing and connecting.
G. “Allow" - Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and
expense of the Contractor who is given the opportunity of
inserting such prices in the Bill of Quantities as he considers
relevant including overheads, profit and establishment charges, as
no subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. “As Necessary" - Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the
extent and by a method consistent with good practice
I. Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the plural, and
vice versa where the context requires.
J. Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in the
Contract Documents the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the Owner's
authorized representative for clarification.
A. All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with any
amendments current ten days before the date of issue of contract documents.
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.6 SYMBOLS
A. The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall be in
accordance with applicable standards and regulations and shall be agreed by the
consultant and shown on a separate drawing.
A. Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to enable
those tendering to interpret the design for the Works and to submit competitive
Tenders for the execution of the Works.
A. Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered documents
which constitute the Contract Documents.
A. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from the
consultant's drawings, including verifying the accuracy by taking dimensions on
site, in the preparation of any drawings by the Contractor and before the relevant
work proceeds.
A. Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any
discrepancy in the figures, scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the same
to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification before proceeding with the
work.
A. Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of the
Contractor's proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings shall be to
such scales, in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable the Work
to be installed and shall indicate all pipe layouts, bends, tees flanges, valves,
connections etc., necessary for installation and also particular installation methods
to be applied in certain instances, e.g. where connecting to existing services.
These drawings shall also relate to builder's work drawings confirming relationships
to valve pits, cable intakes... etc.
B. In respect of drainage drawings, shall take account of the exact location and type of
sanitary ware scheduled by the consultant, and all manholes and access points
Parcel 35 Specifications
shall be shown and dimensioned to take account of walls, paving and other
adjacent permanent work.
E. In respect of electrical installations shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
ii) General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.
iv) Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
v) Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables carried and
terminations.
vi) Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details of cables,
loads and terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
viii) Lighting layouts for normal and emergency purposes, detailing positions and
types of luminaries, switch positions and wiring connections.
ix) Fire detector and alarm positions and wiring routes with type details and
functions.
x) Earthing system with precise details of routing, conductor sizes, capacity and
connection.
xi) Lightning protection system with precise details of position, routing, conductor
sizes and terminations.
xii) Communication systems wiring, terminal equipment types and functions, wiring,
terminal equipment types and functions, wiring routes and details.
xiii) Standby generator distribution system, other power supply systems and
changeover arrangements including schematic and detailed wiring with
identification of those sections of the normal system operated from the standby
source.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for
architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the
Works and allow their integration into the project.
B. Such drawings should include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting and
supporting structures for plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors and ceiling
elements, provision of services requirements within voids above false ceilings or
below false floors, the integration of the services installations into the false ceiling
system and trenches, depressions, ducts, etc., in or through building and site
elements.
C. General arrangements and floor plan drawings giving builder's work requirements
shall be to a scale of 1:50.
E. In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has already
been given by the consultant such information shall be confirmed and amplified as
required above by the contractor (including confirmation of weights of items of
equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and incorporated in his drawings.
A. Shall mean the drawings produced for the purpose of explaining how the
components of the designed works are to be fabricated and assembled.
B. In respect of ductwork, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall indicate
the length of each duct section, the internal dimensions of the bare sheet steel,
dimensions of bends and fittings, location of stiffeners and supports, and shall
dimensionally locate the ducts in relation to the supporting or any adjacent
structure.
In addition, the location and size of all equipment, grilles, diffusers, access panels,
dampers, fire dampers, test points, penetrations and associated fittings for
automatic controls and instrumentation, etc., shall be shown.
C. In respect of pre-fabricated piping, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall
indicate tube sizes, pipe length between fittings, location and size of valves and
fittings, anchors, guides, supports and brackets, cleaning eyes and drain points,
etc. Drawings shall relate the location of the pipe to the supporting and adjacent
building structure.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the
relevant Works and all references to optional features, other machines of a range,
etc., shall be deleted or the original drawings redrawn to comply with this clause.
C. Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which shall mean
that:
i) The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct dimensions
and all connections precisely located;
ii) The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents, quoting
the reference numbers from the Contract Document;
iii) The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the works and
no extraneous or alternative parts are indicated;
E. All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or is
connected to the equipment as delivered and shall include the following minimum
information to enable the site connections and wiring to be completed:
A. Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the
control layout with each item uniquely identified, and including a brief description of
the controls operation and any associated interlocking.
B. In respect of electric controls shall mean logic sequence and wiring diagrams
showing the connections of all items of electric control equipment and interlocking
on the plant control schematics.
A. Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction, the
external and internal layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising internal
Parcel 35 Specifications
wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring diagrams, for the complete
systems in the panels. The drawings shall also indicate all pipe work and capillary
connections from the panels to external equipment.
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of
Contract Drawings.
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such
prints, at time of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
D. Make drawings available for the Architect’s periodic inspection and submit for
review with As-Built Drawings.
D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built and
referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the
Architect of acceptance.
A. Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings necessary to
install the Works. Drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and must be
fully coordinated with the architectural works and other disciplines and shall take
into account any modifications either to the building or the installation which may
have taken place, incorporating details of the actual items of plant and equipment to
be installed.
B. Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment and devices with the
relevant drawings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried through and
shown on all applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of so doing shall be
reimbursed to the Contractor as part of the cost of the variation of the instruction.
i) The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of installation
and in physical relationship to the work of others.
ii) The drawing does not contain any variations other than those authorized by the
Owner's authorized representative instruction.
iii) On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been clearly
annotated on the drawing and listed separately down the right hand side of the
drawing.
6.1 GENERAL
B. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the Owner's
authorized representative may require on any matter related to or affecting the
Works.
A. Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual to a specialist firm, the Contractor shall provide or obtain all necessary
information in respect thereof.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time which
goes beyond the period defined above shall be held to remain under guarantee for
the maximum period.
C. Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
ii) Valve schedules in the form of typewritten sheets showing the number, type,
location, application, service and symbol, and normal operating position of each
valve installed.
ix) Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency call-
out service applicable to any system or item of plant.
Parcel 35 Specifications
i) A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that
the Owner's staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
iv) Schedules of plant, equipment, valves, etc., by system, stating their locations within
the building, duties and performance figures, together with anticipated life
expectancies.
v) A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, valves, etc., installed number
cross-referenced to the record and diagrammatic drawings and Schedules. The
name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer of every item of
equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list numbers.
Parcel 35 Specifications
vi) Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details, and
printed operating and maintenance instructions for all items of plant and equipment
supplied under this contract.
vii) A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves, etc.,
used in the installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit tests,
corrosion testes, type testes, works tests, start-up and commissioning tests,
including those for air and water balancing.
i) Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and systems
installed.
iii) Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in
controlled variables during commissioning.
7.4 MAINTENANCE
ii) Lubrication Schedules for all lubricated items of plant and equipment.
iv) A list of recommended "running spares" required, being those items subject to wear
or deterioration and which may involve the Owner in extended deliveries when
replacements are required at some future date.
A. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and three copies of
the final Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four ring
binders with stiff covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-titled.
Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that
they may be unfolded without being in any detached from the rings.
B. Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the Installation
Drawings are in hand.
C. Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and
preliminary performance data) available at commencement of commissioning to
enable Owner's staff to familiarize themselves with the installation.
These should be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary insertions
for items which cannot be finalized until the works are commissioned and
performance tested.
8.1 GENERAL
A. Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of the
Works as each section is completed. The Owner's authorized representative and
the consultant shall be allowed to inspect these drawings on request during their
preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to the Owner's authorized
representative prior to Practical Completion.
A. The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted in due
time, and in any case not less than four weeks prior to Practical Completion, so that
at least one copy of the complete final version is in the possession of the Owner at
Practical Completion.
B. the Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The works
will not be accepted as complete and payment will be withheld until the required
number of copies of the complete final document have been received by the
Owner's Authorized representative.
C. If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall also be
phased accordingly and so arranged to finally form one comprehensive document.
A. If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required during
the progress of the works, or other information for the operation and Maintenance
Manual by the due dates. then the Owner's Authorized representative may instruct
a third party to provide any or all of these documents and the total cost of preparing
such documents shall be borne by the contractor.
10.1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the
applicable statutory Undertaken and other Authorities.
A. Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in respect
of any matter related to the works.
10.4 SAMPLES
A. Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for testing by
the applicable statutory undertaking or other authority.
A. Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply networks
including providing details of the proposed works and obtaining approval as
necessary.
A. Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory
Requirements so that written notice of any divergence the contractor may find
between the contract Documents and the Statuary Requirements, can be issued to
the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in due time so as not to
delay the progress of the works, Where Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities require to witness tests, the contractor shall give all necessary notice,
carry out such tests, provide attendance and facilities and copy any documents,
etc., as required.
A. Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all fees and
charges legally demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the Bill of Quantities
for fees and charges payable to Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's Authorized
representative with all necessary details of same.
10.9 AMENDMENTS
10.10 FORMALITIES
A. Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements, application
for supply forms, etc., and forward all such documents requiring the Owner's
signature to the Owner's Authorized representative in ample time.
B. Prepare installation Drawings for sprinkler systems, fire mains, pumps, alarms, fire
prevention systems and the like, together with related calculations and technical
information in a suitable form and submit same to the local Authorities and Fire
Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized representative.
A. The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections, re-
visits, re-testing, etc., except for such charges arising from any direction of the
Owner's Authorized representative arising from any direction in respect of defective
work.
A. Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and
services and adjusting existing equipment.
B. Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the Statutory
Undertakings and other Authorities is complete in order that the owner's Authorized
representative can issue directions in respect of covering up of the permanent
works by other contractors.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use and
installation thereof, shall comply with the material, test and other requirements of
the relevant . IEE wiring regulations 16th edition, IEC standards and BS standard.
C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled and
responsible craftsmen fully experience and in their respective trades.
D. Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials and for
returning re-usable packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E. Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the works
within the contract period and no claim will be allowed for materials ex-stock or from
any other source in the event of difficulty of supply.
D. Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items, fittings or
accessories which are used in quantity shall in each case be the produce of one
manufacturer.
B. Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weather-proof cover and
store pipes, conduits, Trunking and the like on racking.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act as heat
transfer surfaces. These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing to protect
them whilst in transit and storage on site.
E. Completely cover valve ports and ends of pipes or plug to prevent the ingress of
foreign matter, and additionally protect flanges against damage to the flange
surface.
F. Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery to site
and immediately prior to installation. Any material or equipment which is damaged
or faulty shall be replaced.
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works
and for the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment for all parts of
the works and for the provision of all necessary instruments, appliances and labor
in connection therewith. If any error shall appear or arise in the position, levels,
dimensions or alignment of any part of the works the setting out for which the
contractor was responsible, the contractor shall at his own expense rectify such
error.
B. The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's authorized
representative shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness thereof. The contractor shall carefully protection preserve all bench-
marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in setting out the works.
C. Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out for
builder's work.
A. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is
adequately protected. Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion of
each day and during periods of inclement weather, and all work exposed to view
on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage, stains and other
damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior to
commissioning.
B. Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary or
permanent works, or any adjoining land or property.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with all
parties involved including local authorities and statutory undertakings, prior to the
commencement of the works.
A. Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish
acceptability of the works following failure of any part thereof or any item therein to
meet the required standard or functional performance.
B. All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and shall
satisfy the purposes and accuracy’s required by the contract documents.
C. All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
A. Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all
inspection, testing, commissioning and performance testing.
The acceptable limits of harmonics voltages and currents shall be as per the
engineering recommendation IEEE-591.
The following table permitted harmonic currents for any one consumer at point of
common coupling
Parcel 35 Specifications
The contractor must include harmonic filters with appropriate size to be connected in
the network and/or at places where source of harmonics exists (such as elevator
panels, UPS...etc.) in order not to exceed the above mentioned figures.
12.1 GENERAL
A. Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's authorized
representative any instruments or other equipment he may require from time to time
for examining the accuracy, quality and performance of the contract works.
13.1 PROCEDURES
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up during
construction, and other matters described under certificates for materials and
equipment.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate
British Standard or as described. Should the contractor propose an alternative
item without the appropriate certification, independent testing shall be carried out at
the contractor's expense to determine compliance with the contract documents.
B. Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the manufacturer's
name, brand name and any other data that may be required to verify their exact
nature and relate it to the requirements of the contract documents.
B. All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's authorized
representative on request. On completion of the works all records shall be handed
over to the Owner's authorized representative unless otherwise directed.
C. These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title,
contractor's name, the identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the nature
and number of the observations and tests, the dates of testing, the name and
signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number and type of
deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D. Any record which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested does not
comply with the contract documents shall be submitted without delay in order that
the contractor's proposals for rectification may be assessed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display,
reference and inspection.
A. Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be dealt
with strictly in accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in the contract
document.
B. Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the
contract documents. Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or making
good that is considered will bring the defective work to the standard required by the
contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the contract documents.
C. The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any related
delay or disruption in the progress of the works, or any other consequential cost.
A. The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely affected
by inclement weather and he shall make good any damage so caused at his own
expense.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of any
commissioning or testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to witness all or
any of such tests, etc.
A. The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's authorized
representative or the consultant in connection with unsuccessful tests, including
costs incurred due to the inability of the contractor to make or complete a test,
having given the notice required above.
B. Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract documents
including but not limited to the following:
iv. Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all quantities
taken during the checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized
representative in advance of commissioning and the record for each complete
commissioning procedure shall be dated and signed by the person whom the
contractor has appointed to be formally in charge of commissioning.
A. When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of works he
shall give to the Owner's authorized representative written certification of this fact.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The certificate shall be signed by the director or manager responsible for the
contract.
B. Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's authorized
representative will performance tests be allowed to commence. Unless otherwise
agreed by the Owner's authorized representative in writing, where engineering
systems involve the works of more than one works contractor, performance tests
will only be allowed to commence when written certification from all the relevant
works contractors has been received.
C. Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate that the
works meet the requirements of the contract documents.
D. The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part of the
full test procedure if he considers it has been satisfactorily demonstrated, recorded
and properly certified at any earlier time but the contractor shall however allow in
his costs for carrying out all of the provisions in this clause.
A. Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum, minimum and
average outside shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
A. Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter design
conditions and allow for any special visits to site and provide any necessary
attendance during the defects liability period to set up, monitor and remove test and
recording equipment.
A. No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the contractor for
his own benefit without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized
representative.
B. Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract for the
benefit of the contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative, all
consumable spares, including light bulbs and tubes which have been so put to use
shall be replaced by new not more than seven days prior to practical completion.
A. Defects, shrinkage’s or other faults appearing at any time during the defects liability
period which have led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to lead to failure
or malfunction of any part of the works shall be made good immediately upon
receipt of any instruction or direction of the Owner's authorized representative.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the works,
the remedial action taken, subsequent re-testing and the results thereof.
C. Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or damage to,
the works which the contractor can demonstrate had been caused by incorrect
operation of the system, vandalism or action of a third party.
D. Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are finally
rectified so that an inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of the final
certificate.
A. The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's authorized
representative of the person who will be on site during working hours and who will
have the authority to take action on and be responsible for all aspects of safety,
health and welfare in connection with the contract works.
B. Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel, and
the general public, and in respect of the contract works provide for the safety,
health and welfare of work-people employed on the site to comply with the
requirements of the following and of all other relevant statutes, statutory
instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.
A. Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in work
involving the use of naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers involved in
the careless disposal of matches and cigarettes, etc., and the accumulation of
rubbish on site. Where considered necessary due to the nature of the works or as
directed by the Owner's authorized representative, institute a "No smoking” regime.
B. The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute necessity,
and extreme care taken in the use of all equipment likely to cause fire damage.
A. Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the
general public, adjoining residents and users of adjacent buildings.
If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such
arrangements as will prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the Owner
against any claims arising therefrom.
B. Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or Practice
for noise control on construction and demolition sites.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the environmental
health office under whose authority the works are being executed.
A. All apparatus where the normal operation is such that interruption of low frequency
or direct electrical currents occur shall be fitted with means of suppressing the radio
and TV interference so caused.
C. Reference shall be made to CP 1006 for guidance on the provision and installation
of equipment to meet the above standards.
D. C.B. radio shall not be used except with the written consent of the Owner's
authorized representative.
ii. The laser should be turned off or shuttered when not in use or unattended.
iii. The laser should be set well above or below the heads of employees when
possible.
iv. Employees should never stare directly into the laser beam or point the laser at
another person.
v. All laser equipment must bear a label indicating the maximum beam output,
which must not exceed 5 milli watts.
vi. Only qualified employees shall be assigned to install, adjust and operate the
laser equipment.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the location,
protection and any necessary temporary diversion of existing site services.
B. Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in plan
and section to permanent and accessible reference points date and sign the sketch
and submit same to the Owner's authorized representative.
C. Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with the
written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
A. Carefully protect and maintain all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to the works
and which are to be retained in the permanent works.
A. Six weeks prior to practical completion, submit a schedule of the additional spare
parts that the contractor recommends should be supplied over and above those
consumable spares required up to practical completion and for routine
maintenance.
B. Each item on the schedule shall have the manufacturer's current price inserted,
which shall also include for packaging and delivery to site.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. These additional spare parts may or may not be ordered during the currency of the
contract and therefore the cost thereof shall only be included in the contract sum
when the subject of an instruction by the Owner's authorized representative.
D. Spare parts shall be completely interchangeable and suitable for use in place of the
corresponding part supplied with the plant. They shall be greased and/or painted
before packing to prevent deterioration during delivery and storage.
E. Where spare parts are supplied by the contractor, each package shall be clearly
marked and numbered for identification in accordance with the schedule of spare
parts and referenced to the equipment list in the operation and maintenance
manual.
F. Spare parts shall be handed over to the appointed representative of the Owner.
19.2 TOOLS
A. At practical completion, provide two complete sets of tools and portable indicating
instruments for the operation and maintenance of all plant and equipment together
with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
A. Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works including
payment of statutory undertakings for same.
B. Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the building
including payment of statutory undertakings for same.
A. All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the permanent
works and for the protection of personnel on site.
B. Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all temporary
works required to be carried out together with all details of work required to uphold
existing services and intended temporary connections thereto.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary safety
equipment for access and inspection purposes for use by the contractor and for use by
other personnel on site as instructed by the Owner's authorized representative. Such
equipment shall include, but not be limited to, protective clothing, safety harness, gas
detection and emergency breathing apparatus for inspection of confined spaces.
A. The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing, works
testing, supplying and delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing,
commissioning, performance testing and handing over in working order the
complete engineering services installations described in the contract document.
3. Standby generation
4. Lighting installation
There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between the
requirements of his Works and the works of other. The Contractor's Works related to
the Works of others shall include but not be limited to the following.
ii) Lifts
i) Gas company
v) Sewerage company
The Contractor shall, before commencement his contract work, make himself fully
aware of the special setting-out and installation requirements of other contract Works
that affect the Works of this Section.
A. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems
under this Contract function and operate in full accordance with the Specification
and the testing and commissioning procedures described elsewhere in this
Specification.
B. Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative the complete integration of
the Contractors Works with the Works of others will be the responsibility of others.
C. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete until the
works are fully integrated and demonstrated in function and operation as being fully
integrated with the associated works by others.
D. The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized Representative
and others in order that the whole of the Works under this contract can be successfully
demonstrated to be functioning and operating with all other associated works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E. This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under the
Contract.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show
enclosed bus-assembly layouts and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Standards:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Plug-in Units: 2 percent of installed units, but not less than one unit of
each type installed.
2. Hookstick operator for plug-in units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements f o r
neutral and ground conductors as indicated and specified. Short circuit ratings of
busbars shall be in excess of those indicated for each location.
D. Busway Conductor Material: hard drawn Aluminum with not less than 98 percent
conductivity.
E. Busway: silver plated and insulated over entire length, with flame retardant 130
deg C class epoxy insulation.
A. Type: Indoor, 600/1000 V grade, 3-phase, 5-wire with fully sized neutral and half
size earth bar, insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to
provide degree of protection of IP43 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the
Drawings at site maximum ambient temperature conditions. Busbar is to comply
with approved standards. Short- circuit capacity is to be at least equal to value
at main protective device, for 1 second. Where indoor busway is partially running
through outdoor / wet areas, these portions are to be IP66 rated.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall are to be arranged in
joint stacks incorporating busbar conductors, and each joint stack shall is to be
arranged for tightening with a single bolt. Joint design shall is to be such that any
length or fitting of a run may be removed without disturbing the connecting lengths.
G. Busbar is to be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes.
Busbar cutting on site is not acceptable.
Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3
m (10 ft). length of busbar. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: adjustable for leveling and spring tension
and arranged to permit relative movement between floor and busbar.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close
fitting to busbar arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busbar
penetration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in the
approved applicable standards.
D. Fire Stops: install fire stops where busbar penetrates fire- -rated walls and
floors. Seal between busbar and opening and around opening with sealant or
sealing mortar having fire rating not less than that of wall, or floor penetrated.
Where busbar manufacturer's sealing and stopping devices are not fire rated,
provide fire stopping as required to satisfy authority having jurisdiction and
Engineers approval.
E. Weather Seal: install integral weather seal where busbar penetrates exterior wall
or roof. Provide appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Support busbar from the building structure independently from other suspended
items.
3.2 EARTHING:
A. Test busbar runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
B. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busbar, and
connected equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity
from source to equipment.
C. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busbar components with 1000 Volt d.c.
megohms- meter and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable
values. Measure each phase to phase and each phase to earth. Any reading
should be better than 50 megohms- meter.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest.
Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT:
A. Align busbar runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists.
Provide support stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is
excessive movement.
B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings, fuse ratings, and starter overload
elements against connected loads and revise as required to conform to
recommended values.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized inside and
outside, threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for
switch legs.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped galvanized
outside, threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for
switch legs.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, inside and outside
thread less, minimum 20mm, unless other wise noted ; minimum 15mm for switch
legs.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Wireways: Steel, minimum 1.5 mm thickness, with baked enamel finish, screw-on
covers, raceway knockout, elbow fittings, hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet
adapter; size as noted or required.
A. GENERAL
1. Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings, knockout closures,
locknuts, mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster
ears, and plasterboard expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with
device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
situation.
3. Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type of earthing
(grounding) conductor to be terminated.
3. Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of
the enclosure.
6. Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings are used to
prevent passage of water vapor, utilize the continuous drain type.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight couplings
and connectors of the gland and ring compression type; set screw type connectors
are permitted for interior dry locations only, indent type connectors are not permitted.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat angle wedge
type.
4. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity
and fault currents.
H. SUPPORTS
2. Conduit hangers, designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled closure bolt
and nut and provision for receiving hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38 cm x 38 cm, 2.7 mm thickness
steel, cold formed, dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than 0.95 cm diameter
steel.
A. OUTLET BOXES
1. PVC heavy gauge for concealed work, and galvanized cast iron or aluminum with
threaded hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes, cubic inch capacity, and sizes
as required, suitable for installation at respective location.
2. With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout openings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and grounding
screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment
grounding.
5. For exposed work utilize 10 cm round x 5 cm deep for mounting on ceilings and
10 cm square x 5 cm deep for mounting on walls, except as otherwise required by
construction, devices, or wiring.
6. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to match adjacent
plates.
A. Heavy gauge PV, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior work, and
galvanized cast iron and/or 2.7 mm thickness stainless steel with threaded hubs and
gaskets for outdoors and damp locations; boxes of shapes, cubic cm capacity, and
sizes as required, suitable for installation at respectable location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings are to be
installed and substrate which will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of
Parcel 35 Specifications
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
7. Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and boilers. Also, do not obstruct
headroom, doorways, or walkways, with raceway.
Parcel 35 Specifications
11. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel. Clear
any conduit which rejects ball mandrel.
12. Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required to satisfy
the system cabling requirements.
13. Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways
so that required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain
to raceway or cable. Where raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable
code.
15. For empty raceways over 3 m long, provide fish or pull wire. For 3.8 cm and
larger pull wire to consist of steel core nylon rope and terminal ball.
17. Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its
supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning
ducts.
18. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. Avoid
present and future openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so
indicated on drawings.
19. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45 cm from parallel runs of flues or boiler
breaching and 15 cm from hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever
possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Provide
thermal insulation where these separations cannot be maintained.
20. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
21. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where
required, use 3-piece union or split coupling.
22. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have
been removed.
23. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to
enclosed electrical wiring.
24. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm
separation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
25. Do not install aluminum products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit
interconnections.
26. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
27. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to
which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
28. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and
damage.
29. Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to the building
structure and adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent
movement.
30. Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural Drawings or Interior
Design drawings, details and finishes. Take caution in locating outlet to allow
for overhead pipes, ducts, and variations in arrangement, thickness in finish,
window trim and other Architectural Construction Details.
31. Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense to the
Owner. Refer to Architect any condition that would place an outlet box in an
unsuitable location, such as a molding, break glass in wall finish, or behind a
heating enclosure.
32. Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within same or
similar areas. Where mounting height or location of outlets is not shown or
specified, mount outlet as best suited for equipment connected thereto, or as
directed.
34. Except where special outlets are required, provide 10 cm square wall outlets
with single gang raised cover and bushed plate for signaling systems.
36. For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark (stencil 3 M on
centers, including in hung ceiling, with the notation, "Danger, Volts," indicating
the actual voltage (i.e. "Danger 22,000 Volts," "Danger 380 Volts").
a. With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and sloped away
from the building.
b. Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block 1.5
M on center. Anchor conduits to prevent their movement.
Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15 cm apart. Make all joints
Parcel 35 Specifications
watertight.
38. For and direct burial cable entering the building and for the manholes preceding
the conduits entry to the building, perform the following:
a. Plug all empty raceways.
b. Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance fittings utilize a
gland assembly cable of providing a seal around the conduit or cable to
withstand 15 M head of water without leakage.
c.
Slope away from building.
d. In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm metal plates may
be utilized subject to the following:
39. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities
to avoid damaging them.
40. Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to
weather or moisture.
41. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Coordinate trim
with type of finish, i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
B. For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas, i.e.,
ballrooms, meeting rooms, restaurants, guest rooms, etc., provide the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp locations, for
exposed runs on the exterior of the building, in concrete slabs, for all feeder
conduits, in mechanical equipment spaces, and as noted.
3. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with
concrete envelope with walls not less than 8 cm thick.
1. Use intermediate metal conduit in lieu of rigid steel conduit where permitted by
applicable electrical codes.
2. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with
concrete envelope not less than 8 cm thick.
1. Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits only, in dry locations (hung
ceilings, hollow block walls and furred spaces) and for fire alarm, smoke and fire
detection system where in accordance with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
1. Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection for short
connections where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable and for final
connections to vibrating equipment.
2. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor terminal
boxes, transformers and other vibrating equipment.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors for lighting system and
telephone service for lightning protection down conductors and only as
otherwise indicated. Provide separate earthing (ground) wire.
2. Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, apply approved solvent cement and
quarter turn as drawing up tight in accordance with recommendations of
manufacturer.
3. Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building from
underground locations.
4. Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water and steam
lines.
5. Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete encase
conduit for all runs above 50 mm.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings and
accessories. The dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is
expressly forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square
and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed.
Care should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all
faces of conduits and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered
fully into box spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for
jointing purposes.
8. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the
drawings or when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment,
conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries are not available,
non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used.
9. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are changes of
temperature in excess of 25 C, flexibility of the conduit to cope with the
associated movement shall be achieved by a method approved by the
manufacturer of the conduit.
Parcel 35 Specifications
10. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25 mm
and below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot.
A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The radius of
any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 time the outside diameter of the
conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending
purposes. The use of conduit bends having factures and conduits with any
wrinkles on formed bends is not permitted.
11. Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any
operations involving casting, concrete pouring, screed laying and plastering.
Fixing shall be by means purpose made clips which shall not cause deformation
of the conduit. Fixings shall be used at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5
meters and the distance of clips on each side of bends or accessories shall not
exceed 150 mm.
2
12. A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm with green and yellow
insulation shall be installed throughout, sufficiently long to allow looping in and
of fittings and accessories. Where expansion couplers are used allowance shall
be made in the length of the protective conductor to accommodate any
expansion.
13. Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system, metal conduit
boxes shall be used. Fittings may not be hung from the PVC conduit system
and full details of the means of support shall be shown on the Co-ordination and
Builders Work Drawings.
14. Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes shall be
employed to avoid the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be connected to the
boxes by means of male bushes and couplers.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass
from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces,
or similar spaces.
A. Conduits and wire ways installations are to be as described below, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
D. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations
comprising lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system
wiring, including mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms,
service areas and where subjected to Mechanical damage. Use rigid steel
conduit in areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is
not acceptable.
F. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false
ceiling wiring installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route
lighting/central battery circuits, fire alarm & security installations.
I. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits,
low current, communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in
concrete masonry earth, under floor, except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: - Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its
accessories and fittings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
backgrounds of cable trays including, but not limited to, offsets and
connections. Show accurately scaled cable trays with locations of
supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate
relationship of cable trays to other associated equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL
7. Cable Support System: Aluminum: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts and
5052 alloy for parts fabricated from sheet.
8. Cable trays shall be perforated and manufactured from mild steel and to
be galvanized after fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip
galvanized
Parcel 35 Specifications
12. All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles
to the cable trays.
13. Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the
nearest bare earthing conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
14. Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high load bearing
capabilities across wide spans, maximum deflection should not exceed
0.5% in the longest span. Also it shall be mechanically designed to give
high torsional rigidity and good resistance against lateral loading.
17. Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It
shall be manufactured from mild steel 1.5 mm or 2 mm thick, finished
hot-dip galvanized with a 20 mm return flange on both edges. Edge
height 80mm.
18. All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after
manufacture to give resistance to corrosion.
19. Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the
drawings.
20. Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter
of cables laid on the tray. Main feeders shall be laid such that their outer
radius are spaced a distance equal to the diameter of he largest cable.
21. All Cable trays shall be covered with cover in parking areas, open space
and roof.
B. SAFETY FACTOR
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and that tray
may be readily assembled and joined without the use of special tools.
C. Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members
and (rungs, bottom) as straight sections.
2. Cable ladder shall be perforated and manufactured from hot dip mild steel
and galvanized after fabrication.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify Architect
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and floors.
Seal between cable trays and opening and around opening with fire-rated
sealant not less than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before
ordering cable tray.
I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting
cable tray as required.
A. Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of bonding,
and earthing connections, and to demonstrate compliance with earthing
requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified
elsewhere in these specifications.
A. Work includes providing all wires, cables and connections, complete with all
accessories in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for
a complete system. Wiring size referenced in this Section is metric, except as
noted. For special wiring for individual systems, refer to respective Section of
these Specifications.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Submit 25 cm length cables of each type and size of wires and
Cables, Manufacturer Name, insulation class and reference no. Should be
indicated on the Submitted Sample.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. GENERAL
Provide all of the mains cables shown on the drawings or detailed in the cable
schedules or the schedules of work.
All single and multi-core cables shall comply with IEC 502 and all
conductors shall be copper P.V.C. and XLPE insulated and P.V.C. sheathed
(0.6/1 K.v), armoured or none armoured type as indicated on the drawings.
Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 2 mm2 and above for lighting
and power, and 1.5 mm2 and above for low current systems and control
circuits. Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors. Flexible cords
shall have finely stranded conductors.
For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer
stating its origin, manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it complies
with. In the absence of such documents, the Engineer reserves the right to
require that tests, at the Contractor's expense, be performed by an official
laboratory on samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the Site.
Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with
the requirements mentioned above.
Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their
accessories at terminating ends or at tap-off points, earthing and bonding etc.
Carried to completion.
The definition of "Low Voltage" given in the IEE wiring regulations shall apply
and "High Voltage" shall mean any voltage higher than low voltage.
Parcel 35 Specifications
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or
other proof of origin intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until the
cable is required for use, and shall be retained for inspection.
Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the cable
manufacturer's recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's
recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's specialists shall
be followed if any special conditions or unusual circumstances apply.
Where cable sizes are not indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules,
the contractor shall be responsible for determining the correct size of each
cable.
Cable sizes shall be determined on the basis of current rating and/or voltage
drop and/or earth loop impedance, together within allowance for grouping with
other cables and the method of installation, whichever is relevant, after taking
into account the type of cable, the ambient conditions, the method of installation
and the disposition of each cable relative to other cables.
Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be
submitted before any orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable supports
and fixing devices shall be designed to have a factor of safety of not less than4
Wherever cables pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, a heavy-
gauge PVC sleeve shall be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12
mm, but not more than 25 mm, than the diameter of the cable.
The length of any such sleeve shall be such that each end projects by 5 mm
beyond the surface of the element through which it passes, and the ends of
they bore shall be provided with an adequate radius to prevent chafing of the
cable sheath.
Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the building's
fire compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be
sealed after the cables have been installed, so as to give the same standard of
fire resistance as the original wall or floor. Details of the proposed sealing
method shall be submitted prior to implementation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
All cables shall be separated from water, gas, and other piped services by a
distance of not less than 150 mm unless the circumstances of the installation
make this impossible.
Provide wires for final circuits as shown on the drawings to all wiring devices such as
lighting fixtures, sockets, switches and all electrical devices.
All wires shall comply with IEC 60227 (450 – 750) volt.
Cabling and wiring installation shall be performed strictly in compliance with the
IEE wiring regulation.
Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on galvanized
steel trays or in approved special cable supporting and protecting raceways.
Cables shall be fixed to the supporting structures with approved galvanized cast
steel clamps at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
Wires and cables shall be routed in such a way that they are not exposed to
excessive heat or to corrosive agents. If such a condition cannot be complied
with the wires and cables shall be of a type designed for the particular condition
or enclosed in the necessary protective raceway, duct, concrete etc.
Final sub-circuit work originating from light and power panel boards shall be
arranged as shown on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, all final sub-circuit for
corridor lighting and sockets shall be multi core cables installed on cable tray
above false ceiling.
Parcel 35 Specifications
At least 150 mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, switch point and
pull box for the making up of joints, or the connection of fixtures or devices,
except where conductors are intended to loop without joints through lamp
holders, receptacles and similar device boxes.
All wires and cables shall be manufactured to comply with the relevant standard
specification I.E.C. or equal standard. The cables delivered to the Site shall
bear the mark of identification of the manufacturer and the Standard to which it
is manufactured. Any cable not having identification marks shall be rejected.
Except in the case where it is terminated in full view onto a clearly labelled
switch, starter, distribution board or similar piece of apparatus, or onto a motor
or other item of equipment the function of which is evident, each and every
cable end shall be provided with an approved means of identification. In
particular, this requirement shall apply to all cables terminating on the back, or
in the base, of cubicle type or similar switchboard or control panel and in any
other case where the function of the cable is not immediately obvious.
(i) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely fixed to the cable sealing
box.
(ii) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely tied to the cable with
galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wire.
The means of identification shall give the cable size, number of cores, and
function together with the cable reference number if one has been allocated.
All cables run above ground shall be identified by means of engraved brass or
aluminum label at intervals not exceeding 30 meters. The labels shall bear
details of the cable size, number of cores, function, and reference number (if
any) and shall be securely attached to the cables with galvanized iron or tinned
copper binding wires.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Wires and cables of sizes over 16 mm² shall terminate with sweated or
compression type lugs. Insulating sleeve shall be used to protect any exposed
part of the conductor or sleeve projecting beyond any insulated shrouding or
mounting of a live terminal.
Glands for the various types of multi core cables shall be purpose made and
suitable for the equipment enclosure.
Joints and taps in multi core or single core feeders and sub- feeders shall be
affected in purpose made kits consisting of outer containing mould,
thermosetting insulating compound (or resin) and by use of appropriate tinned
copper ferrules crimped onto the conductors and taped before pouring in the
compound.
Joints or taps on L.V. wires and cables shall be permanently accessible, and
unless permitted otherwise shall be made only in tap boxes or cabinet gutters.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes larger than 10 mm² shall be made by
means of pre-insulated spring-type spring shall be corrosion resistant tempered
metal. Enclosure shall be a steel shell with an overall vinyl cap and skirt.
Connector shall be equal to "Scotch lock" as manufactured by the 3M
Company.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes 16 mm², and larger shall be made by
two-bolt clamps protected with an insulating phenolic cover.
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
H.V. cables between the high voltage switchgears and the transformers shall be
XLPE with three cables single core, 240 mm² Aluminum conductor.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The cables shall comply with the IEC Recommendations 228, 229, 230, 270,
502 and 540.
CONSTRUCTION
The thickness shall be 5.5 mm to correspond with the relevant IEC publication
502 for 24 k.V. insulation level.
The three cores shall be assembled together, the interstices filled with
non-hygroscopic material so that the completed cable assembly is of substantial
circular cross-section.
The inner covering wrapping the three cores together shall be of extruded
corrosion resistant material. The materials used for the filler and inner covering
shall be suitable for the cable operating temperature. The thickness of the inner
covering shall be in accordance with IEC - 502.
Identification of phases shall be carried out by using numbered plastic tapes (1,
2 & 3) throughout the whole core under the copper shield.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS
Shielded power cable termination kits shall be factory engineered for the
application.
Termination kits shall meet or exceed all rating requirements of IEEE-48 for
class I terminations and the test sequence prescribed by IEEE-404, including
130 C load cycling and 130 C impulse withstand.
Each kit shall include lengths of heat-shrinkable tubing to help prevent corrosion
and shifting of the shielding layers between the boot and the phase termination
installation point.
When grounding conductors are included, the kit includes lengths of heat-
shrinkable tubing and sealant material to seal each conductor from the boot to
its connection point.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Cables Volts
Low 500
voltage
> 1000
Medium
voltage
The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any pressure tests
and the insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in DIN/VDE or
NEC standards for all cables up to 3.3 k.V. The contractor shall submit
insulation resistance figures for cables above 3.3 k.V.
The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect
of other types of cable.
For the purpose of this specification, the description "small wiring" shall apply to
all low voltage cables and wiring connected directly or indirectly to the public
Parcel 35 Specifications
electricity supply system, or to any independent private supply system for the
purpose of supplying electricity to general power and lighting circuits, except the
following:
(ii) Fire detection, alarm, and other security circuits operating at a voltage
level of 24 volts or less between conductors.
(iii) Cables and wiring forming part of a system for the control and/or
supervision of the building engineering services.
All of the above cables and wiring included are fully described elsewhere in this
Specification under appropriate headings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant British
Standards.
The contractor shall submit with his Tender details of any internationally
recognized Standards and Codes of practice he proposes to use in lieu of, or in
addition to, those stated.
All wiring shall be carried out using one or more of the following wring systems,
as indicated on the drawings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant DIN/VDE
and IEC Standards.
PVC cables to and rubber cables to IEC/DIN/VDE shall not under any
circumstances be run underground.
Where cables have subjected to temperatures below 0 oC, care shall be taken
to ensure that they are above that temperature for 24 hours before installation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Fire resistant cables will be used as indicated on the drawings and it shall be
copper conductors, XLPE/Steel tape armoured type fire rated for 3hours (950
°C), category C,W and Z with normal operating temperature (90 °C) to meet BS
6387 and shall have insulation class level not less than (0.6/1 KV).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway.
E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable
grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
H. Complete conduit or raceway installation (joints made up tightly and the entire
run secured in place) before pulling wire and cable.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. Support wires and cables at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate
points as required by the approved manufacturer and applicable electrical
codes.
J. Seal, between the wire and conduit with a non-hardening compound approved
for the purpose, cable and wire entering a building from underground where
cable exits the conduit.
K. Install cable spacers where required. Provide conduit fittings for spacing of
cables at terminations, consisting of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or
malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and inserts of non-metallic
insulating material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being
spaced.
M. In wire ways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3
phases and neutral (if used) as installed in conduits to limit conductor
unbalanced loading.
N. Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminal ends and lighting fixtures for
convenient connections and servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.
O. Provide splices and taps in accessible boxes, panel board’s fittings, gutters,
terminal panels, etc., only. Provide materials compatible with the conductors,
insulation’s and protective jackets on the cables and wires.
Q. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or- better mechanical strength
and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use connectors which are
compatible with conductor material.
R. Tie all circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, and junction
boxes.
Parcel 35 Specifications
V. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and
insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and
wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will
remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning
wire. Cut armored jackets with tools made specifically for that purpose.
A. Check for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with drawings.
3. 100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits, 18.5 kW (25 HP) and over
E. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short
circuits.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Samples of all wiring devices detailed in this section and a choice of cover
plates shall be submitted to the Owner Authorized Representative for
approval/selection.
B. Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant European or International
Standards.
C. Each type of wiring devices where applicable shall be of the same manufacture
and where necessary of the same maker's catalogue number or description to
provide consistent appearance and finish.
D. Flush mounting wiring devices shall be fitted into purpose made of PVC boxes
only. All wiring devices shall be flush mounted except in plant rooms.
E. All boxes or sections of boxes for use with wiring devices must incorporate a
suitably marked earth terminal. Accessory plates shall be secured to boxes by
not less than two fixing screws. Where these screws do not provide adequate
earth continuity to metal plates or plates including parts to be earthen then a
bonding connection shall be provided from the earth terminal to the plate or
part. The bonding shall be protected with a green/yellow insulated sleeve. The
above requirement shall not apply to the earth socket on a socket outlet when
directly connected to a protective conductor.
F. All wiring devices marked weather-proof shall not be less than IP 44 for damp,
IP 55 for wet, IP 67 for wet outdoor.
G. Where more than one phase of a supply exists in a multi gang box the following
requirements shall apply:
A clearly visible label showing the maximum voltage present shall be arranged
as a warning notice before access can be gained to live parts.
Wiring and accessories connected to each phase shall be separated from each
other by fixed screens or barriers.
H. All faceplates for switches and sockets flush mounted type should be high
quality Plastic material.
2.2 SWITCHES
A. All switches for lighting and associated circuits shall comply with BS or DIN and
shall be quick make and break for use on a.c. supplies. Switches shall be
single pole and rated not less than 10 A, 250 V for use only on a.c. systems,
including fluorescent or inductive loads to DIN/VDE or NEC standards.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Switches for lighting shall be PVC plate switch type with rocker operation, and
in single or multi gang formation where installed in groups.
E. Ceiling switches shall be of the all insulated pull cord type suitable for mounting
on a conduit box and having an overlapping plate. Each unit shall be complete
with 1.5 m white cord terminating in a white/red acorn. The unit shall be rated
at 5A at 220 V and suitable for inductive, fluorescent or resistive loads.
F. Push buttons single units or forming part of a multi gang unit shall be rated at 10
A, 250 V. The switch shall be single/double-pole and arranged for push to
make/ to break the contacts as applicable for the application.
G. All push buttons and switches located in corridors or stairs shall be illuminated
type.
Type (i) shall be supplied and installed in all areas except in kitchens, laundry,
plant rooms, parking areas and where marked weather-proof.
III. B.S. standard 13/10 A with different shape shall be used for sockets connected
on UPS system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
IV. Plates for emergency receptacles in all back of house areas , colored red and
permanently marked emergency in 6mm white letters , except in public spaces
plate color to match adjacent plates and engraved "Emergency" in 6mm red
letter
All disconnect switches for F.C.U. units shall be double pole with pilot lamp and flex
outlet.
Outlet plates for cables or flexible cords shall be similar to switch plates and complete
with not less than two fixing screws. Terminals shall be provided to accommodate
incoming wiring and outgoing cables or flexible cord. The unit shall be unfused and
shall incorporate an outgoing cable clamp or cord grip. The cover plate of white
moulded plastic shall have a smooth aperture for the cable/flexible exit.
Floor box shall be made of zinc die-cast or heavy duty plastic type, cover to be made
of nickel galvanized to withstand 300 kg with non-permanent deformation.
The floor box should have hinged lid without recess, lid offset for used position (cable
outlet).
The floor box must suite the No. of approved outlets as indicated on the drawings.
The floor box should have a degree of protection ‘IP67’ for outdoor installation.
The floor box should be suitable to the used tiles (carpet or marble) floor and to be
approved by Arch. Consultant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris.
I. Verify exact locations of switches and receptacles with architectural and interior
design drawings.
J. Install switches indicated on plans for the various rooms directly adjacent to the
entrance door and as shown on the approved shop drawings.
K. Check the architectural drawings for the door swings and locate all switches on
the lock side of the openings. Verify in field prior to switch outlet installation.
L. Coordinate all final mounting heights with Architect's elevations and details prior
to installation. Where heights are different than those indicated or specified, the
architectural heights take precedence.
M. Where two or more switches control more than one 220 volt branch circuit,
barrier boxes to prevent 380 volts occurring in any one box.
Parcel 35 Specifications
N. Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, gang
mount such devices una common face plate.
PART 1 - GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL
Parcel 35 Specifications
5. With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300
ampere.
6. Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
B. Open and close coils rated 220 volts or 380 volts, 50 Hz, unless otherwise
indicated or required.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in
accordance with the codes governing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
E. Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus
bars and terminal strips. Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.
F. Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal
strips, rectifiers, switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
SECTION 26281610
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. SWITCH INTERIOR
1. Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
3. Industry listed lugs for aluminum and/or copper cable and front
removable.
B. SWITCH MECHANISM
C. ENCLOSURE
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
E. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and
controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide box with spare set of each size fuse used on project. Provide
nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set
complete with engine generator batteries, charger, silencer, day tank, generator
control panel and all required appurtenances and accessories. Refer to appropriate
section of Specifications and drawings for additional requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the
job site, at which spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a
full-time employee of the manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained
and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service.
E. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
. provision will govern.
F. Equipment Rating: 230/400 volt, 3 phases, 4 wires, 50 HZ, 1500 rpm, Kw rating as
indicated on the drawings. At temperature 50 C and altitude 1000 m and humidity
90% at 0.8 power factor and capable of continues operation at rated output for the
duration of any utility power failure. Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation
of the set at rated generator RPM when equipped with all necessary operating
accessories, such as air cleaners, radiator fan, lubricating oil pump, fuel transfer
pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor alternating current generator
and exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
G. The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine,
generator, and all major items of auxiliary equipment).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets
and components, including:
a. Make of engine.
b. Number of cylinders.
Parcel 35 Specifications
k. Exciter type.
4. Silencer.
5. Day tank.
9. All auxiliaries.
C. Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all
accessories furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load
test including the following:
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per
hour). Frequency and voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits
specified herein.
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load,
and 2 hours full load. Test shall be conducted at 0.8 power factor.
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their
respective audio and visual alarms.
D. Ten working days written notice shall be given prior to factory tests being carried out
and all necessary facilities shall be made available for the consultant to witness such
tests.
E. A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment
shall be provided, together with suitable means of identification, storage and
securing.
B. Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C. Upon delivery, inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit
with this specification.
E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and
handling shall be in full accordance with engine-generator manufacturers'
requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical
equipment contained therein.
F. Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new
equipment.
G. Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and
braced for any overland and vertical travel.
A. The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a
period of five years after guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the
following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the
generator set under system load.
1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment
must provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for
Schedule Oil Sampling.
a. Iron
b. Chromium
c. Copper
d. Aluminum
e. Silicon
f. Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of
acceptance and include the following:
b. Bottle (10).
5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical
reading. If readings are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is
operating within established parameters.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the automatic start diesel generating
sets with all necessary switchgear, control panel and accessories all as either herein
specified or shown on the Drawings.
The size of the set shall be standby rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when
operating at the specified frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and
humidity.
The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details shown on
the drawings, but a final detailed and dimensioned layout suitable for construction shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval, prior to ordering of equipment.
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare
parts may be obtained.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be
such as to minimize noise and vibration.
Materials and workmanship - All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units
specified herein, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and highest grade.
Manufacturer - the unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the
engine manufacturer. It shall be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized
dealer having a parts and service facility in the area.
Warranty - Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective
parts or workmanship under dealer's standard warranty. Warranty period shall in no
case be less than one year of unrestricted service commencing from date of putting the
unit into service and not limited to any fours limitation.
Tests - the generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing.
Prior to acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any
defects and be subjected to full load test.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528.
The loss of normal power from the transformer shall automatically cause the generating
set to start through Automatic Transfer Switch.
The emergency generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full
speed from cold condition within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse.
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall
come to rest for 10 seconds. Two further attempts shall be automatically performed with
intermediate periods of rest. Should the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall
sound and signal "start failure" shall illuminate.
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation
purposes. For this purpose the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch
arranged for OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO. It shall be possible to run the engine with or
without operation of the Emergency Distribution Board circuit breakers.
The Diesel generator set must still be running a 3-5 minutes after transfer and after
removal of all load to ensure that a change-over in the event of a repeated mains failure
can rapidly be realized and to obtain a cooling effect to avoid an accumulation of heat.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
The engine-generator sets shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base
suitable for skidding as indicated in the drawings.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to
wear.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the
drive and absorb the transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded
by a coupling ring and adequate steel guards.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all
instrumentation and control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This
may be achieved either by mounting the combined engine/generator unit to a
separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on the main frame, or by mounting the entire
main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing the machine instrument panel
by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by its own resilient
mounting. The mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure and
thickness shall be approved by the manufacturer and the Engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual
turbo-charged and after cooled and not series turbocharged. The set shall operate on
diesel fuel oil at 1500 R.P.M. The net power rating of the engine under worst site
conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric power indicated on the generator
taking into consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled, radiator type with gear driven water pump
system shall be pressurized and equipped with a heavy-duty radiator mounted integrally
with the set and cooled by a refers flow fan. A fan coil and hand protection guard shall
be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be measured and controlled by means of one or
more thermostats.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full
flow lubricating oil filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger.
Filter system shall be equipped with a spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance
against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in the event the filters become clogged.
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of
camshafts and connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by
gravity from a day fuel tank. It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter
elements. The fuel system shall be equipped with a built in, gear type, engine driven
fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a head of 250 cms. For supplying fuel
through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with
flanges, flexible exhaust expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential
exhaust silencer which shall be fitted with a drain plug at its lower end to permit
evacuation of condensed humidity. The exhaust piping shall be insulated with asbestos
tape with a total thickness not below 10 mm.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible either manually by means of push
button or automatically by means of the automatic control panel. The starting system
shall consist of a 24 volts d.c. starter motor, heavy duty 24 volts lead - acid battery and a
suitable automatic trickle battery charger. The starting pinion shall automatically
disengage when the engine.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop
adjustments shall be provided and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control
within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signalling lights shall be provided to shut
down the engine in the event of engine overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, and high
cooling water temperature.
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Tachometer.
8. Fuel pressure.
2.5 GENERATOR
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen
protected, revolving field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct
connection to the engine at the flywheel end.
viii Insulation Class "F" stator class "F" rotor with temperature rise according
to class F 105 C over 50 C ambient temperature.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The exciter shall be of the static type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral
part of the alternator.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and
load power factor between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal
voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is
connected to its load circuit.
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530
(less than 5% deviation. The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or
equivalent.
Engine-Generator Set Control: The control shall have automatic remote start capability.
A panel mounted switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the
engine in the RUN position and allow the engine to start and run by closing remote
contact, and stop by opening the remote contact when in the REMOTE position.
a. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle,
nonadjustable, shall consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 10
seconds duration followed by a rest period of approximately 10 seconds duration.
Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and running. Two means of cranking
termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other. Failure to start after three
cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually indicate an over
crank shutdown on the panel.
b. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon: failing to start after the
specified time (over crank), overspeed, low, lubricating oil pressure, high engine
temperature, or operation of a remote manual stop station.
d. The control shall provide a twelve light engine monitor on the control panel; one red
light for each of the four shut downs (except the remote manual stop), and one yellow
light each for the high engine temperature and low engine oil pressure pre-alarms,
and one green run light. The control panel monitor shall include; a flashing red light to
indicate the generator set is not in automatic start mode, a yellow light to indicate low
coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate low fuel, and two red lights for auxiliary
use (for a total of twelve).
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The
engine-generator set starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut
down circuits shall be independent of indication and pre-alarm circuits. Individual
relay signals shall be provided for each indication for external circuit connections (not
Parcel 35 Specifications
to exceed 1/2 amp draw) to a remote annunciator. A common alarm contact for
external connection to an audible alarm shall be provided.
e. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine
temperature fault.
g. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall
mounted type as indicated on the drawings. The control shall include surge
suppression for protection of solid state components. A front control panel
illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided. Control panel mounted
indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge, Coolant
Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage
adjusting rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage +/- 5% from rated value;
Analog AC Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy;
Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency
meter, 45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/- 0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector
switch with OFF position to allow meter display of current and voltage in each
generator phase.
h. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30
minutes.
A battery trickle charger mounted on the generator control panel shall be supplied with
the generator in order to maintain the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted
with on-off switch indicator light, input and output fuses and reverse current protection.
Upon operation of the standby plant the charger shall be disconnected from the battery
and from the mains. An ammeter to indicate rate of charger and battery voltmeter shall
be fitted for each set of batteries.
A. Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting
the engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with
housings that include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when
Parcel 35 Specifications
weight is removed; the isolators complete with neoprene acoustical friction pads
between the baseplate and supports.
C. All mounting leveling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
D. Provide a minimum of six Mason type 'SLR' rated deflection 5 cm, 2431 kg load
spring mount and six No. Z1225, 2268 kg "all-directional seismic snubber." Prior to
installation, approved manufacturer shall submit installation drawing for approval.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the
generating set. Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
A water pipes shall be installed between the radiator and the engine.
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories
and items for a complete emergency generating set.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine
maintenance and normal over hauls, in suitable cupboard.
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied
with the set, and placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list shall be supplied
with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall
be supplied in English in 3 copies.
The equipment data to be provided by the Contractor prior to ordering any material
covered by this sub-division shall include but not be limited to:
Complete technical data on diesel engine, includes operating characteristics, site rating,
fuel and lubricating consumption, manufacturer's catalogue cuts, dimensions and
weights, etc.
- Detailed description of all components of the engine: starting system, super charge,
governor, injector, cooling radiator, air, fuel and lubricating filters etc... With
manufacutrer's catalogue cuts and operating characteristics.
- Detailed description of all auxiliaries: batteries and charger, fuel day tank, exhaust
pipe and silencer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
- Detailed description of engine control, instruments protection, alarms and cut offs, etc.
- List of standard and special tools supplied for routine and major overhauls.
Complete drawings of the generating plant in the particular location of the project, with
indication of all components, piping exhaust pipes, power and control cabling, etc.
- Construction drawings of the foundation block with indication of holes for anchoring
bolts.
2.11 TESTS
Sets shall be available for visual inspection at works by the consultant before loading for
despatch to site.
Sets shall be available at works for noise level tests to be made by the consultant before
loading for despatch to site.
The generator shall be protected against all types of excess current that will damage the
generator electrical system.
Earth leakage protection shall be provided by means of a 'core balance' residual current
device. The restricted earth fault protection level shall be capable of being varied over
the range 0.3 amps to 10 amps.
The Contractor shall provide all auxiliary equipment necessary for monitoring the
electrical parameters utilized in the protection systems.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect
system to ensure compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct
malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer
or technician employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to
technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the set
and major auxiliaries.
C. Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
3. Start the units and record the number of seconds it takes each unit to get it
started.
4. Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM
and frequency meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against
frequency meter reading.
5. Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on
generator for minimum of 4 hours.
D. Mechanical Examination
1. Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the
load test. If any fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or
replace the leaking item as required, and restart the load test. It is necessary that
each unit run for 2 hours at full load without any leaks or excessive water
temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.
2. Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the
speed at which the engine automatically shuts down.
3. Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test
for automatic engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4. Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature
relay to test for automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5. With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure
room and outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the
motor-generator manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air
temperatures at 35 oC design day.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Laminate or mount under plexiglass a set of operating instructions for the system and
install instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel
engine-generator set.
D. Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and
fuses.
In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's
works, the following testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
All testing to the satisfaction of the Owner's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run
Parcel 35 Specifications
load current, kilowatt output, frequency and power factor, generator temperature
rise when connected to a resistive/reactive load to produce 0.8 power factor.
ii) Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 385V from full load to no load
to full load, including transient variation and response time.
vii) Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil
and test loads for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Owner's
consultant.
i) Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts
are in proper alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly
installed and located.
Parcel 35 Specifications
iv) Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
v) Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel
oil.
vi) Check that all radiator and engine block water drain points are free from sludge and
other blockages.
vii) Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings,
governor settings, pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe
work, etc.
viii) Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel. All lugs for
principal connections shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable
abrasive material shall be used where necessary.
ix) Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the
functioning of any interlocks fitted.
xi) Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is
not less than the Specialist Supplier's figures.
xii) Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal
speed. Check that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the
mains battery charger is automatically switched off
xiii) Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that
the generator voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due
allowance for no-load conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with
that of the engine tachometer.
xiv) Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
xv) Restart set and run at various loads for periods totalling at least 3 hours. Check the
voltage and current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are
being maintained with the required limits with large alterations of load. Note the
rate of charge on the alternator ammeter with the engine stopped. Check against
specialist rates in necessary.
xvi) Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at
various loads.
xviii) Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the
performance of all flexible connections, both mechanical and electrical are
satisfactory.
Parcel 35 Specifications
xxi) Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their
associated switching control gear.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Owner's consultant, the lubricating oil
be finally checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been
commissioned, they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts,
relays, wiring, terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information
for the central control system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and
data schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20
VA. @ 220 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should
add interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS
supplier (either 4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
1. Fuses: 10 for every type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Capacitors are to comply with IEC 871-1 and IEC 831-2, with a loss factor not
exceeding 0.3 x 10(-3) (a consumption of about 0.4 watts per kVAR).
B. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at
a single set of pressure terminals.
A. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA
ICS 2.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with
IEC 60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the
following:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and
less, and 1000 V minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.4 ADJUSTING
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
Division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division
also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. Basic Electric Material and Methods, Section 16050, applies to work of this
Section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for primary medium voltage ring
main units, including, size, enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Each main unit comprises three three-pole load break switches rated 630
Amps, two for the incoming ring main feeder's cables, one for the outgoing
cable connected to the medium voltage switchgear.
B. Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing.
C. Switch disconnectors shall be manufactured to IEC 298, 294 and 262 category
B VDE-67 part 3 and 6 or BS 5227 or any approved equal.
D. They shall be air insulated or SF 6 gas insulated compact ring main unit of IP
65, and of 3 pole gang operated type capable of interrupting safely, their
nominal full load current.
Parcel 35 Specifications
To earth 55 KV rms.
Over open blades 75 KV rms.
6. Load breaking capacity
Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the switches
and the hand-operated handles shall be provided with locks.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working
on cables.
H. Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders' side to enable earthing the
cable feeders when working on the cables.
I. Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant
earth switches such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his
mate earth switch is in the ON position and vice versa.
J. Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicator of the type and
according to the Electricity Authority.
K. Tests
Supply test results to confirm that the switch has been tested to substantiate
designs according to applicable Standards verifying not only the performance of
Parcel 35 Specifications
the switch, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus
bracing. In addition, factory test each switch in accordance with approved
Standards.
All tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at works and at his expense
and under control and supervision of electricity Distribution Company.
The contractor is responsible for testing all ring main units, all equipment …etc.
as per EE A requirements on his expenses.
L. EQUIPMENT DATA
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be
limited to the following:
Construction and installation details for the 24 KV ring main unit equipment.
Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of
cubicles.
Complete technical data on the 24 KV ring main unit other equipment including
data on operating characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions and
weights, detailed description, operating mechanism etc.
The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through levers.
Protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from unintentional contact
Parcel 35 Specifications
with the life parts during switching operations. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the
ON/OFF positions of the switches and the hand-operated handles shall be provided with
locks.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working on
cables.
Each load break switch must be equipped with space heaters to prevent moisture &
humidity ingress (220Vx 2 x 200W) controlled by miniature breaker and hygrostat.
Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders side to enable earthing the feeders
when working on the cables.
Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant earth switches
such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his mate earth switch is in
the on position and vice versa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. Provide 6.35mm minimum thick x 60cm wide insulation mat in front of ring main
units and rear of freestanding equipment.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Provide fuses for potential transformers and control, with five spare fuses for
each rating.
2. Check primary medium voltage ring main units for continuity, and for
short circuits.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including,
but not limited to, the following:
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the
relevant IEC Standards, including the following:
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following
Standards:
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path as indicated.
1.7 COORDINATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Spare Parts: Provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one
year maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for
emergency replacement due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control switch,
selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
2. Complete set of main contacts of each rating.
3. Complete set of breaker/switch auxiliary contacts.
4. Complete mechanism of breaker/switch of each type.
5. Drive motor of each type
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal
routine inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank,
manual charging handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV
test bushings, set of rail extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile
lifting and handling equipment etc. as necessary for the type of switchgear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Busbars: are to be insulated, either with epoxy insulation applied by the fluid-dip
process or heat shrinkable insulated sleeves. Busbar connections are to be
insulated with easily installed, performed vinyl boots, secured by nylon hardware.
C. Earth Bus: Copper of not less than minimum size required by the Standards,
designed to withstand worst earth- fault current of power system without showing
any signs of thermal or mechanical damage or degradation. Earth bus is to
extend full length of switchgear.
E. All switchgear are to be provided with Local/Remote selector switch for controlling
the switchgear either from local or remotely via BMS system
Parcel 35 Specifications
terminal blocks located inside the LV compartment. These terminal blocks are to
be equipped with suitable shorting facilities.
M. Keys and padlocks are to be provided for manually interlocking two or more
units if required. Electrical and mechanical interlocks are to be provided for
automatic safe and functional operation of the system as shown on the
Drawings/Schedules.
N. Earthing facilities are to be provided for earthing and/or short-circuiting the feeder
at its terminals through built-in, safety-interlocked, quick-make earthing switch,
without use of loose attachments.
P. Ferrules: Cable and wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of
approved type at each termination. Colour coding is to be as required by the
Regulations and the applicable Section of the Specification.
Q. Test terminal blocks are to be provided inside insulating covered bases for
instruments, instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
S. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures and structure are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with two
coats of baked enamel, color standard gray (RAL 7033) unless otherwise
approved. Finish is to be vermin and fungus proof and suitable for worst climatic
conditions on site.
T. MV Switchgear Ratings:
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Type: For installation indoors comprising air insulated single busbar system,
horizontally isolated, with draw able circuit breakers, floor mounted, free standing,
modular design of matching units to form a continuous integral metal-clad switchgear
assembly extendable at either end.
F. With draw able part is to comprise circuit breaker with operating and control
mechanism, isolating contacts and front shield completing the compartment
enclosure, all mounted on one metal truck or carriage, provided with racking
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. Front panel is to include open and closed indicating lamps, on and off circuit breaker
control switch, mimic diagram, pad lockable earthing switch handle with indications of
position and direction of rotation, and potential indicators, as a general requirement
for all units. Particulars of additional components, relays and indicating instruments
are specified under article shown on the Drawings.
I. Metal safety shutters are to automatically close isolator spouts in fixed compartment
when withdrawable part is in disconnected position. Shutters are to be double
latched for extra safety, pad lockable, painted red and with the word “BUSBARS”
marked in white on front of busbar shutters and painted yellow with the word
“CABLE” marked in white on cable end shutters.
J. Metal Truck: 4-wheel type, with handle for racking and locking breaker into in-
service or disconnected positions. Truck is to be of self-aligning design running on
fixed steel rails, continuously earthed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
closed
L. Access to LV and auxiliary wiring is to be from front of unit for control, protection,
test terminal blocks and associated connections. Multi-pin, disconnect able, locks-
in type plugs and socket arrangement is to be provided between withdraw able and
fixed parts of switchgear.
M. Anti-Condensation heaters with thermostat, switch and pilot lamp and of rating
recommended by manufacturer are to be provided in each section of switchgear
assembly.
N. Wiring diagram, suitably protected and located inside LV compartment of each unit,
is to indicate all data and components related to the particular unit and its external
circuitry.
O. Insulating Mat: Anti-slip, synthetic, insulating, rubber mat, minimum 5 mm thick and
900 mm wide, with heavy canvas lining on lower face, is to be provided for full
length in front of switchgear assembly.
Q. Voltage transformers and auxiliary control power transformers with current limiting
fuses are to be provided on withdraw able trucks, unless otherwise specified or
shown on the Drawings.
C. Circuit breakers are to be frame mounted and bolted into position. Frame is to
have wheels for handling during installation or maintenance.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Busbars: are to be insulated, either with epoxy insulation applied by the fluid-dip
process or heat shrinkable insulating sleeves. Busbar connections are to be
insulated with easily installed, preformed vinyl boots, secured by nylon hardware.
H. Mechanical interlock between the door and the switch disconnector’s “Earth
Position” is to be provided.
I. Control and monitoring of each unit is to be provided on front panel and is to include
mimic diagram, operating handles of main device and earthing switches, position
indicators, close and trip push buttons, potential indicators, identification and
instruction plates, protective devices, metering and indicating instruments, key and
pad lockable devices, as specified and shown on the Drawings.
J. Access to LV wiring is to be from front of cubicle for control, protection, test terminal
blocks and associated LV power connections. Multi-pin, disconnectable, lock-in
type plug and socket arrangement is to be provided between circuit breaker and
stationary part of cubicle.
K. Anti-condensation heaters with thermostat, switch and pilot lamp, and of rating
recommended by manufacturer are to be provided in each section of switchgear
assembly.
L. Wiring diagram, suitably protected and located inside LV compartment of each unit,
is to indicate all data and components related to the particular unit and its external
circuitry.
M. Anti-slip, synthetic, insulating, rubber mat, minimum 5 mm thick and 900 mm wide,
with heavy canvas lining on lower face, is to be provided for full length in front of
switchgear assembly.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Type: SF6 circuit breaker using rotating arc or puffer principle, with closed gas
circuit, and with pressure detector to prevent operation of circuit breaker in case of
loss of gas pressure within the sealed enclosure.
B. SF6 breakers are to be provided with gas filling valve and with pressure switches,
one per pole, to initiate alarm in case the pressure of the SF6 gas drops below
manufacturer set values.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Protective Relay: is to be provided with D.C. power from the switchgear power
supply, and to be provided with a pilot LED which is to be lit under healthy operating
conditions. Relay is to be provided with a self-supervision system which upon power
supply interruption or a fault condition is to switch off the LED and to initiate an
alarm. The rated current and voltage for current & voltage sensing relays are to
match that of the corresponding current and voltage transformers of the switchgear
respectively. The continuous rating of the output contacts is not to be less than 5A.
C. Interference and test voltages of the solid state relays are to be as follows:
1. Insulation test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-5: 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
2. Impulse test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-3: 5 kV, 1.2/50 micro sec.
3. High frequency test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and
the relay framework as per IEC 60255-6: 2.5 kV, 1MHZ.
4. Spark interference test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and
the relay framework as per SS346 15 03 class 3: 4-8 kV.
D. Over Current Relay: 3 phase, non-directional, solid state type with two setting stages
as follows:
1. Low setting stage for overload protection with current setting range of 50 % to
250 % of rated current and adjustable definite time and inverse time operation
modes as per IEC 60255-3.
2. High setting stage (instantaneous) for short circuit protection with current
setting range up to 4000% of rated current.
E. Earth fault relay, non-directional, solid state type with two setting stages as follows:
1. Low setting stage of 10 % to 80 % of rated current and adjustable definite
time and inverse time operation modes as per IEC 60255-3.
2. High setting stage (instantaneous) with current setting range up to 1000%
of rated current.
Parcel 35 Specifications
phase current.
G. Under-Voltage and Over Voltage Relays: three phase or three single phase,
solid state definite time type with the following setting ranges:
1. Under Voltage Relay: 60 % to 90 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time
delay.
2. Over Voltage Relay: 80 % to 130 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time
delay.
I. Each relay is to be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or equivalent)
and adequate number of contacts for tripping annunciation, and interface
with SCADA functions.
J. Auxiliary Relay: to be suitably rated with sufficient number of N.O. and N.C.
contacts for operation in conjunction with protective relays or control/interlocking
requirements. Relay is to have two N.O. and two N.C. spare contacts.
K. Surge Arresters: Gap-less, metal oxide, heavy duty type, silicon polymer housing
with the following characteristics:
Parcel 35 Specifications
auxiliary loads, relays, coils, lamps, alarms etc. for 8 hours, to close all circuit
breakers in rapid succession, and trip all circuit breakers simultaneously with the
charger off. Battery is to be heavy-duty type with transparent containers, maximum
and minimum electrolyte level indicators and alarm initiating relay in case of D.C.
output failure. Battery calculation is to be submitted according to IEEE 1115 based
on simultaneous trip of all circuit breakers in T1 (1 minute) period, continuous load
in T2 (758 minutes) period, and successive close of all circuit breakers in T3 (1
minute) period. Batteries are to be sized for nominal system voltage +10% -15%.
Calculation is to consider the following factors:
1. 1.15 design margin.
2. 1.25 aging factor
P. Battery Charger: Automatic voltage controlled, solid state type, suitable for float and
boost charging, returning batteries to 90% full charge within 4 hours after full
discharge, plus full duty cycle required of batteries. Charger is to operate from 220
V supply, 50 Hz, single- phase, giving specified D.C. output and having minimum
range of adjustment of 100% -125% float voltage and 110%- 135% boost voltage.
Ripple is not to exceed 1% of nominal output voltage. Charger is to be rated 125%
of its nominal full load and is to have its own automatic control against overcharging
and overload protection. Charger is to have a.c. voltmeter, D.C. voltmeter, D.C.
ammeter, main incoming circuit breaker, pilot lights on a.c. input and D.C. output, and
earth fault detector with alarm indication.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. A.C. Ammeters: Moving iron type, operating from CT secondary, and with the
following characteristics:
1. Measuring Range :1.25 times CT primary amps, 250 degrees decimal
scale
2. Overload Capacity: 1.2 times measuring range continuous, twice
measuring range for 2 minutes, and ten times measuring range for 1
second.
G. Power Factor Meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro- dynamic type, with
cross-coil meter movement and accuracy of 1% from at least 20% - 100% rated
current at rated voltage.
1. Measuring Range: 0.1 conductive-unity-0.1 capacitive
I. Watt-Hour Meters: 3-phase, to IEC 60521, unless otherwise required by the Local
Power Authority, for operation from 5 A CT secondaries.
J. Frequency Meters: Vibration (reed) type, rated frequency 50 Hz, class 1, rated
frequency range 55-65 Hz, and unaffected by voltage variations of +/-20%.
K. Current Transformers (CTs): Indoor dry type (cast- resin), with the
following characteristics:
Parcel 35 Specifications
L. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy limit factors are to be
determined in accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level
and burden. CT is toperform under specified conditions without exceeding accuracy
limit. Submit error curves for approval. Thermal short-circuit rating is to be the
same as specified for the MV switchgear with dynamic short-circuit rating of 2.5 times
thermal rating.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Trip and/or Alarm: Device is to trip and/or alarm on the following conditions as a
minimum.
1. Voltage phase loss, if any phase RMS is less than 50% of the nominal line
voltage.
2. Current phase loss, if the smallest phase is less than 1/16 of the largest
phase value.
3. Line voltage phase unbalance, programmable from 5 to 40% of nominal
in 5% increments.
4. Voltage phase reversal
5. Over-voltage, programmable from 105 to 140% in 5% increments
6. Under-voltage, programmable from 95 to 60% in 5% increments
D. Device is to have a time delay for the trip and/or alarm settings for over-voltage,
under- voltage and phase unbalance. Delay is to range from 0 to 8 seconds in 1-
second intervals.
E. Display screen and LEDs are to indicate both trip and alarm conditions. Cause of a
trip or alarm is to be indicated on the display window. Device is also to signify reverse
power flow, negative power factor and negative kVAR. Unit is to trip in the event of an
internal malfunction.
F. Unit is to be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or equivalent) for
connection with BMS system.
H. Unit is to allow user to disable undesired values or functions and to later reactivate
them if required. In the event of trip or alarm condition, a built-in reset button is to
allow a manual reset of the unit. Unit is also to be capable of being remotely reset via
its communication port.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IINSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished; follow
the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and
building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for
fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations,
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power A's
requirements.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of
switchgear.
2. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for
a copy of the maintenance manual.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 35 Specifications
phases and phase to earth at 80% of the IEC voltage withstand test for 1-
minute.
6. CT transformation ratio.
7. VT polarity test.
8. VT transformation ratio.
10. Primary and/or secondary injection tests to check relay operation, using
appropriate test sets, followed by tripping of circuit-breaker once only,
through its protective relay circuit.
2. Open and withdraw circuit breaker after a prolonged test run, inspect and
check circuit breaker conditions, isolating contacts, contacts on all
instruments and control switches, connections at terminal blocks etc., busbar
connections and busbars for any
Indication of overheating; check for loose connections and bolts etc. and
finally re- apply megger tests to ensure same quality of insulation as before
energization.
3. Close circuit breaker slowly, while in the disconnected position and inspect
contacts and/or contact movement and compare with design figures.
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months
after the end of the Defects Liability Period, perform an infrared scan of
switchgear assembly. Make bus joints and connections accessible to a portable
scanner and perform scanning during a period of normal working load as advised
by Employer.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan at
same locations as before, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include core material,
grade, lamination thickness, flux density, winding material, and current density.
Additionally, Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show
minimum clearances and installed devices and features. Submit
Manufacturers' catalogues.
A. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing
and connecting field-installed wiring.
F. Special Tests: Factory special tests are to include noise level, temperature
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.7 COORDINATION
Factory testing units for two units of each rating of the transformers to be supplied
is to be witnessed by the Engineer. Selection of transformers for witness test is to
be randomly carried out by the Engineer and is to cover all ratings to be delivered.
Witness test is to include complete routine and function testing in addition to the
special tests specified above, special tests may be carried out on one unit of each
transformer rating subject to engineer’s approval. Test procedure and program are
to be submitted for approval prior to test conduction, by at least 14 days. Provide
four man-visit to cover all types of tests including business class air tickets, five
stars Hotel full accommodation, transportation and all test expenses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, low loss, solvent less cast epoxy
resin, windings, with minimum class F insulation for LV and MV windings, rated
for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full load, and
complying with IEC 60726. Winding temperature rise is not to exceed 80 deg.
Co ver an ambient temperature of 40deg. C for class F insulation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Winding current densities at rated normal and short circuit conditions are to be
submitted for approval. Normal densities are to be within 2 A/mm2 for Copper
and 1.6 A/mm2 for Aluminum winding respectively, unless otherwise submitted
by manufacturer and approved by engineer.
E. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil
assemblies, and between base and housing.
G. Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting
hooks or lugs, towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
Transformer (kVA) dB
1000 73/58
1250 74/58
Parcel 35 Specifications
1600 76/60
2000 78/62
2500/3150 81/65
M. Noise level for transformers with fans: the sound power/pressure level with
all fans in operation is not to exceed 6 dB additional to the values above.
N. Characteristics:
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished;
follow the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease
checking and building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that
holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided
as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop
and construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves
for passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete
foundations, bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and
when required and that they are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports,
cable ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to
Engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
6. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios
deviating more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio for an
adjacent coil is not acceptable.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with DIVISION 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and
installation requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to
match original finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization
equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility.
Record primary and secondary voltages and Tap settings and submit with test
results.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for
components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In
addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and
circuit breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit
breaker.
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 44, and
weather-proof type cast-metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP
65, unless otherwise required or shown on the Drawings. Locking of
operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
A.
PART3 - EXECUTION
1.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.2 INSTALLATION
1.3 IDENTIFICATION
1.4 CONNECTIONS
A.
1.4.1.1 Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with
ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and
control and indication devices.
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended
at full load without any signs of heating.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.6 CLEANING
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation instrument and metering as
shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 51, DIN/VDE standards and
shall be digital type.
2.2 INSTRUMENTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
1. STANDARD IEC 51
b. Current: - 2 in continuously.
- 10 in for 10 seconds.
- 40 in for 2 seconds.
Parcel 35 Specifications
On 3-phase, 4-wire system, ammeter switches shall have four operating positions,
marked 'R', 'Y', 'B' and 'N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single
ammeter to read, in sequence, the currents in each of the three phases and the
neutral wire, On 3-wire systems ammeter switches shall have three operating
positions marked 'R', 'Y' and 'B' and an 'OFF' position. Ammeter switches shall be
connected so that the associated current transformers are short-circuited when they
are not connected to the ammeter.
On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have six operating positions,
marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B', 'B-R', 'R-N', 'Y-N' 'B-N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable
the single voltmeter to read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and each of
the three phase-to-neutral voltages. On 3-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall
have three operating positions marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B' and 'B-R' and an 'OFF' position.
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All CTs shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards and
shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Unless otherwise specified in the schedules or drawings, the CTs are required for
use under service conditions not more onerous than those set out in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
CTS shall be designed either for measurement or for protection and shall not be
used in a dual-purpose role serving both instruments and protective gear.
Parcel 35 Specifications
So far as it is practicable, all CTs shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will
only be accepted when the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type
impracticable.
One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a
bolted removable link.
For mattering circuits, either, a proprietary front of panel CT test block or special
"shorting" terminals within the panel shall be provided for test purposes.
All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at voltages
exceeding 1000 V shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.
Where dual-ratio CTs are specified, they shall be provided with two separate
secondary windings capable of being connected in series or in parallel to give the
required ratio.
All CTs shall be provided with a rating plate bearing the information as stated in IEC,
DIN/VDE standards. All CTs shall be installed in accessible location. The secondary
connections shall be brought out by means of insulated leads, and made off on a
suitable terminal block-mounted in a readily accessible position.
Magnetization curves and/or type Test Certificates shall be provided for all CTs
associated with protection devices.
Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the
instruments, relays, and/or other apparatus which it is to serve.
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Voltage transformers shall be of the type, rating, and voltage ratio specified in the
schedules or drawings.
All voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of BS 3941 and
shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Parcel 35 Specifications
Unless other specified in the schedules or drawings, the voltage transformers are
required for use under service conditions not more than those set out in IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding 4000 V shall be
the air insulated type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable
synthetic material.
Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the
total burden of the apparatus or instruments which it is to serve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which instrument and metering are to be installed and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to energization of instrument and metering devices test devices for intended
function Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Boards work for low voltage (LV)
distribution, ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and
supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards
including all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating
compliance with the Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article,
equipment characteristics, details of construction, operating data, dimensions and
weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items including incoming and
outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars, isolating, earthing,
interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc. Boards are to
be factory assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
9. Mimic-bus diagram.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color
selection.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.
J. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution
board load connections have been made, for record.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Notify Engineer not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
3. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
1.8 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable
(consumable) contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit
breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and
similar devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective
devices as appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
enclosure thickness is not to be less than 1.5mm. For rating larger than 3200A
enclosures are to have minimum thickness of 2mm.
K. Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site
rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a
symmetrical rms short- circuit duty as specified. Busbars are to be copper, of
sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable insulation or equipment
temperature ratings, and to maximum 90 deg C. Connections and buswork are to
be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be accessible for inspection and
maintenance unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by Engineer. Contact surfaces are to be Electro-silver plated.
N. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance
with the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at
each end), and required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
Parcel 35 Specifications
O. Earth bus is to be half size of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
1. Form 3b type-2.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type – Air Circuit Breaker (ACB).
3. Tie: Withdrawable type - ACB.
4. Outgoing: Fixed type – Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for ratings
up to 1000A and draw out type with electronic trip units for ratings greater than
1000A.
R. Draw out circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and
interlocks to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open
position, and to prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three
positions (connect, test, disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to
be approved worm and lever mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door
with breaker in any of the three positions and when removed. External position
indicator is to be provided. Fixed disconnecting primary contacts are to be
accessible and replaceable from front and are to be silver plated copper. Moving
primary disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring
pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of circuit
breaker.
Parcel 35 Specifications
minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear are to
be covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip
device, where required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB
control power transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker.
Where shunt trip and/or under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor
trip device is to be provided.
D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 600 V class, with
continuous current rating (frame size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between
1250 A and 5000 A (1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 and 5000 A), fully
rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated
for a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the
Drawings, to IEC 60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking
capacity) at specified voltage and frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I,
II, III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization category B), tested in an
enclosure substantially the same as the enclosure in which they are to be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and
with transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current
transformer operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external
Parcel 35 Specifications
power. It is to have adjustable current setting (0.5 to 1.0 times trip unit rating)
with adjustable long-time delay from 1 to 24 seconds, short-time pick-up and short-
time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay and instantaneous over current
pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of replaceable trip-units within the
maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker is to remain in the trip-
free position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal
current rating of the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable
time delay between 0.1 and 0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be adjustable in
steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with adjustable time delay of 0 to 0.4 seconds.
Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit
rating. Over-ride protection is to allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of
Circuit Breaker.
G. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker
operation, long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short
time over current trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to
count long time, short time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
I. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for
every phase. Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall
be encased in epoxy filled plastic housing to protect against damage and
moisture and shall be integrally mounted in breakers.
L. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for
remote monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
Parcel 35 Specifications
trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to perform simultaneous tripping
and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker(s).
A. MCCBs generally are to be with electronic trip unit for ratings more than 250A and
thermal magnetic trip units for ratings less than 250A. All circuit breakers are to be
3- pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.
C. Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay
setting range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating with
adjustable time delay from 1 to 24 seconds, short time delay range 3 to 10 times
maximum trip rating with adjustable time delay from 0 to 0.4 seconds, , and
instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 15 times continuous rating. Solid
state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between
-20 and +40 deg. C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where
specified, and is to be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-
up with adjustable time delay from 0 to 0.4 seconds, and is to be suitable
for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
on cover for testing the trip unit.
F. Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with
continuous duty at site conditions, 750 volt rated insulation voltage, 600 volt Ac and
250 volt DC rated operational voltage and with frame size and interrupting capacity
to IEC 60947-2, sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and
maximum trip rating as shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at
specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 60947-2 test sequence I, II, III
and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B (with intended short time
withstand capability) for circuit breakers 630A and above.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal
system voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal
circuit amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
F. Provide P.F. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated
primary current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with
nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and
secondary fuses and disconnecting device.
2.6 WIRING
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal
exposed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC
sheathed for multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber
insulated cables are to be used in proximity to higher temperature components and
as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes
for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as
required.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations,
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for power and control cables.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat
and two finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site,
or as required by Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions
for main distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and
emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
3.4 CONNECTIONS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to
Engineer.
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical
inspection and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests
the Engineer may require to check compliance of installation with the Specification,
including, but not limited to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site,
where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new
units and retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check
insulation resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and
between neutral and earth.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-
current primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance
with the Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled
from standardized components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine
tests are also to be carried out on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by
Engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
each main distribution board. Remove front and rear panels so joints and
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
PART- 1 GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Panel boards for distribution and sub distribution of electric power and for protection
of circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of
feeders, sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
M. DB: Final branch circuit panel boards, for secondary lighting and power
distribution.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Exact composition of each panel board, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip
ratings of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panel boards, indicating main feeder and branch
circuit conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods
and materials used.
U. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
V. Panel board Schedules: For installation in panel boards submit final versions
after load balancing.
A. Comply with
1.6 COORDINATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panel boards and components with other
construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and
other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace
clearance requirements.
0.21 SCHEDULES
PART-2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Lists below are examples only. Retain or insert only those manufacturers whose
products correspond with other requirements and whose availability and suitability
for the application have been verified.
B. Panel boards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP
42 for indoor installations and IP 54 for outdoor installations, in accordance
with IEC 60529, and are to be factory designed and assembled.
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panel boards are to have one main incoming
circuit breaker or switch and the required number of branch circuit breakers,
arranged as shown on the schedules, including spare circuit breakers and
spaces for future expansion. Three-phase panel boards are to be designed
for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to
approved manufacturer's standards and sizes.
K. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to
cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws
engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable). Screws where used are
to be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted panel
boards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for
surface mounted panel boards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
L. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination
cylinder lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type
handle and multiple point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
Parcel 35 Specifications
M. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final
thermosetting epoxy powder modified by polyester resins providing high
resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and alkali solvents, grease, aging
and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of Engineer.
O. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5
mm thick, fully weatherproofed (IP 54), without knockouts, but with
removable sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum operating
temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted or
clamped contact surfaces are to have maximum current density not exceeding
requirements of the approved standards. Aluminum is not to be used for bus bars
or panel board parts.
R. Short-circuit Duty: Bus bars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-
circuit level at point of application for one second, without showing any
signs of degradation.
T. Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-
less box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each
branch circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-
Parcel 35 Specifications
screw for main incoming neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated
as for phase bus bars.
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, 690 V rated insulation voltage, totally enclosed,
molded case, constructed from high quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized,
molded insulating materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within
enclosures at point of application, and provided with front operated single toggle
type handle mechanism for manual operation of main contacts in addition to
automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have
common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating is to
be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set screws,
suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
W. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: are to have bi-metallic inverse
time delay over-current element for small overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions
on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 250 A are to have adjustable
instantaneous trips.
Y. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers greater than 250 A frame
size, are to be solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0
times maximum trip rating and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to
10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to
changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +40 deg C. Earth fault
protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to be suitable for
connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
Parcel 35 Specifications
on cover for testing the trip unit. Short time over current protection is only
required for circuit breakers if it is required by the discrimination study, short
time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum
clearing time of 0.2 seconds
AA. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which
overload element is set to operate.
BB. MCCBs for DBs: Comply with IEC947-2 test sequences I, II, utilization
category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panel board location,
with preferred ratings in accordance with following tables.
CC. MCCBs for SMBDs: MCCBs rated 630 A and above are to have utilization
category B (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have
rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence II) with suitably
selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at
the distribution panelboard location and schedules shown on the drawings,
with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate
ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit
breaker rating plate. MCCBs below 630A are to have utilization category A
with rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (sequence III) to meet the
electrical requirements at the panel boards locations with preferred ratings in
accordance with the below tables.
FF. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed.
Circuit breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers
sealed to prevent tampering.
Parcel 35 Specifications
rating (frame size) 100 A and over. Padlocking devices are to be provided,
where shown on the Drawings.
HH. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as
add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown
on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-
current and short-circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the
Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on breakers is to be as recommended
by Electricity regulations. Circuit breakers are to include current transformer
with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure
circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
II. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements.
When operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is
to be less than 1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current
as compatible with breaker construction.
JJ. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse
time-delay over-current characteristics for overload protection and
instantaneous trip for short-circuit protection. Operation of main contacts is
to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces between contacts created
by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms value of
prospective short-circuit current.
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898.
MM. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and
suitable for mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
OO. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60,
80, 100A and 125 A, calibrated at 40 deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole
circuit breakers.
PP. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to
be add-on devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker.
Non-adjustable Sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA are to be
available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers, as shown on the
drawings.
QQ. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch,
auxiliary switch, shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to
be modular additions to the circuit breakers.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and
insulation grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.
G. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and
minimum 1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim
are to be adjustable to
H. Allow for mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces
(gutters) are to be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided
where tap-off insulated split connectors are required. Knockouts are to be
provided in top or bottom of enclosures and are to provide a neat and
uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V. single-phase and neutral (SPN) or 3-
phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted 1, 2, or 3-pole MCCBs on branch circuits and
2, 3 or 4-pole MCCB on main incoming, listed by UL File No. E2269 or equal, and
meeting USA Specification W-P-115b Type 1 Class 1.
I. Branch circuit breakers are to be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with
trip ratings between 15 A and 100 A, and compatible ICs, selected from
normal (N), high-break (H) or current-limiting (L) range.
Parcel 35 Specifications
L. Assembly: Bus bars are to be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan
in vertical arrangement. Branch circuit breakers are to be bolted in twin
arrangement to rigid copper cross and center bus connectors. Back pan
assembly is to be removable and fixed to four threaded studs integral with
cabinet.
Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided
with bus bars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement
for TPN panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar
and one piece insulated phase bus bar. Bus bars are to be single-phase or 3-phase
with spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker.
Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit
current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the
Standards.
N. SPN type panel boards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service
voltage, single-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main
incoming.
O. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without earth
leakage device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
P. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings
between 6 A and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.
Q. TPN type panel boards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum
service voltage, 3-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or
Parcel 35 Specifications
R. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and
100 A, with IC as required in the Schedules.
S. TPN type panel board main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A
continuous current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB
with trip range 70 A to 225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without
RCD as shown on the Drawings.
T. Short-circuit Rating: TPN panel boards may only have integrated equipment
(series) short-circuit ratings in accordance with clause paragraph F of Article
2.2 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" hereof.
PART-3 - EXECUTION
0.1 INSTALLATION
U. Fixing Generally:
V. Panel board Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections
to cabinet have been completed.
X. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted
cabinets flush with wall surface finish.
AA. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panel boards: if asked by the engineer,
stub four empty conduits from panel board into accessible ceiling space or
Parcel 35 Specifications
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
0.23 IDENTIFICATION
B. Panel board Nameplates: Label each panel board with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
0.24 CONNECTIONS
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the
Engineer, on panel boards after installation, to verify compliance with the
specifications and standards. Inspect conditions within panel boards and
verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between
phases and between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and
earth. Record all readings, using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V
systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on systems up to 600 V, for 1-
minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards,
on all panel boards assembled from standardized components of the
manufacturer outside the works of the manufacturer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. Test insulation resistance for each panel board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F. Testing: After installing panel boards and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
0.26 ADJUSTING
0.27 CLEANING
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, apply to work of this
section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all system earthing,
equipment earting, earthing of outlets, special earthing for telecommunication,
earthing of raceways and conduits, earthing of distribution panelboards,
transformers, ring main units, MV switchgear ... etc., earth pits and accessories
work shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for
a complete system.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper clad steel earth rod
2 (20mm x 1.5 meter) type Sections shall be jointed with purpose made
couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be fitted to the rod
extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material
which exhibits mechanical strength, electrical continuity between sections and
does not give rise to electrolytic or corrosive action. All coupling units shall be the
same length of threaded length of the rod.
C. Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven into the
ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the rods shall be driven
below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
D. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to
facilitate inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall be
flush with ground level.
E. Earth pits shall be provided with a waterproof seal where installed inside the
building.
F. All copper cables or strip shall be connected 95 mm² from the top of the earth rod
with a purpose made non ferrous clamp or thermo weld.
H. Copper strip or stranded cable may be installed where necessary in the same
trenches as HV/LV cables but shall be separated from all other cables and
services by a distance not less than 300 mm.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed two ohm. Site
testes shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this
requirement. If the resistance exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his
proposals to reduce the system resistance to the specified level.
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode
system shall be green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A minimum of
two earthing conductors shall be installed and separately connected to the
distribution bus bars and test links main earth bar with bolted test links of copper
and having a cross section as indicated on the drawings.
A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC, DIN/VDE
Standards BS 1432 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions as detailed in
the earthing schematic.
B. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished floor
level and spaced by means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the fixing
surface.
C. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width.
Where this is not possible then the connection shall be made to a copper flag
welded to the earthing bar.
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the main
earthing terminal or bar shall be made with 120 mm² stranded copper insulated
cables unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cables shall be connected to
remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar and separately connected
to the main earthing terminal or bar.
A. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be
green/yellow PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed with
purpose made cleats.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items
which come into direct contact with copper protective conductors bars, strips,
cables etc, shall be non-ferrous and manufactured from brass, bronze or other
suitable conducting material which will not cause electrolytic or other corrosion.
Where connections occur between copper and galvanized structures, contact
surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned and after completion compounded to exclude
moisture. Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be installed in
visible and serviceable positions.
The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at
least 600o C. The amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall not
be less than the width of the larger conductor.
A. A complete and effective system of earthing shall be provided for the L.V.
electrical installation. The system of earthing shall comply with the IEE wiring
regulations and the recommendations stated in IEC, DIN/VDE Standards BS
7430, except where detailed otherwise in this specification and the drawings.
Where the IEE wiring regulations and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards differ then the
former shall take precedence.
D. Bonding shall apply at each end and all intervening raceways, boxes and
enclosures between the service equipment and the grounding busbar.
E. Metallic pipe services for example, gas mains, water mains and dry
risers when applicable shall be effectively bonded to the main
earthing terminal at their point of entry. Connections shall be made to
the services with purpose-made earthing clamps to DIN/VDE
Standards.
Parcel 35 Specifications
H. The cross-sectional area of all earthing, bonding and protective conductors shall
comply with the requirements of the IEE wiring regulations. Except where detailed
otherwise in this specification or on the drawings all conductors for earthing shall
be copper, manufactured in accordance with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for strip and
IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for cables.
J. Mechanical joints between aluminum and copper shall have the joint faces lightly
coated with an anti-corrosion compound before the connection is made.
M. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and securing
with a minimum of two screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be
effectively bonded to the earthing system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Q. Where any metal sheathed and/or armoured cables of rating in excess of 100A are
terminated on an "Industrial" type motor control center, a separate protective
conductor shall connect the sheath and/or armouring to the motor control center
earthing terminal.
S. The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the main protective
conductor of the final sub-circuit. Where applicable the protective conductor is
formed by the metal sheath and/or armouring of cables, the earth terminal of the
socket outlet shall also be connected to an earth terminal in the box or enclosure
associated with the cable.
T. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and stranded copper
cables shall be made by compression lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned prior to connection.
U. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and copper strip shall be
made with by bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned and tinned prior to connection. The washers shall be of sufficient size to
prevent any distortion of the copper strip.
V. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third the width of the earth bar or
strip. Where a larger hole is required in an earth bar then connection shall be
made to a copper flag welded to the bar. The weld shall be tested for continuity.
W. Joints in copper strip shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting
point of at least 600o C or be welded using a molecular welding process such as
furse "Thermoweld" or an equal alternative.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The test to be carried out shall include but not be necessarily limited to :-
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
2. Inspect anchorage.
b. Electrical Tests
c. Test Values
1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should
be no greater than five ohms for commercial or industrial systems and
one ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless
otherwise specified by the owner. (Reference ANSI/IEEE Standard 142)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical earthing and bonding connections are to
be made and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to the following: system
distribution, conduit system for light and power, switchgear housings, cabinets,
motor frames, housings of alarm and control panels and associated devices, lighting
fixtures, lightning protection system, emergency distribution system, telephone
system, fire alarm system, smoke detection system, communications and security
system, kitchens equipment, motor control centers, individual starters and other
non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
D. Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run,
provide an earthing conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing
bushings at each end of run.
E. Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors with
earthing lug, bus, or bushing.
H. Tighten earthing and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
connectors and bolts.
J. Make earth wires continuous without splices. Avoid soldered joints in any earth
connection. Use solder less type connectors, clamps, etc.
K. Provide complete and isolate earthing system for the swimming pool and the
resistance must be less than one ohm.
M. Provide earth conductor from main telephone equipment and frame room to same
grounding point that service building equipment system earth.
N. Provide complete and isolated earthing system for computer, all I.T racks, all A/V
racks and communication system and the resistance must be less than one ohm.
Parcel 35 Specifications
P. Provide complete earthing connections & bondings to all kitchen and metal part
equipment.
Q. Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor
terminating in adjacent pulling points with earthing bushings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and components &
enclosures. Type test certifications are also to be included as required.
G. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center prior to
ordering materials and equipment specified in this Section. Include
dimensioned plans, elevations, and component lists. Show ratings,
including short time and short-circuit ratings, and horizontal and vertical bus
ampacities.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and
control circuits to which they connect.
N. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with
the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required
control sequence, and the duty cycle of the motor and load.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents:
PATR 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.2 STARTERS
P. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor
starter, or check motor nameplate for full load current rating and allowable
temperature rise in order to select proper overload thermal element for
motor starter.
R. Control voltage for starters and control circuits is not to exceed 110 V.
U. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
Y. Starter type C for 3 phase motors ratings higher than 10 KW and not
exceeding 50 HP to be star-delta or electronic “soft” starter type as
applicable and shown on the drawings, with 3 pole overload relay and low
voltage protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
Parcel 35 Specifications
DD.Contactors shall be of robust design and shall comply with BS EN 60947: Part
4-1. They shall operate without undue noise or vibration. Where 2 or more
contactors are contained in the same cubicle, they shall be separated by
barriers. All secondary wiring shall be so arranged and protected as to
prevent its being damaged by arcing.
FF. All ammeters shall be available with “dead rider” Max. Demand indicators of
the re-settable type.
Parcel 35 Specifications
II. Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or molded case
circuit breakers of appropriate current rupturing capacity. Switch
disconnectors are not required if circuit breakers are used for the short
circuit protection. In this case the circuit breaker will perform the
disconnection function.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or
normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout
attachments. Heads to be color-coded as per IEC and STOP button to be protected.
Push buttons controlling each piece of equipment to be housed in separate
enclosure with clear identification labels as per requirement of specification 260500.
KK. Lock keys shall be suitably attached within easy access on a stainless steel
chain fixed to immovable surface with anchor-bolts.
LL. All push buttons shall be of the non-retaining type with body of stainless steel
and button made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted to
avoid any possibility of sticking.
2.5 RELAYS
A. Motor Circuit Protector: Molded case, magnetic break type with adjustable
instantaneous setting suitable for motor protection.
PP. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short
circuit protection. Short time rating of switches is to be not less than the
short circuit current at switch location for 3 cycles. Switches are to have a
suitable self-override instantaneous protection and to be in compliance with
IEC 60947-3.
Parcel 35 Specifications
QQ. Main incoming switches to be equipped to provide earth fault under voltage
and phase sequence protection through shunt trip coil. Earth fault detection
and interruption to be time coordinated with those of main incoming breaker
on main distribution board.
RR.All motors shall be provided with a safety disconnect switch, 1000V insulation
class, category AC23, non-fused, single throw, safety type, housed in
separate metallic enclosure
SS. IP 65 with arc quenching devices on each pole, and provided with padlock
and anti-corrosion lock.
TT. When located outdoors, the switch disconnector enclosures shall be provided
with U.V resistant paint finish.
VV. Switch disconnectors shall comply with I.E.C 60664 and I.E.C 60947 and
shall carry KEMA or ASTA or UL certification. They shall be manufactured
to environmentally friendly and recyclable materials.
XX. Control switches for electrically operated circuit breakers and motor operated
disconnectors shall be discrepancy type and arranged to operate clockwise
when closing the devices and anti-clockwise when opening them. There
should be marking for discrepancy indications. They shall be designed to
prevent accidental operation, which shall be effected by 2 independent
movements.
YY. The contacts of all switches and push buttons shall be strong and to have a
positive wiping action when operated.
ZZ. All safety switches and emergency push buttons shall be clearly labeled as
per specification 260500.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Type: Totally enclosed, IP 42 for indoor installation, and IP 54 for outdoor installation
and in wet areas (e.g. pump rooms), free-standing sectionalized type, modular,
compartmented, form 3b type-2 to IEC 61439-1&2, for MCC floor standing type, for
wall mounted to be form 1 with plastic cover on life parts..
AAA. Construction: The frame, the external panels (doors, side and rear panels,
tops) and internal elements (ducts) shall comply with the IEC 61439-1&2
mechanical impact test and protected by an epoxy-paint coating.
BBB. MCC supplier shall have a permanent representative office with a trained
and skilled support staff, in order to prove his commitment for local support
and to provide a channel for communication. The local representatives shall
be easily accessible and shall be able to have a technical team at the site
within 24 hours' notice, 7 days of the week
DDD. In the event of “dual incomer” MCCs, each incomer shall feed a separate
bus-section and a “bus-coupler” 4-pole circuit breaker shall be provided
with “auto change-over” arrangement built into the MCC through a simple
logic PLC with necessary battery back-up.
1. Main incoming circuit breaker shall be ACB (air circuit breaker) or MCCB
(molded case circuit breaker) circuit breaker, as shown on the Drawings, for
terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the bus bar system. Main
circuit breaker shall be with electronic trip release unit for ratings more than
250A.
2. Main incomer of MCC shall have power quality meter.
3. Main horizontal full-length bus bars, epoxy painted tinned copper, rated as main
incoming circuit breaker or as shown on the Drawings. Bus bars shall be
designed to withstand main breaker frame size and three phase symmetrical
short circuit for 1 seconds.
4. Branch vertical full height bus bars, epoxy painted tinned copper, of adequate
capacity to distribute power to each circuit breaker and starter served.
5. Neutral bus bar, epoxy painted tinned copper, rated at half capacity of main bus
bar and distributed throughout whole motor control center.
6. Earth bus bars, tinned copper, minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full length of
motor control center.
Parcel 35 Specifications
7. All copper used for the bus bars shall be electrolytic type of minimum 99 %
purity and all bus bars shall be 4-pole type.
8. One voltmeter 144mm X 144mm size, moving iron type, with commutator, range
0-400 V. Voltmeter shall carry CE marking and shall have certified compliance
to BS EN 60051.Voltmeter burden shall not be more than 4.5 VA and enclosure
shall be suitable for a RH of 95 % non-condensing. The Voltmeter enclosure
shall comply to I.E.C 529
9. 3 Ammeters 144mm X 144mm size with expanded scale in the operating region
and with MDI indicators on all feeders with necessary current transformers.
Ammeter shall carry CE marking and shall have certified compliance to BS EN
60051. Ammeter shall be of 600V insulation class and shall have overload
scales for motor start duty. Ammeter burden shall not be more than 0.5 VA and
enclosure shall be suitable for a RH of 95 % non-condensing. The ammeter
enclosure shall comply to I.E.C 52
10. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating high intensity/colored LED
type lights with guaranteed life of 7 years minimum, switches, relays, contactors
and accessories as shown on the Drawings.
11. MCCBs protecting outgoing sections shall be provided with electronic trip
release unit with shunt trip and connections to remote BMS/Fire Alarm tripping.
MCCBs shall be to IEC 60947-2.All MCCBs shall be provided with two N.O. and
two N.C. auxiliary contacts wired to terminal blocks.
12. Interconnecting and interlock wiring with stranded copper conductors having
heat resistant color-coded insulation, neatly wired in place with holders and
“spiral binds” as necessary.
13. Each MCC section shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater with related
accessories.
14. Each MCC section shall be provided with its own control transformer,
manufactured to relevant I.E.C regulations, located in an independent
compartment to facilitate easy maintenance.
15. MCCs shall include filters as necessary to limit any Harmonics produced “down-
stream” from traveling “up-stream”, to within the I.E.C recommendations.
16. All internal painting shall be white RAL9002.
17. Door interlock shall be defeatable by means of a tool.
Parcel 35 Specifications
HHH. Spare Positions: Fully equipped cells, ready for connection to motors, are
to be provided in adequate number.
III. Space Positions: if required to be fully equipped cells ready to receive control
unit are to be provided in adequate number.
KKK. Incoming line connections to be made with solder less terminal 4 bolt type
clamps.
LLL. Mounting plates for the draw-out feeders shall be painted galvanized sheet
steel and of minimum 2m thickness, with necessary “lock-in-place” fixtures
made of metal. Draw-out shall imply no requirement of any cable
disconnection requirements for either power or control.
MMM. Control wiring and BMS wiring shall not be routed through power areas
within the BMS.
NNN. All terminal blocks for control and BMS wiring shall be of 500V insulation
class, DIN rail mounted and manufactured from non-toxic, color coded non-
inflammable, self-extinguishing material and shall contain nickel plated
electrolytic copper terminals. The terminal contacts shall be suitable to
meet the “pull-out” forces as per I.E.C 947-7-1. All terminals shall be clearly
identified in respect of service usage, designation and number.
OOO.All internal wiring and cabling shall be terminated with tinned copper lugs.
PPP. Current transformers provided in the MCC shall conform to IEC 185, class
H insulation, 0.5 accuracy class as per I.E.C and secondary 5A, of suitable
VA rating. The Current transformers shall have type test certification from
an internationally accredited testing laboratory and shall be subject to 100
% routine tests as per the IEC.
RRR. V d.c. In the event of failure of control power supply, the circuit breakers
shall maintain the “last position” if no fault occurs. Batteries shall have 10
year life time. Control power “healthy” indication lamp is to be provided with
alarm on BMS if the system is “unhealthy”.
Parcel 35 Specifications
SSS. Certified and stamped Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed
within motor control center, showing each component and cross-
referenced with component labels.
A. Float Switch: Level operated, stainless steel, heavy duty, bracket mounted type,
suitable for application in open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float,
brass rod, two stops, floor mounting stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have
oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole double throw silver contacts that open
on liquid rise.
UUU. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for
water service, with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to
8 kg/cm². Switch to be good for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6
mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight
enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment.
VVV. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm
actuated type, suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling
pressure, preset at factory to 3 kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa
operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to
have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts,
range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut.
YYY. Control switches for use in direct control schemes shall be rated for the
substation battery voltage.
Parcel 35 Specifications
ZZZ. All control switches shall be provided with identification labels, including
labels to give clear indication to the direction of each operation, for
example, "open", "close", "raise", "lower", etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics
of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive,
and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller
functions.
CCCC. Emergency disconnect switches or push buttons (as applicable) for all
motors, within 3 meters of the equipment that it is meant to protect, located
at a logically convenient position where it is clearly identifiable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
EEEE. Anchor each motor control center assembly to steel-channel sills 100
mm high, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills flush
with motor control center mounting surface.
FFFF. Fuses: Install correctly rated and clearly labeled fuses in each fusible
switch as indicated.
GGGG. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise
specified.
Parcel 35 Specifications
HHHH. Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame
or base.
KKKK. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor
connections, unless otherwise specified.
MMMM. Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They
are to be run a minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical
services.
NNNN. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide
screw plug at all low points for draining.
OOOO. Keys for MCCs and other panels to be provided on stainless steel chain
alongside the panel, fixed securely to immovable surface with anchor bolt.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all field-installed wiring, equipment and components with nomenclature lables
and provide warning signs according to DIVISION 26 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
RRRR. Starters: Fix certified, detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to
clearly indicate circuits.
Parcel 35 Specifications
SSSS. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored
insulation, engraved tags or other approved method.
UUUU. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.
Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
VVVV. Provide bus bar mounted fuses where direct control connections are
required.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control
devices that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure
cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.5 EARTHING
YYYY. All MCCs shall be provided with a second earthing connection through
the local common earth bar located in the respective electrical/mechanical
room.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts with a
torque-wrench, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
ZZZZ. Ensure all covers and doors are in proper alignment and all equipment
handles functioning properly.
BBBBB. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements, as per approved method statement.
CCCCC. Circuit Breakers: Coordinate earth fault detection and interruption with
those of main incoming breaker on main distribution panel, and submit
settings.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers before energisation and
vacuum clean all dust and debris. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and
debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean
devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
C. Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay
coils shall be for 200 - 250 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART1 - GENERAL
6.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for interior lighting in
accordance with provisions of contract documents.
2. Completely co-ordinate with the work of other trades.
3. Furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4. Unless otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturers’ standard series,
designed and manufactured generally in accordance with the schedule of lighting
fixture and complying with IEC 598.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 260500, General Provisions for Electrical Work.
2. Division 1, General requirements
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative code and
standards providing they give an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced codes
and standards and are submitted for Client review and approval in advance of their use.
All equipment furnished under these specifications shall conform to the appropriate
standards of:
1. NEC-National Electrical Code
2. IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
3. IES-Illuminating Engineering Society
4. ANSI-American National Standards Institute
5. ASTM-Amerian Society for Testing and Materials
6. ASHREA / IESNA: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-conditioning
Engineers 90.1 – 99.
7. IECC: International Energy Conservation code , Code , 2000.
Parcel 35 Specifications
6.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Required for Client review. Submit drawings for approval including, but
not limited to the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
4. Wiring details, circuit and panel board references, special lighting control
arrangements, etc.
B. Product data:
1. Names of manufacturers, cuts and catalogue numbers of all lighting fixtures to be
used on project.
2. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number, including special notations for
finishes, materials specification, colours, and mountings.
3. Certified test data for fluorescent light diffuser stating brightness and efficiency.
4. Photometric performance curve for lighting calculations including polar light
distribution curves, coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency,
depreciation factors, etc.
C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type together with color and
texture samples of each fixture.
1. LED fixture sample with diffusers.
2. Samples of all decorative/architectural lights.
D. . Contract close out information:
1. Lens guarantee.
2. Operating and maintenance data..
6.4 GUARANTEE
Guarantee lenses in writing to the Client to provide satisfactory performance for..20
years without objectionable discoloration.
PART - 7 PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at the completion of the project, a minimum
of 5% spare L.E.D. light engine assemblies. LED light engines shall be turned over to
the Owner representative in their manufacturer’s protective packaging. L.E.D. light
engines not in their protective packaging will not be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.1 INSTALLATION
F. L.E.D. luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Recessed lay-in type linear L.E.D. luminaires shall be supported from the
building structure independently of the ceiling grids with a minimum of four (4) steel tie
wires per luminaire or as detailed on the Drawings.
H. Recessed lay-in type linear L.E.D. luminaires installed in lay-in type ceiling tile shall be
securely fastened from the building structure and be installed in the lay- in type ceiling in
such a manner that the louver/lens housing may be easily opened and so that the
luminaires may be removed and relocated without forcing the luminaires or changing the
grid system tie wires. This Contractor shall coordinate with the ceiling installer before
the ceiling grid is installed to assure a mutually satisfactory installation of ceiling and
luminaires.
I. Recessed L.E.D. luminaires installed in “hard” ceiling systems (i.e. drywall, metal pan,
etc.) shall be securely fastened from the building structure and be installed in such a
manner that the louver/lens housing may be easily opened and so that the luminaires
may be removed and relocated without forcing the luminaires or changing the ceiling
support system. This Contractor shall coordinate with the ceiling installer before the
ceiling is installed to assure a mutually satisfactory installation of ceiling and luminaires.
J. Surface mounted linear L.E.D. luminaires shall be supported from the building
structure with a minimum of two (2) 1/4 inch threaded rods per each one (1) foot wide by
four (4) foot long and a minimum of four (4) 1/4 inch threaded rods per each two (2)
foot wide by four (4) foot long luminaire as detailed on the Drawings.
K. Pendant/suspended luminaires shall be supported from the building structure with 1/4
inch threaded rods at each of the luminaires suspension points. Hardware
connections to the threaded rods shall be listed components from the luminaire
manufacturer and be specifically designed for the type of suspension called for on the
Drawings. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
L. Recessed non-linear L.E.D. luminaires (i.e. downlights) located in lay-in type ceiling
tile shall be mounted in the center of the tile or as shown on the Drawings and shall be
supported by means of bar hangers extended across the main ceiling support members
and also supported from the building structure with no less than one (1) 1/4 inch
threaded rod per luminaire. Where luminaires are installed in slopped ceilings the
luminaires shall be complete with appropriate slopped ceiling adapters.
M. Surface mounted non-linear L.E.D. luminaires and exit lights shall be supported from
the building structure with a minimum of two (2) 1/4 inch threaded rods per luminaire or
exit light.
N. 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch steel framing channel shall be used where required to span bar
joists and otherwise facilitate structural support for luminaires and exit lights.
O. Ceiling grid layouts when indicated on the electrical Drawings are for
convenience only. This Contractor shall coordinate the luminaires layout with the
Parcel 35 Specifications
Architect/Engineer and all other trades before the ceiling grid, air outlets, and luminaires
are installed.
P. L.E.D. luminaires installed in mechanical room and other similar equipment
rooms shall be located in the field to clear all obstructions such as ducts, piping,
bracing, and supports. Where the location of luminaires shown on the Drawings must
be radically changed, approval from the Architect/Engineer shall be obtained
before the luminaire is placed.
Q. Pendant mounted luminaires and exit lights shall be located to avoid mechanical
systems, ductwork, piping, structural members, and the like.
R. Supports shall not terminate or be fastened directly to the roof decking.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.02 Hardware
1. Touch Screen 7”
A. Provide wall touch screens as designation on the drawings. The touch screen
shall provide a touch sensitive LCD screen. The integrated visualization software
is with the self-explanatory user interface to perform a particular function when
operating the touch-sensitive TFT display. Windows CE.NET is installed as the
operating system.
B. The touch screen shall connect directly to the control system network and shall
be powered from the network. No extra power pack or other power supply shall
be required
C. The touch screen shall be capable of being programmed via USB connection.
D. The touch screen shall incorporate a touch sensitive 800 x 480 pixels colored
LCD screen, 137 mm wide and 196 mm high.
E. The touch screen shall incorporate an LED backlight.
F. The ambient light level shall be monitored for automatic backlight control.
G. The 7” touch panel has a LAN (10/100 Mbit/s), KNX and USB interface. With
integrated Loudspeaker.
H. The touch screen shall have the following function: Real-time week time switch
with internet time synchronization, Presence simulation (recording and play-
back of switching habits), Alarm management, and Adjustable user interface.
L. 7” touch screen shall communicate with all other system units and obtain power
via the TP1 communication cable.
2. Switch actuators
A. Provide for independent switching of loads via make contacts. The function of
the switching channels is freely configurable. All switching outlets can be
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
KNX / Bacnet is a multi-protocol controller which can be interfaced with several systems and
be integrated in a complete Building Management System (BMS).
KNX / Bacnet
Weekly and annual clock,
KNX IP router,
Logic module,
Energy and technical dashboard.
E. SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT
The planning management interface enables management of weekly and annual schedule
programs of its installation.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Part 3 – Services
3.01 Customization
1. Manufacturer or manufacturer’s approved installer shall provide any custom
hardware or communication devices necessary to make the system perform as
specified above.
2. Manufacturer shall provide custom screens for graphical user interface as specified
above. Rough layouts of the screens will be provided to the manufacturer no less
than 30 days before scheduled system start-up.
3.02 Start-up
1. Manufacturer or manufacturer’s approved installer shall provide onsite services to
confirm correct communications wiring in the field, initiate communications between
panels, and program the lighting control system. System configuration, time-of-day
schedules, and input override assignments to be used in programming shall be
provided to the manufacturer no less than 14 days before planned system start-up.
2. Manufacturer shall provide no. of days of on-site training during the startup period.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
2. Bypass/isolation switch.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations
showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed
features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance
with performance requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The switchboard shall include an integrated automatic plugin source change over
system composed of multiple Moulded case breakers connected to « normal » and
« stand-by » sources.
B. The changeover system shall have two different operational modes “Automatic”
“Manual”, the selection between the two different modes shall be via a selector switch
with key to prevent unauthorized operation
C. The system shall be of mechanically and electrically type interlocked to exclude any
possibility of coupling together the different sources
D. To ensure continuity of service both circuit breakers shall have two stable position,
CLOSED and OPEN. It shall be possible to manually operate each circuit breaker in
the event of the absence of control voltage
E. For maintenance purpose, the system shall have a neutral position with both circuit
breakers in the OPEN position. It shall also be possible to lock each circuit breaker in
the OPEN position.
F. Each circuit breaker of the transfer switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and
alarm contacts (TRIPPED status indication).
G. The control system shall be according to the scheme mentioned on the drawings such
that the choice of the connected source is according to a truth table as indicated on the
drawings.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
The circuit breakers shall comply with IEC947.2 standard.
The breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available to the above
mentioned standards. The test shall be carried out with a breaking performance
during operation (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).
All circuit breakers can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
Parcel 35 Specifications
All circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz).
The rated insulation voltage shall be 1000V AC (50/60Hz).
All circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as standard.
The circuit breaker shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC
947-2 section 7.1.2.
B. Operating mechanism:
The operating mechanism shall be of the energy spring type with a closing time
of less than or equal to 80ms.
Motor charged spring, where the springs are automatically charged by an
electric motor. The maximum time to charge the springs shall not exceed 4
seconds. It shall also be possible to charge the springs manually
C. Main contacts:
Contacts shall be designed to be maintenance free in normal usage. The main
contacts shall be equipped with an indicator in order to allow its wear level to
be checked without measurements nor specific tools.
A mechanical indicator shall be provided on the front face of the circuit
breaker which is linked to the main contact assembly in such a manner as to
positively indicate the contact status, it shall only be possible for "OFF" to be
indicated when all contacts are parted and isolated by the required distance.
D. Electrical auxiliaries:
All electrical auxiliaries including the motor spring charging mechanism shall be field
adaptable without adjustment or the necessity for any tool (except a screwdriver). They
shall be fitted into a compartment which under normally loaded conditions has no
metalwork energized from the main poles exposed with it. Any adaptation carried out
thus shall not increase the breaker volume.
It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front face of the circuit
breaker, this wiring shall be taken through a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all
auxiliary wiring is automatically disconnected in the isolated position.
E. Mechanical indicators:
Mechanical indication on the front of the circuit breaker shall be provided to indicate
the following:
1. Main contacts closed "ON"
2. Main contacts open "OFF"
3. Circuit breaker in "connected" position (draw out only)
4. Circuit breaker in "disconnected" position (draw out only
F. Trip unit:
Parcel 35 Specifications
The trip unit shall be micro-processor based and use digital programming techniques
for highest protection accuracy and be integrated as part of the circuit breaker.
The overcurrent relay shall have a wide adjustment range to allow flexibility of setting
on site. The trip unit shall be the true RMS type.
2.4 OPERATION:
A. The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup
adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75% to 98% of
pickup setting.
B. Single-phase voltage sensing of the emergency source shall be provided, with pickup
voltage adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and independent frequency sensing
with pickup adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal.
C. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 2% over an operating temperature
range of -20°C to 70°C.
D. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments without the
use of tools, meters or power supplies. Actual settings shall be clearly defined in the
operator’s manual.
E. A time delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and
delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds.
F. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5
minutes for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
G. A time delay shall be provided on retransfer to normal, adjustable from 0 to 30
minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and
normal source is acceptable.
H. A time delay shall be provided on shutdown of engine generator for cooldown,
adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.
I. All time delays shall be fully field adjustable without the use of tools.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.3 CONNECTIONS
1) Physical damage.
2) Proper installation and connection
3) Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
Parcel 35 Specifications
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine
cool-down and shutdown sequence.
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings
and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or
tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the transfer
switches and related equipment as specified below: Coordinate this training with that
for generator equipment.
2. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through the Engineer, with at least 7 days'
advance notice.
5. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction.
END OF SECTION 263623
SECTION 263353 – UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I.2DESCRIPTION OF WORK
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
D. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are
stocked and where a field service engineer who is a permanent, full-time
employee of the manufacturer, factory trained and qualified individual whose
primary duty is field service resides.
E. Factory Testing: Before shipment, manufacturer to fully and completely test the
system to assure compliance with the specification including operational
discharge and recharge tests on at least a one-minute battery plant to assure
guaranteed rated performance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for UPS
System.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. System Description
5. Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS at 0.8
lagging power factor as indicated on the drawings.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Rectifier/Charger
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Inverter
2. Output Power Transformer: Dry type power transformer for the inverter
AC output, (copper wiring exclusively) with hottest spot winding
temperature not to exceed the temperature limit of the transformer
insulation class of material when operating at full load at maximum
ambient temperature.
5. Inverter Shutdown: For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical
load, the inverter control electronics to instantaneously turn off the
inverter transistors; simultaneously, the static transfer switch to turn on to
maintain continuous power to the critical load.
- DC Overvoltage Disconnect
Parcel 35 Specifications
11. Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the inverter unit
with fast-acting fuses, so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will
not cause cascading failures; all fuses with a blown fuse indicator with
alarm indication on the control panel.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
- Battery voltage.
Parcel 35 Specifications
- Battery discharging.
- Low battery.
- Overload.
- Overload shutdown.
- Load on bypass.
- Equipment over-temperature.
- Over-temperature shutdown.
- Fan failure.
- DC overvoltage.
- Output overvoltage.
- Output undervoltage.
- Fuse cleared.
- Rectifier/charger failure.
Parcel 35 Specifications
- On maintenance bypass.
- Normal operation.
- Bypass operation.
The mimic panels for sets shall be installed in the Main security
room as indicated on the drowings.
2. Emergency Load Off Switch to isolate the UPS immediately from the load
to be installed near the UPS.
G. Electrical Specifications
1. AC Input to UPS
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Voltage Regulation:
+1%, 3 phase RMS average for a balanced 3 phase load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load,
battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power factor.
+2%, 3 phase RMS average for a 50% unbalanced load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load,
battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power f.
Parcel 35 Specifications
- + 3%
- 0 - 100%
- Load stop
4. Thermal Design: All thermal and ambient sensors, coordinated with the
protective devices for the forced-air cooled power circuit components so
that internal or external fault conditions will be cleared by the protective
devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures
are exceeded.
5. Cable Entry: Power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of
the UPS cabinet as required.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. Environmental Ratings:
o
Operating: UPS: 0C to +40C; Battery: 25 C +5C. Storage: -20C to
70 C.
3. Altitude:
J. Power Warning Signal: An isolated signal, normally closed when utility power
fails and the UPS battery is discharging, provided for user connection to
computer power warning interface.
- Summary alarm.
L. Remote Status Panel: Provide in a suitable enclosure for wall mounting and
include the following indication:
Parcel 35 Specifications
The remote status panels are located in Main security office at reception desk.
M. Batteries: Batteries to be valve regulated lead acid batteries, with cyclic life time
to be not less than 1200 cycle at minumum discharge cell voltage of 1.8 volts.
Output power of the batteries to be calculated at minimum VPC of 1.8 volts and
working temperature of 25 deg C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Provide site testing by the manufacturer's field service personnel. Site testing to
consist of a complete test of the UPS System under load and the associated
accessories supplied by the manufacturer. Document the test results, sign and
date for future reference.
a) Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not
limited to the following:
ii) Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of
connections.
iv) Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and
similar circuits. The separate schematic diagrams shall include complete
three line diagrams of all instruments, switches, any other devices in the
U.P.S.
Parcel 35 Specifications
b) The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this
section shall include but not limited to the following:
Complete technical data on U.P.S. and other equipment including manufacturer's
catalogues, data on operating characteristics compliance with standards,
dimensions and weights, detailed description ...etc.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment and accessories, required for
testing and commissioning of all systems, equipments and services relating to
the electrical works.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - TESTING
A. The consultant shall inspect and test at the makers' works, during manufacture
and after completion, all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or
equipment ordered by the contractor for incorporation in the works, in order to
prove that the material, apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this
specification. The contractor shall notify the Owner's authorized representative
in advance of all such inspections and tests.
Parcel 35 Specifications
The contractor must arrange on his expenses for works tests to be attended by
the Owner's consultant for all tests specified in different sections of
specifications.
Each such order shall clearly state whether the item(s) which it covers is or are
subject to inspection or test before despatch to site.
D. The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions
of this specification shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a
form of test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure
and countersigned by the contractor and four copies of every such test
certificate shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the
test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Owner's authorized
Representative is advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment
is ready for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers' premises. At least
seven days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this
period of notice in drawing up the program of works.
Parcel 35 Specifications
J. When the contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn,
has bought-in major components from a secondary supplier, the Owner's
Consultant shall have the right to elect to inspect such components at the works
of the secondary supplier, and the contractor shall ensure, when placing his
orders, that such rights are secured.
For the purposed of this clause, inter-departmental orders within the same
organization shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving separate
organizations.
K. The Owner's Consultant shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment
at the makers' works. The exercise by the Owner's authorized Representative
of this right shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his obligation to carry
out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
L. No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it has been
inspected by the Owner's Consultant, or inspection has been waived and
despatch has been authorized.
M. When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a
number of like components or items of equipment, the Owner's authorized
representative shall have the right to select that one item or component of each
type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the relevant National
Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected only to routine tests.
A. The Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that the
completed installations fully comply with specified requirements.
Parcel 35 Specifications
together with such other tests as may be specified in order to prove compliance
with the Specification.
C. All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a
program to be agreed with the Owner's Authorized Representative, and facilities
shall be made available for the Owner's Authorized Representative to be
present at all such checks and tests if he so desires.
D. Tests not carried out in the presence of the Owners' Authorized Representative
shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the
Owner's Authorized Representative shall not be regarded as valid for the
purpose of the Contract, unless the Owner's Authorized Representative shall
have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his
absence.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the
test (s) carried out, the result obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
G. No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Owner's
Authorized Representative or painting has been authorized, unless the final
paint finish is necessary to provide the necessary climate protection.
I. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have the right to waive, at his sole
discretion, the requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus
equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests thereon. The exercise
by the Owner's Authorized Representative of this right shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to
submit test certificates.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any voltage tests and
the insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in BS 6346, Table, 6,
for all cables up to 3.3kv. The Contractor shall submit insulation resistance
figures for cables above 3.3kv.
E. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect
of other types of cable.
F. An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring
and metal sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to earth.
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power
fuses fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following
points:
Parcel 35 Specifications
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant
National Standard for the equipment provided.
A. The Contractor shall inspect and carry out tests on all the system and
equipment earthing provisions in accordance with the requirements of the IEE
Wiring Regulations.
B. The method of test and the selection of suitable test instruments shall conform
to the guidelines given in the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16 th. Edition.
C. These tests shall be carried out on all system and equipment earthing supplied,
installed and connected under this Contract.
E. The Contractor shall inspect and re-test the system and equipment earthing
provided under this Contract thirty days prior to the end of the Defects Liability
period. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Authorized Representative seven
days notice of his intent to carry out these tests.
PART 3 - COMMISSIONING
Parcel 35 Specifications
(i) The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of
being energize with complete safety.
(ii) The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in
accordance with the directions of the Owner's Authorized Representative or,
failing such directions, in accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
(iv) The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the
carrying out, where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary
adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
B. Compliance with the requirements of this Section of the Specification shall not, by
itself, in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly,
and that the installations and equipment are in a completely safe and satisfactory
condition.
D. All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this
section of the Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a
competent and experienced commissioning engineer.
F. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to appoint and independent
Commissioning Engineer to act on his behalf in the control of all activities relating to
the commissioning process, and in such matters the said Commissioning Engineer
shall be deemed to be and authorized representative of the Owner's Authorized
Representative
G.The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations
and all work on electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are
Parcel 35 Specifications
carried out in a thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an
approved 'permit-to-work' system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an
'authorized person' as defined in the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations,
and shall communicate the name of such person in writing to the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
J. If required by the Owner's Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall present the
information from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flodiagram or a PERT
('Critical Path') chart.
M.No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior
agreement of the Owner's Authorized Representative. All applicable test certificates
shall have been first submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
N. All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner
and in accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at
Work etc. Act, and the Electricity Regulations.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Q.The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to require that the hole of
the plant, equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if
necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance
period, and the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements
with the Owner.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide outlet boxes in the raceway systems wherever required for pulling wires
and cables, making connections, mounting wiring devices or lighting fixtures, and
for connecting miscellaneous equipment.
B. Certain back boxes for the fire alarm, security systems shall be supplied by the
respective equipment suppliers. Any boxes required for the respective systems
and not furnished by the respective equipment suppliers shall be furnished and
installed. It is this Contractor's responsibility to determine what boxes are and
are not furnished by the respective equipment suppliers.
1.3 GUARANTEES
A. During the experimental period, the system shall be operating under the
contractor’s supervision and responsibility. After the satisfactory completion of this
period, the system shall be taken over by the client, as per contract conditions,
whereby a one-year guarantee period shall commence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Outlet boxes specified herein refer generally to cast or pressed steel boxes of less
than 125 cubic cm internal volume per gang. Refer to "Junction and Pull Boxes" for
larger box specifications.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Outlet boxes were exposed to water or weather shall be approved for this use and
shall be made of cast iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes smaller than permitted by the applicable Code. Where no
outlet box size is indicated or specified, install a box of dimensions not less than
100 mm square by 35 mm deep. In dry locations, use pressed galvanized steel
boxes, with drilled and tapped ears, and manufacturer's pre- punched knockouts.
In wet locations, for exposed interior locations below 1.2 m above floor, and where
poured into exterior concrete, use cast metal boxes with threaded hubs.
B. Equip pressed steel outlet boxes with tile ring where installed in brick, tile, marble,
and similar material, and in masonry block walls. Equip with plaster rings where
plaster or drywall finish is indicated. Select rings of proper depth to place front of
ring even with the plane of the finish surface. Select style of ring to match device
and finish plates to be installed.
C. Close unused openings in pressed steel boxes with knockout closure and in cast
boxes with threaded plugs.
D. Equip cast metal boxes in wet locations with jacketed covers.
E. Use concrete type boxes wherever boxes are embedded in reinforced
concrete walls. These boxes should be placed prior to pouring wall; breaking
reinforced walls to place boxes after pouring is not permissible. If boxes are to be
added after wall is already in place, they must be surface- mounted.
F. Use multiple gang boxes for grouping devices at one location. Provide barriers
between different systems and between adjacent devices when the voltage
between adjacent exposed live parts exceeds 400 volts to ground (i.e. between
phases).
G. Support ceiling outlet boxes flush with the ceiling plane. Use approved bar hanger
or other approved means to provide adequate support for lighting fixtures or other
products attached to ceiling outlet boxes. Equip boxes with fixture studs where
required by the lighting fixtures to be installed. Support boxes in suspended ceiling
systems from main runner channels, or joists or other structural members. Do not
support from the ceiling suspension system support wires or tile support tees or
similar light weight ceiling components, unless the components are designed and
approved for this purpose.
H. Equip outlet boxes used as junction boxes with blank device plates if
installed flush, and with blank galvanized covers if installed on the surface. Use
raised covers on surface boxes in finished areas. Flat plates may be used on
surface boxes in machine rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unfinished areas.
Parcel 35 Specifications
I. Equip outlet boxes with bushed cover plates where used for telephone
systems or other systems requiring an exposed cable connection from the box.
J. Locate outlet boxes so that they shall be readily accessible. Boxes over suspended
ceiling systems are considered readily accessible if the ceiling tile removal permits
ready access to such boxes.
K. Use PVC coated junction boxes in conjunction with PVC coated rigid steel conduit
and fittings.
L. All outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and level. All outlet boxes in a given
project shall be similarly positioned with respect to surrounding architectural
features, to ensure consistency of final appearance throughout project (i.e. uniform
distance of back boxes from doorframes, uniform position on wall column, uniform
location under window, etc). While Contract Drawings indicate approximate location
of outlet boxes, this attention to consistency shall dictate final box placement.
END OF SECTION 27 05 33
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUMMARY
A.This Section includes passive equipment such as wire, cable, connecting devices,
installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice
and high-speed data transmission suitable for local area networks (LANs). The
backbone shall take care of all other systems requirements.
B.Scope of work consists of the installation of a generic structured wiring system based
upon a star topology to connect all manner of applications covering voice and data
transmission, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Voice and data outlets to support IP telephony, and triple play system, etc.
2. Horizontal cabling.
Parcel 35 Specifications
3. Horizontal Cross Connect (HCC - cable termination and cross connect cabling
hardware) including cabinets with provision space for active equipment located
in services locations, or security control room.
4. Fiber optic backbone cabling.
5. Connection to external fiber optic networks
6. Necessary conduits and raceways, patch cables, jumpers and ancillary
equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component
specified.
B.Product data submittal shall include the following as minimum:
1. Schedule of equipment proposed, with catalog reference number.
2. Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
3. Compliance statement to the Specification, with necessary supporting
documents.
4. Catalog pages of proposed equipment.
5. Basic system architecture.
6. Name and address of the authorized local representative/dealer.
C.Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components Show
access and workspace requirements.
1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as
specified in Part 3, in software and format selected by the Engineer.
2. Detailed system schematic diagram for voice and data.
3. Detailed floor layout showing all outlets with label reference and exact routing of
cabling and wire ways.
4. Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
D.Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal
equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
E.Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F.Field Test Reports: Submit testing equipment catalogues for approval by the Engineer.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
G.As-Built Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed
communication systems, in accordance with requirements of the Specification,
Division 1.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.7 COORDINATION
A.Coordinate with the Local Service provider to confirm location of service entrance
arrangement of public telephone exchange lines into the premises including all
passive equipment.
B.Obtain Telecom Egypt requirements and ensure that all installations to be in full
compliance with these requirements.
C. Coordinate Work of this Section with Employer’s:
1. Active equipment, related gateway and external connections.
2. Telephone entry instrument.
3. Triple play equipment suppliers.
D.Meet jointly with representatives of above organizations and the Employer’s
representatives to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interface.
E.Comments from Authorities having jurisdiction shall be implemented in the Contract at
no additional cost to the Employer.
F.Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
G.Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution cabinets, patch panels, and cross
connects in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize
arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch, Triple Play equipment.
A.Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Cable: 1 percent of each size and type used for Project. Furnish on reels.
2. Patch-Panel Units: 10 percent of each type installed, but not less than1.
3. Connecting Blocks: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than1.
4. Outlet Assemblies: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than 1.
5. PVC Conduit: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than 1.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.10 WARRANTY
A.Complete installation shall be certified by the manufacturer for a 25-year warranty. Any
Specific condition to meet the warranty requirement shall be clearly highlighted to the
Engineer within the warranty submission, and prior to equipment approval.
B.Proving period for system shall be three months, before provisional taking over. Any
malfunctioning or system trouble within this period shall be immediately attended by
the contractor and the three months proving period shall restart from date of clearing
the troubles.
A.The Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer
that the spare parts of the system to be installed shall be made available upon
request for at least 25 years from the date of substantial completion, in line with the
warranty specified under 1.9 above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A.Use: On jacks, jack assemblies, patch panels, terminal blocks, and other components
where the conductors of twisted-pair cables are terminated.
Method: By use of an appropriate tool, physically punch cable conductor down on
terminals that displace the conductor insulation, holds the conductor securely in
electrical contact with the terminal, seals the connection against the external
environment, and protects it against accidental contact.
B.Type: Use one Common type of IDC throughout installation to facilitate future
maintenance.
Parcel 35 Specifications
labeling plates, equipped with relevant connecting strips, and have efficient
capacities to fully wire the complete incoming cable and outgoing ones.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G.Patch Cords: 4 pair cables terminated with RJ 45 plug at each end, and with sufficient
lengths to achieve the connection between the switches and patch panels housed in
2 different cabinets. Use keyed plugs for data service.
H.Length limitations for cross-connect jumpers and patch cords in the cross-connect
facilities, including horizontal cross-connects, jumpers, and patch cords that connect
horizontal cabling with equipment or backbone cabling, shall not exceed 6 m in
length.
I.Fiber Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered duplex cable
connectors.
1. Permanent Connection: Permanently connect one end of each connector
module to installed Fiber cable.
2. Number of Connectors per Field: 1 for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to
field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion
criteria with at least 25 percent spares.
J.Fiber Patch Cords: Dual fiber cables in 1200 mm lengths.
Terminations: 2 duplex connectors (SC) arranged to mate with patch-panel
connectors, one at each end of each fiber in cord.
Parcel 35 Specifications
l. Bandwidth (min.)
@ 850-nm 160-MHz*km
@ 1300-nm 500 MHz*km
m. No multi-mode optical fiber shall show a point discontinuity greater than 0.2
dB at the specified wavelengths. Such a discontinuity or any discontinuity
showing a reflection at that point shall be cause for rejection of that fiber by
the Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.1 EXAMINATION
B.Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and
other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards
to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished
spaces.
B.Use listed cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
C.Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
category rating of components and that ensure category performance of completed
and linked signal paths, end to end. Limit amount of cable untwisting to those defined
by the Standard.
D.Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
E.Do not bend cable in handling or in installing to smaller radii than minimums
recommended by manufacturer.
F.Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.
1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same
raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not
damage conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave
wire/cable grips, which will not damage media or raceway.
Parcel 35 Specifications
equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
K.Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-
connect and patch panels.
L.Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types.
M.Fiber Optic Cable Installation
1. Cable slack shall be provided in each Backbone fiber optic cable. This slack is
exclusive of the length of fiber that is required to accommodate termination
requirements and is intended to provide for cable repair and/or equipment
relocation. The cable slack shall be stored in a fashion as to protect it from
damage and to be secured in the termination enclosure or a separate enclosure
designed for this purpose. Multiple cables may share a common enclosure.
Slack required in the various subsystems is as follows:
2. Backbone Intra-Building: A minimum of 5-meters (approx. 15-feet) of slack
cable (each cable if applicable) shall be coiled and secured at one (1) end -
preferably at the Entrance Room and/or Main Equipment Room. Cable slack
installed other than at each end of cable run shall not be allowed.
3. Exact cable termination locations shall be field verified with Owner.
4. Where exposed, all Backbone Fiber Optic Cable shall be installed in protective
inner duct. This includes areas where the cable is routed in cable tray and
where making a transition between paths (e.g. between conduit & cable tray or
into equipment racks).The inner duct should extend into the termination and/or
storage enclosure(s) at system endpoints.
3.3 GROUNDING
A.A clean earth shall be provided for all IT, MER, BMS and control rooms. Comply with
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B.Ground drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments.
C.Signal Ground Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet. Isolate
from power system and equipment grounding.
D.Signal Ground Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.
Bond to building main ground bar.
E.Signal Ground Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground
terminal in each wiring closet and equipment room.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B.Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
D.Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A.Identify system components complying with applicable requirements in Division 26
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and the following specifications.
B.System: Use a unique, 3 syllable alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label
cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same
designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility’s architectural
arrangement.
1. First syllable identifies and locates wiring closet or equipment room where cable
originates.
2. Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect or patch-panel field in
which cable terminates.
3. Third syllable designates type of media (copper or fiber) and position occupied
by cable pairs or fibers in the field.
C.Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes, and provide labels on the outlet cover
plate as well.
D.Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit.
E.Within Connector Fields, in Wiring Closets and Equipment Rooms: Label each
connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data-processing
equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
F.Cables, General: Label each cable within 100 mm of each termination and tap, where
it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
G.Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding 5 m.
H.Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room.
List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.
Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Provide electronic copy of final
comprehensive schedules for Project, in software and format selected by the
Engineer.
Parcel 35 Specifications
from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have
been satisfactorily completed.
1. Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each
conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2 bi-directional
Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations.
2. Fiber-Optic Cable Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection
and Electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters and manufacturer’s
written recommendations. Test optical performance with optical power meter
capable of generating light at all appropriate wavelengths.
B.Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
C.Experimental period for all systems shall be 3 months, before provisional taking over.
D.Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged
equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to existing
system.
3.7 CLEANING
C.After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s
maintenance personnel to adjust and maintain systems.
END OF SECTION 27 10 00
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Paging microphone.
2. Audio matrix/Switcher.
3. Power amplifiers and central equipment racks.
4. CD player
5. Loudspeakers and distribution network.
6. Volume control
7. Power supply
8. Interface with fire alarm system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Zone: A separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may
be arranged for selective switching between different channels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of equipment, submit data for approval including
catalogues and literature, sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes, and
with full description of components and operating parameters.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements. Include record of final speaker-line matching
transformer-tap settings, and signal ground-resistance measurement certified
by Installer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Central Racks are to contain audio mixer, tape recorder, power supply module,
monitor unit, power amplifier and output terminal module. Racks are to be 483
mm standard frame racks, with drawable and hinged. Equipment is to be
mounted and designed for 483 mm rack mounting.
B. Cabinets are to be 483 mm frame, totally enclosed, with side and rear panels
removable, and cable entrance at rear, top or bottom. Surface finish is to be
textured and of approved color. Frames are to be anodized aluminum sections.
Each frame is to be provided with ventilation rack, including automatically
operated fan with thermostatic control. Suitable ventilation openings are to be
provided. Enclosure is to be IP 42 to IEC 144 for indoor installation.
C. Storage: Rack cabinets are to have storage drawers for cables and accessories.
E. Electric connections, other than those for low-level signals, are to be by push-on
spade clips or multi-connector blocks.
F. Low Level Signal Wiring: Heavily braided, PE insulated, screened cable, PVC
sheathed with standard DIN plug connections. Amplifier output lines are to be
twisted pairs heavily screened with tinned copper braid. Hum-producing earth
return loops are to be avoided.
Parcel 35 Specifications
frequency response (60 - 15,000 Hz) and is to provide, with 1-watt input, an 80
dB SPL at 1 m.
1. BOM Pattern: One of the preset BGM patterns can be recalled by using
the function switch on the front panel.
2. Fade-In/Out Capability: The BGM level graphically decreases (fade out)
when paging is begun, and it is gradually restored to the original level
(fade-in) upon completion of the paging announcement.
3. Priority: 9 levels of priority (priority I to8plus one for BGM).
B. Specifications
A. General: At least one power amplifier is to be provided per zone, for mounting in
standard 483 mm racks,. Amplifiers are to be driven by audio mixer or switcher
such that malfunctions of any single amplifier results only in one zone failure.
C. Output: Fully protected against failure due to mismatch, short circuits, thermal
and electrical overloads, overdrive or eventual transients.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Type: rack mounted, high quality, compact disk playback type with 6-disk
cartridge standard, single beam laser assembly and auto playback programme
facilities. CD/DVD player is to have pre-amplifier if necessary with the following
performance:
2.8 LOUDSPEAKERS
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Volume Control: Flush mounting type leg ended black indicating OFF/ MAX
positions with stops fitted to the switch and auto transformer type for more than
5 watt. 100 watt rated unless the total wattage of the supported zone is more
than this, suitable rating shall provide. Volume control shall be at least five
volume steps plus OFF and MAX.
B. Cables for Sound Distribution: Rated for 200 V (maximum) operating voltage,
finely stranded tinned copper, 1.5 mm diameter (minimum), polyethylene insulated,
twisted pair and aluminized polyester shield, stranded tinned drain wire, PVC over-
sheathed.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATIONS
E. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and
counters. Conceal cable and raceway except in unfinished spaces.
Parcel 35 Specifications
G. Match input and output impedance and signal levels at signal interfaces.
Provide matching networks where required.
3.2 GROUNDING
3.3 TESTING
B. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page
material at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs.
Verify proper routing and volume levels and freedom from noise and distortion.
D. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power.
Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz
into each preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure the distortion in
Parcel 35 Specifications
the paging and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any
frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.
E. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and4000 Hz. Use a sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure
level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum
permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels
between locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent zones
must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.
F. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at
normal gain setting at 60, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power
output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.
G. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address
equipment signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Division
26 Section "Grounding."
I. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap
settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.
J. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.
3.4 WARRANTY
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All
manuals shall be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment
supplied will be free of defects in labor, materials and workmanship and will
perform satisfactorily in compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of
one (1) year after commissioning.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.9 SUBMITTALS
F. Product Data: Submit Complete, Detailed, and Original Catalogue for the
manufacturer and marked up for all of the proposed equipment.
G. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number and quantity for all of the
proposed equipment.
H. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection between all
of the system components and the interface with all other system.
I. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings indicating all of the proposed equipment, part numbers, cables, raceways,
Etc.
J. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with
this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the
stated function or specification in a manner different from that described and
specified a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.6 GENERAL
K. All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly
manufactured and regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.
L. All systems and components will have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
M. All systems and components will be provided with an explicit manufacturer
warranty.
N. Architecture:
10. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall conform to the TCP/IP
networking communications protocol between the application server(s), client
workstations, control panels, and database subsystems, using 10/100Mb
Ethernet connectivity over LAN/WAN network typologies.
11. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall be flexible and scalable in
architecture, permitting expansion of both capacity and functionality, to be
implemented progressively as needed, through software licensing and/or
software upgrades.
12. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide the ability to
perform network deployed software updates. Network deployed updates shall
have the option to be deployed manually or automatically.
13. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide a real-time display
of all system status and data at all operator workstations.
14. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall monitor status and record
activity transactions of all secured areas and alarm input/output points; visually
and audibly annunciate alarms upon change of status, for assessment and
response at all operator workstations.
Parcel 35 Specifications
15. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall monitor and record card
access, alarm, and operator activity to an online history/archive database for
reporting.
16. Each control panel shall be able to continue access control and alarm-
monitoring operations autonomously, in the event of Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System hosting failure or network segment outage.
17. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall manage and automatically
download in real-time, all database changes made at all operator workstations,
to the control panels that require notification of the specific database changes or
updates.
18. Also access control system will be stand alone in some location (as per noted in
drawings) otherwise it shall be centralized.
19. Access control system shall be integrated with barrier gate and turnstile gate
through one server.
O. System Redundancy & High Availability
3. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide multiple levels of
communications redundancy and failover for all hosted controllers, digital video
recorders, API service connections, and client workstations.
4. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall be capable of
automatically re-routing communications to alternate Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System computers across the system without operator intervention.
P. Operator Interface:
5. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall use a single Windows
based client application interface for system configuration, administration,
management, and monitoring operations.
6. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide a mouse-driven,
Windows based, graphical user interface.
7. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide on-line context
sensitive help files to facilitate operators in the configuration and operation of the
Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System. Standard Windows help commands
for Contents, Search, Back, and Print shall be supported.
8. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall implement National
Language Support (NLS) in a manner that allows simultaneous multi-lingual
operation, based on individual operator language preference.
Q. Cardholder Management
The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide an operator
interface for enrolment, modification, and deletion of cardholder’s personnel and
access control information. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall
allow enrolment of cardholder’s personnel and access control information in
advance, without requiring assignment of access control card(s). The Access
Parcel 35 Specifications
Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide the ability to select multiple
cardholders and badge records in applying mass changes. The
Cardholder’s personnel and access information shall include the following data:
First Name.
Middle Name 1.
Middle Name 2.
Last Name.
Employee Number.
Personnel Type
Telephone.
C. CONTROLLER OPERATION:
4. Distributed Access Control downloads all “local” access control parameters from
the Host PC to the access control panel, so that it may operate in a centralized
basis. This ensures rapid access processing and minimal dependence on a
single point of failure. Support for a door monitor input, locking mechanism
output, secondary alarm bypass output, and a request to exit input is provided
for each door. Optionally, on each door a second reader may be used for door
exiting. When the door is controlled by two readers for entrance and exit, anti-
pass back operation is available. As a distributed intelligence network
controller, the access control panel allows centralized alarm monitoring,
historical data collection, and zoned anti-pass back.
Parcel 35 Specifications
5. First Entry Auto Unlock allows the door to automatically unlock during the day
based upon a time and day profile. However, this feature ensures that the door
is not unlocked until at least one “authorized” person has arrived, following
occupancy time.
D. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
Parcel 35 Specifications
Where required, will meet with Special Locking Arrangements for Delayed
Egress under NFPA-101 Life Safety Code.
UL listed.
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. All locking devices utilized on passages providing a main means of egress out of a
protected space are to meet the following requirements as outlined below:
UL listed.
Self-lock mounting
Parcel 35 Specifications
2.11 SOFTWARE
The system software will be compiled for faster execution speeds and will offer all
of the following features and capabilities:
Input/output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected
PC workstation, the system operator will have the capabilities through the
keyboard/mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or status using a
tabular or graphic format. A global database sort utility will allow an expanded
tabular display of only the points on the current graphic display. This expanded
tabular display will list point name, hardware address, dynamic state or value,
alarm status, override status, and test mode status.
G. Obtain a summary of all access control doors with status (under access control,
access control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to
the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above
states, or provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or return
to automatic control (remove manual state).
H. Add, delete, or change points within each panel/module or application routine while
on- line.
I. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering
unit descriptors while the system is on-line.
J. Add new panel/module to the system while the system is on-line
K. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays
providing dynamic, animated displays. All development, editing and display work
will be capable of being performed with the system fully on-line and in full
communications with the panels/modules.
L. To enhance system response the database will be distributed with up to 24,000 ID
records residing in each door processing unit. Each distributed control unit will
support a combination of up to 64 sub LAN controllers consisting of access control
panels, alarm input units and alarm input output units. Each access control panel
Parcel 35 Specifications
will be capable of providing full access control decision capabilities and monitoring
of assigned input/output alarm points whether on or off-line with host computer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.6 INSPECTION
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and conditions
under which the access control system is to be installed. The Contractor will notify
in writing if the conditions are found to be detrimental to proper completion of the
work, prior to installation.
3.7 INSTALLATION
G. The contractor will install the access control system, including associated control
devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves the
intended function.
H. The contractor will coordinate with other works as necessary, to interface the
installation of the access control system work with other disciplines.
I. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Standards 486A and B.
J. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures
are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories
for proper mounting.
K. Provide equipment earthling connections for the access control system as required.
L. Provide link between Fire alarm detection system, BMS, and Access control, in
case of fire, the related infection area with fire shall open access doors.
Parcel 35 Specifications
intruder detection system and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three paper operator's
manuals and one digital copy, providing installation and operating instructions
for the access control and intruder detection system.
3.10 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to the training manuals, above, the security Contractor is required to
provide two copies, one paper and one electronic, of the handover and
commissioning documentation. This documentation will include, but is not limited
by, the following.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
Parcel 35 Specifications
1. PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B. Coordinate work with that of all trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
C. Cooperate with such trades to assure that steady progress of all work under the Contract
A. This section covers the specifications of the Fire Alarm and voice evacuation
system required for the project.
B. The fire alarm system shall have the New master Fire Alarm Control Panel MFACP
located at the Public area as shown and indicated on drawings, plus slave fire alarm
control panels as shown and indicated in drawings .
C. The contractor shall have full responsibility to coordinate between all fire alarm
control panels.
D. The provided Fire Alarm System shall be suitable for type of occupancy as
defined by the local building code and as required provided by the local fire
Authority and by the international codes.
Parcel 35 Specifications
E. The Fire Alarm System shall be used to detect early start of fire in any location in
the project and initiate the appropriate annunciation, alarm, interlocking and
counter measures commands as described hereinafter.
F. The Fire Alarm System shall supervise all the functions of the equipment and
devices including the connected safety related systems such as monitoring and
control equipment etc.
G. The fire alarm system shall be intelligent programmable using high sensitivity
addressable microprocessor controlled detectors for smoke, heat and manual
stations, etc.
H. Audible alarms and visual strobe lights shall be used for annunciation as
shown on drawings.
I. The fire alarm system shall be interfaced with Access control system, public
address, , emergency power systems, Firefighting, HVAC work, elevators and all
other related systems.
J. The system shall include all necessary hardware and software for integrated
complete and operable system in accordance with the requirements of this
specification
K. The contractor is requested to provide all the required equipment, component, etc.
which makes the system work as required without any extra cost, the contractor is
responsible For providing even those equipment which are not mentioned in
specifications, BOQ and drawings.
L. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to the following:-
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
21. Fire pumps monitoring and alarm (Power failure, phase reversal, pump running).
M. All system components of the Fire Alarm Life Safety system to be U.L. listed and
F.M. Approved by one manufacturer.
O. After the completion of the installation of the Fire Alarm System, this Contractor
shall perform a complete demonstration test of all systems and devices to the
satisfaction of the Owner and their consulting engineer.
A. The extent of work covers the Fire Alarm System as described by the
specifications and indicated on the Drawings, riser diagrams and Bill of Quantities
of the project.
B. Work shall include but is not limited to all labor, equipment, cable networks,
connection, testing, training, etc. to furnish and install a complete system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
ANSI/UL 827 – 1978 Safety Standards for Central Station for Watchman,
ANSI/UL 1481 – 1979 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling System.
ANSI/UI 268 – 1981 Safety Standards for Smoke Detectors for Fire
ANSI/UL 217 – 1979 Smoke Detectors, Safety Standard for Single & Multiple
Station.
Systems.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. Material Submittal: shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of
fire alarm equipment installed including furnished specialties and accessories.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual
E. Instruction Manuals: The Contractor shall provide with the assistance of the
equipment manufacturer and its authorized, local representative. In addition,
one approved copy of the fire alarm system submittal, complete operating
instructions; pertinent system orientation documents and system service,
testing, and alarm documentation in the fire control area (Fire Alarm Control
Panel) for the permanent use of the Employer and the Fire Department.
F. Proposed zone list with description of zones (alarm, monitor) as they would
appear on the FACP.
The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and
standards.
Parcel 35 Specifications
1.7 TRAINING:
1.8 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee the equipment and workmanship for three (3)
years from damage and deterioration.
A. Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking and scouring.
Do not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new.
B. Store the fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage as per manufacture
recommendation.
A. During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in writing all his
remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from
the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise
from coordination between the system and other activities.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies shall
be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.)
A. The Fire Alarm System supplier shall be responsible to coordinate and exchange
information with Suppliers of other systems and equipment which shall
communicate with, in order to achieve the required specified functions.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. All equipment and materials shall be designed to operate and provide maximum
continuous performance at temperature and humidity of the project location.
Provisions shall be inherently provided in the equipment to protect them from
reduced performance or damage at peak climatic and operating conditions.
Parcel 35 Specifications
consisting of Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (M-FACP) located at the Main
building and connected with other panel in other building as indicated on
drawings which are interconnected together using supervised data
communication links and a Graphical user interface (GUI) connected to the M-
FACP.
D. The FA System shall be electrically supervised for all the system equipment,
wiring and devices including the connected systems and devices of the other
life safety systems (firefighting, HVAC...etc.) as described in the specifications
and shown on drawings.
E. The FA System shall include Emergency Power Supply Systems for each panel,
which allows it to function normally in case of total supply failure for periods
required by the codes.
A. The software shall be using the latest certified manufacturer standard software,
compatible with any required third party subsystem software that may be used by the
FA System to provide the necessary function such as reports, database, etc.
B. The operating software shall manage functions and secure data control and
management, and any necessary real time alarm management applications.
1. The software can be configured over the network with the appropriate
authentication procedures. This includes programming, configuration, control
and operation of the FA System functions.
D. The system shall provide standard and configured custom reports on periodic or
event basis.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The major functions of the FA system are to detect fire in its early
stage, give alarm, commands the connected systems and devices to
execute their quirked counter measure actions in cases of fire, supervise
the system equipment, devices and wiring networks for trouble and failure.
3. Monitor the detectors for sensitivity settings from the control panels
and log changes in sensitivity due to environmental changes, and
indicate the need for service due to accumulative dirt if approach
eighty percent (80%) of the alarm threshold (pre-alarm condition).
5. Report system faults and indicating the location of the faulty device
6. The system shall include event logging and recording facility for saving
and printing all events in real time and capable of events (not less than
5000) for retrieval such as alarms, troubles, supervisory conditions,
etc.
Parcel 35 Specifications
10. The system shall initiate counter measure command signals to the
connected fire safety related systems and devices through remote
control modules and interfaced communication links:
a. HVAC.
d. Elevator System.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. The system shall include intelligent interfacing and signaling circuits for
communication for network operation and control of all the system devices and
equipment (detectors, control module, monitor modules, S-FACP, etc.).
D. The Fire Alarm System shall be fully software driven and shall control all the
logical functions of the system and can be altered in case of required
modifications in the operation of the system which does not alter the basic
functions and performance in accordance with the code.
A. The Fire System shall consist of, but not limited to the following:
3. Event Dot Matrix Printer (EP): The (operating) status and all events taking
place of the fire alarm system shall be printed using EP at real time and as
required. Event logging shall cover the building.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The system shall perform the counter measure command actions in cases of
confirmed fire alarm to the systems connected to M-FACP and S-FACP.
B. The Fire Alarm System shall relay the signals to the equipment of other systems
through control modules on digital bases, which work as interface devices
between the FA System and the connected systems and could be either
digital or include relays for two state operations (start-up and similar
functions).
C. The system shall operate the counter measure actions of the system related to
the specific FACP where confirmed fire alarm was detected. These actions
shall be done through remote control modules, which take command from the
FACP on digital bases. The control modules shall work as interface devices
between the system and other systems, which give the necessary direct
commands to each of these systems.
D. Command signals of the fire alarm system shall control the operation of other
systems through their control panels, and return to normal as soon as the
fire conditions are cleared. These actions shall be included in the event
logging of the system.
E. The fire alarm system shall generate the necessary control function to stop
the Air handling units AHU's supply fans, start exhaust fans, control
dampers, pressurization fans of the HVAC system.
1. The signaling line circuit must be connected to a control device to interrupt the
motor control (MCC) by means of (stop-reset) commands.
Parcel 35 Specifications
b. Pressurization fans,
H. Command the Public address system to stop the broadcasted signal (i.e.
background music if found).
I. The fire alarm system shall monitor the flow and tamper switches of the fire
protection Sprinkler system and give alarm when detect flow of water.
J. The flow switch monitor module shall have a delay time to compensate for
water surged without sending an alarm.
K. The monitor module shall monitor the fire pumps (standby - fault - run)
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Sprinkler Fire Fighting System: The FA System shall monitor the water flow
in the main valves of the Sprinkler System in order to initiate alarm whenever
flow of water is detected. Alarm initiated from the Sprinkler System flow
switches shall be of the non-addressable type and shall be monitored by the
FA as passive devices for operation and fault by addressable monitoring
modules. Addressable monitoring modules connected to tamper switches
shall also monitor faults condition.
B. The fire protection pumps shall be supervised by the FA system through their
control panel for run, fail, phase reverse and fuel level for diesel pump conditions
using addressable monitoring modules.
1. The clean agent Fire Fighting Systems shall be supervised by the Fire
Alarm System through their control panels for alarm, trouble and
extinguishing.
2. Duct smoke detectors within the HVAC system (location and number of duct
smoke detectors shall be coordinated with HVAC).
A. Activation of any fire alarm initiating source(s) shall cause the following actions
and indications:
B. Alarm Verification: The control equipment of the Fire Alarm System shall make
sure that the alarm signal received from the initiating circuit is correct and shall
ignore warning due to faults, drift, dirt, etc.
Parcel 35 Specifications
4. Configuration Period: Any alarm signal to be received during the next sixty
(60) seconds (software adjustable), alarm condition is considered confirmed
and appropriate actions shall take place. The confirmation alarm signal could
be initiated from the same detector or another one in the same zone area.
C. Alarm Sounding: The M-FACP and S-FACP shall activate alarm sirens and
visual alarms in the area(s) where confirmed detection of fire took place.
Alarm acknowledgement shall stop the audio and visual alarm and shall be done
only from the M-FACP and S-FACP by authorized personnel.
D. Alarm Announcement in the Main and Sub Control Equipment: Confirmed fire
alarm conditions shall activate display messages on the MFACP and S-FACP,
together with local audio visual alarm signals. Displayed messages shall indicate
addresses and locations of circuits and devices causing the alarm. Alarm
acknowledgement shall also stop the local alarm but shall leave the message in
display continuously as long as the alarm condition exists. This procedure shall
be repeated for any subsequent alarm conditions.
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. Visual Alarm: Alarms strobe lights shall be located in accordance to the code
requirements and shall be operated together with the audible alarm and continue until
the system is reset and source of alarm does not exist.
G. Voice Evacuation and Alarm Messages: The voice messages shall follow audio
announcement signals. Audio evacuation messages shall have absolute priority on
any ongoing other messages. Voice evacuation messages shall cover all public
areas, corridors and within rooms necessary to achieve audible levels.
I. In case of fire, the stop signal generated by fire alarm system shall be sent to the
public address system to mute the broadcasted signals of public address system and
activate the appropriate evacuation alarm messages related to that zone according
to the fire strategy of the building.
J. The stop signal generated by fire alarm system shall have the absolute priority
over all the broadcasted signals by public address system.
A. The following trouble signals in the Alarm System shall activate local audio
visual alarm together with visual display of the nature of the trouble in the M-FACP
and S-FACP
Parcel 35 Specifications
components,
3. Communication failure,
5. Cable and wiring network, which interconnects the system all together in order
to perform as an Integral System,
A. The FA System shall supervise all the system equipment and devices for trouble
signals, which shall activate local audiovisual alarm together with visual display of
the nature of the trouble in the M-FACP and S-FACP, having trouble in its
supervision area
5. Manual stations
6. Monitor modules
Parcel 35 Specifications
9. Door Holder
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The contractor shall provide a detailed cause and effect matrix as a shop
drawing which shall reflect all details about the fire alarm conditions,
supervision conditions and trouble conditions for all fire alarm system
components and all related systems and equipment (HVAC, Public Address,
Elevators,…etc.).
3. Table for all other Control / Monitor Modules for Public Address,
Elevators, Generators, Fire Pump, etc.
A. The M-FACP Panel shall include the necessary hardware and software
required to function as specified and according to the code requirements.
B. It will run the system software to monitor, supervise and control all devices
within its field of coverage.
C. M-FACP exchange data and commands with other Panels such as (Gas and slave
panel).
D. The M-FACP which interconnects all system equipment and devices in network
configuration and shall include processing, interfacing and communication
circuits required to communicate with other parts of the system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
B. The Slave-panel shall operate in a network configuration with the M-FACP and
can operate independently if communication seizes between them.
C. Other exchange data and commands with the M-FACP. The S-FACP Panel
shall include the necessary hardware and software required to function as
specified and according to the code requirements.
D. The constituents of the Slave FA Control Panel (S-FACP) are as follows, but are
not limited to:
2. Communication interfaces
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The system shall be equipped with an Emergency Power Supply System capable of
supplying the necessary power to run the fire alarm system for 24 hours on stand-by
mode and for 30 minutes in case of alarm state. The Emergency power supply shall
include battery of sufficient capacity; battery charger and non-break change over
circuitry.
C. All power supplies shall be installed in conformity with the requirements of NFPA 70,
National Electrical Code, for such equipment and with the requirements indicated in this
subsection.
D. The Power Supply shall operate on 230V AC, 50 Hz, and shall provide all necessary
power for the control panel.
E. The function of the Control Module is to provide command signal to the non-addressable
connected devices and systems.
F. Control Module Commands shall be from Fire Alarm System through addressable
supervised communication. Interfacing circuits shall be included which generate the
required actions command signals in to the control program of the system.
B. Two (2) state alarm or supervisory signals shall be transformed by the MMs to
addressable digital form to be processed by the system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. MM's shall monitor the status of C02 & FM200 panel (status, fault and alarm),
Flow and tamper switches of the sprinkler system.
A. The CM devices are intended for controlling the other systems and/or devices.
They shall be installed in remote locations of devices to be supervised by the FA
System on digital bases.
B. Two (2) state alarm or supervisory signals shall be transformed by the CMs to
addressable digital form to be processed by the system.
C. CM's shall control of other systems (such as: access, HVAC, FF …etc.) as shown
and as indicated in drawings.
A. They shall be double action, manual stations with normally open, single
pole alarm contacts. Each station plate shall include operating instructions in
English and Arabic.
B. Manual fire alarm station shall be constructed of flame retardant plastic with
clearly visible operating instructions provided on the glass. The word FIRE
shall appear on the front of the station.
C. Manual fire alarm station shall be located throughout the protected area so that
they are conspicuous, unobstructed, and accessible.
Parcel 35 Specifications
F. The operable part of each manual fire alarm station shall be installed in
accordance with NFPA72 requirements.
G. The outdoor manual stations shall be the same as indoor but with weather proof
housing with minimum IP55.
A. All detectors shall have built-in microprocessor and to have capability to store
predefined algorithms to be remotely controlled and selected. Each detector
shall have the following facilities:
5. Internal self-diagnosis
B. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel
through the same supervised signaling detection loop.
Parcel 35 Specifications
D. Each detector base or head shall have two flashing status indicating LED
for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will
latch on steady and at full brilliance until it is reset by actuating, from the
control panel, the reset switch.
F. Detectors shall be plug-in lockable with separate base, including all addressable
circuitry, connected with two (2) wires to the panels and shall be self-
adaptive to the system having the possibility of address setting from the
system.
Parcel 35 Specifications
O
Heat sensor : Alarm at 35 C above
ambient Protection category IEC529: IP – 43
Smoke entry characteristics: 360 degrees in all directions.
2. The required detector shall be fixed temperature heat detector. The detector
shall be static with threshold at 57°C ± 5° C.
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. The sirens with strobe light shall be addressable and shall use the same
addressable detectors base which supplied in the project.
C. It shall be 15/75 candela Xenon strobe light. The sire with strobe light and lens
shall be mounted on a single-gang, red, metal plate with the word "Fire"
vertically imprinted in red, on the front and both sides of a rectangular, opaque
white lens. The alarm strobe light shall be furnished for flush or surface mounting
with matching back box.
D. The outdoor Alarm Siren with Strobe light shall be the same as indoor but with
weather proof housing with minimum IP-65.
E. In public areas the total sound pressure level produced by combining the
ambient sound pressure level with all audible notification appliances operating
Parcel 35 Specifications
must not exceed 120dBA and above ambient noise by 5dBA anywhere in the
occupied areas.
110 cd: For maximum room size 16.5 × 16.5 mt. and ballrooms, garage,
kitchens177 cd: For maximum room size 20.7 × 20.7 mt. and Guest rooms,
suites
D. Strobes must have a flash rate of 60 to 120 flashes in a minute per NFPA 72.
A. One amplifier of at least 480 watt RMS rating is to be supplied per speaker zone.
Maximum initial loading 75% of output rating of amplifier.
B. Technical Performance
1. Power rating: 480W RMS continues duty measured with sine wave signal.
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. Fault isolation shall be provided at riser and loop circuits at locations not
exceeding the maximum number of devices in between according to
Manufacture's requirements; the minimum number of isolators allowed is one
(1) for every fifteen/twenty (15-20) device in the loop.
A. Automatic Telephone Dialer ATD with at least 3 lines shall provide the
system with automatic ability to dial a remote firefighting location and deliver pre-
recorded emergency message through a dedicated line. Message length shall be
of (50) second at least. Telephone dialer shall provide message test speaker and a
message test switch. The dialer shall be provided with battery backup operation and
programming facility.
Parcel 35 Specifications
Parcel 35 Specifications
A. Fire Alarm System test instructions chart shall be in two languages (Arabic and
English) mounted in an enclosed frame assembly on control cabinet hinged door
and on Manual stations.
2.28 WIRING
A. The installation of all wiring, cable, and equipment shall be in accordance with
NFPA 70.
B. All equipment, devices, and appliances and wiring connections shall be monitored for
the integrity of the interconnecting conductors or equivalent path so that the
occurrence of a single open or a single ground-fault condition in the installation
conductors or other signaling channels and their restoration to normal shall be
automatically indicated.
D. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class A circuits,
and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these
conductors.
E. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for
use with a Protective Signaling System.
F. All Embedded conduits shall be UPVC and all surface conduits including over
false ceiling shall be Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel (EMT) type. EMT conduits shall
be used for floor interconnection rises.
G. All fire alarm cables shall be fire resistant Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH).
A. The wiring which interconnects all addressable devices (detectors, etc.) with control
equipment shall be twisted and shielded according to the Manufacturers
requirements, 1.5mm2 minimum copper single core PVC insulated cables
constituting supervised Class A circuits of the appropriate style to meet the alarm
Parcel 35 Specifications
C. The wiring of high current devices such as Sirens shall be with cross section
area according to Manufacturer requirements and shall not be less than 1.5mm2
and shall not cause more than five percent (5%) voltage drop.
D. All wiring shall be color coded and cabled. Junction boxes shall be red colored
and include wiring identification numbering.
E. Wires and cables shall provide sufficient resistance to the spread of fire (according
to NFPA) and generate no hazardous smoke to human life. Wiring System shall
include all indoor and outdoor wires and cables necessary for complete Fire Alarm
System. Including control and supervisory circuits, interconnecting with other related
system. (HVAC, etc.). Outgoing and returning conductors are separately routed in
each loop circuit.
Parcel 35 Specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.11 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which Fire Alarm System shall be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
H. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the Contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.
Parcel 35 Specifications
M. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation
only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
P. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the
testing to prevent unnecessary response.
Q. Tests of all circuits extending from the FACP shall be made at intervals of not
more than 24 hours.
C. Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced with fire
the alarm system:
Parcel 35 Specifications
3.15 TRAINING
Parcel 35 Specifications
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on the
installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the equipment. The
training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 10 days.
Factory acceptance testing for this system are not requires the presence of the
Employer staff/Engineer at the factory; therefore we need Factory test certificate
only.
PART 80 - GENERAL
0.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Piping tubes, and fittings
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Manual valves.
4. Pressure-reducing valves.
5. Automatic control valves.
6. Automatic drain valves.
7. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
8. Sub surface
9. Quick couplers.
10. Drip irrigation specialties.
11. Controllers.
12. Valve Boxes.
0.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Type: Coarse.
b. Texture:
c. Particle Size:
0.5 SUBMITTALS
F. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.
PART 81 - PRODUCTS
B. Form: Sheet.
D. Color: Black.
A. Curb Valves:
a. Standard: AWWA C800.
b. DN 25 and Smaller Pressure Rating: 690 kPa minimum
c. DN 32 to DN 50 Pressure Rating: 550 kPa minimum
d. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug.
e. End Connections: Matching piping.
f. Stem: With wide-tee head.
B. Curb-Valve Casing:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.
b. SWP Rating: 1035 kPa.
c. CWP Rating: 4140 kPa.
d. Body Design: Two piece.
a. Standard: MSS SP-72.
b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Design: Split body.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel.
i. Port: Full.
1. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-122.
b. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum.
c. Body Material: PVC.
d. Type: Union.
e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
f. Port: Full.
a. Standard: AWWA C509.
b. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa minimum.
c. Body Material: Ductile or gray iron with bronze trim.
d. End Connections: Mechanical joint or push-on joint.
e. Interior Coating: Comply with AWWA C550.
f. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
g. Operator: Stem nut.
h. Disc: Solid wedge with resilient coating.
I. Operating Wrenches for Iron Gate Valve Casings: Furnish one steel,
tee-handle operating wrench (es) with one pointed end, stem of length to
operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut for
Project.
a. Manifold:
b. Emitter No.:
0.12 CONTROLLERS
A. Description:
6. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water
flow during rain.
7. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors;
insulated cable; suitable for direct burial.
8. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 900 by 600
by 100 mm thick, and 150 mm greater in each direction than overall
dimensions of controller. Include opening for wiring.
14. Each controller have at least 15% additional space and have at least
10% additional space in case of not specified in drawings or other
consultant documents.
A. Plastic Boxes:
1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade.
B. Polymer-Concrete Boxes:
1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade.
b. Shape: Round.
c. Sidewall Material: Polymer concrete with lateral and vertical
sidewall design loading of 2268 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm square.
d. Cover Material: Polymer concrete with cover design loading of
2268 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm square.
B. COMMUNICATION WIRE
Communication wire shall be Paige Electric fully jacketed, 2 conductor, type UF,
communication cable. All splices in the communication wire shall be made at
the field satellite or in an approved junction box marked "ELECTRICAL".
All direct burial wire shall be Type UF, 600 PVC insulated, solid copper, and
shall be sized and color coded as indicated on the plans.
All wire splices and underground connections shall be made with an approved
waterproof connector, and shall be made within a junction box, valve box, or
controller pedestal.
All high voltage power supply and control wiring shall be performed in
accordance with all codes and ordinances regulating this work.
All control wire shall be fully jacketted, 1 conductor, type UF, #14 AWG running
from each valve-in-head sprinkler to the nearest controlling field satellite.
All common wire shall be fully jacketted, 1 conductor, type UF, #12 AWG.
Where possible, the contractor shall install all power and low voltage control
wires to the side of, and in the same trench as, the mainline pipe.
Where more than one wire is installed in a trench, the wires shall be bundled
and taped together at 10' intervals.
All wires shall have a 36" expansion loop provided at all changes of direction
and at 300' intervals.
All direct burial wire shall be Paige Electric.
D. WIRE CONNECTORS
All low voltage wire connections shall be made with North Star Industries #SK
14-12G.
PART 82 - EXECUTION
0.1 EARTHWORK
0.2 PREPARATION
M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and
pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground
or in control-valve boxes.
P. Install sleeves made of Schedule 80 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
1. Underground Piping:
2. Aboveground Piping:
1. Underground Piping:
2. Aboveground Piping:
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of
steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe
and fittings before assembly.
H. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and
aboveground in control-valve boxes.
0.8 CONNECTIONS
0.9 IDENTIFICATION
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate
controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system
operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
0.12 ADJUSTING
0.13 DEMONSTRATION
1. SIDR 7, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and fastener
joints.
2. DR 9, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion, or PE socket-type
fittings; and heat-fusion joints.
3. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
4. SDR 26, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings;
and solvent-cemented joints.
1. SIDR 7, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded
or fastener joints.
2. DR 9, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE socket or butt-fusion fittings; and
heat-fusion joints. DN 80 pipe and fittings if DN 65 pipe and fittings are
not available.
3. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
4. SDR 26, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings;
and solvent-cemented joints.
1. SIDR 9, 11.5, or 15, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe;
and banded or fastener joints.
2. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
3. SDR 21, 26, or 32.5, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Curb valve, curb-valve casing, and shutoff rod.
2. DN 80 and Larger: Iron gate valve, resilient seated; iron gate valve
casing; and operating wrenches.
B. Throttling-Duty Valves:
3.16 Valve boxes shall be used as durable, rigid enclosures for valves or other
irrigation system components requiring subsurface protection for installation or
maintenance. The valve box shall be made of structural foam HDPE resin that is
resistant to UV light, weather, moisture and chemical action of soils. Valve box body
shall be composed of 100% recycled HDPE. The super jumbo rectangular body
shall have knock‐outs molded into the sides that can be readily removed. The
knock‐outs shall remain an integral part of the body unless removed to run pipes or
wires through the valve box. The valve box shall have corrugated sides. The valve
box shall have a grooved feature on one side, just below the lid at the top of the
box, for inserting a shovel blade or other prying tool to provide easy lid removal.
This is useful following compaction of the surrounding soil or after the eventual
accumulation of thatch over the valve box. Boxes shall have a stepped feature on
the bottom that securely interlocks two boxes together when mated bottom‐to‐
bottom for use in a deep installation. Lids shall have beveled edges to minimize
potential damage from lawn equipment. Lids shall be clearly marked with the words
“Irrigation Control Valve” molded onto the top. Lids shall have a marking area
measuring at least 6.0" by 2.0" that is suitable for branding or other means of
identification. The locking bolt, washer and clip shall be made of stainless steel.
3.17 Warranty:
one year warranty for all plant categories and all irrigation items.
END OF SECTION